A700 Basic Manual

INVERTER
FR-A700
INSTRUCTION MANUAL (BASIC)
FR-A700
FR-A720-0.4K to 90K
FR-A740-0.4K to 500K
Thank you for choosing this Mitsubishi Inverter.
This Instruction Manual (basic) is intended for users who "just want to run the inverter".
If you are going to utilize functions and performance, refer to the Instruction Manual (applied) [IB-0600226ENG].
The Instruction Manual (applied) is separately available from where you purchased the inverter or your Mitsubishi
sales representative.
INVERTER
CONTENTS
1 PRODUCT CHECKING AND PARTS IDENTIFICATION.............................. 1
2 INSTALLATION AND WIRING ...................................................................... 2

2.1 Peripheral devices.....................................................................................................3
2.2 Method of removal and reinstallation of the front cover............................................5
2.3 Installation of the inverter and instructions................................................................7
1
2.4 Wiring.........................................................................................................................8
2.5 Power-off and magnetic contactor (MC) .................................................................35
2.6 Precautions for use of the inverter ..........................................................................36
2.7 When using the high-duty brake resistor (FR-ABR) ...............................................37
3 DRIVE THE MOTOR .................................................................................... 38

3.1 Step of operation .....................................................................................................38 2
3.2 Operation panel (FR-DU07) ....................................................................................39
3.3 Before operation......................................................................................................48
3.4 Start/stop from the operation panel (PU operation mode)......................................73
3.5 Make a start and stop with terminals (external operation)......................................78
3.6 Parameter List .........................................................................................................85 3
4
700
TROUBLESHOOTING ............................................................................... 129
4.1 Reset method of protective function......................................................................129
4.2 List of alarm display...............................................................................................130
4.3 Causes and corrective actions ..............................................................................131
4
INSTRUCTION MANUAL (BASIC)
4.4 Correspondences between digital and actual characters.....................................143

4.5 Check and clear of the alarm history.....................................................................144
HEAD OFFICE:MITSUBISHI DENKI BLDG MARUNOUCHI TOKYO 100-8310 4.6 Check first when you have troubles ......................................................................146
5 PRECAUTIONS FOR MAINTENANCE AND INSPECTION ..................... 149

5.1 Inspection item ......................................................................................................149 5
6 SPECIFICATIONS ..................................................................................... 157
6.1 Rating ....................................................................................................................157
6.2 Common specifications .........................................................................................161
IB(NA)-0600225ENG-C(0509)MEE Printed in Japan Specifications subject to change without notice.

6.3 Outline dimension drawings ..................................................................................162 6
C 6.4 Heatsink protrusion attachment procedure...........................................................175
This instruction manual (basic) provides handling information and precautions for use of the equipment.
Please forward this instruction manual (basic) to the end user.
This section is specifically about safety matters (2) Wiring CAUTION
Do not attempt to install, operate, maintain or inspect the inverter until you • Do not install a power factor correction capacitor or surge suppressor/radio
have read through this instruction manual (basic) and appended documents noise filter (capacitor type filter) on the inverter output side.
carefully and can use the equipment correctly. Do not use the inverter until • The connection orientation of the output cables U, V, W to the motor will affect
you have a full knowledge of the equipment, safety information and the direction of rotation of the motor.
instructions. In this instruction manual (basic), the safety instruction levels are
classified into "WARNING" and "CAUTION". (3) Test operation and adjustment
WARNING Assumes that incorrect handling may cause hazardous
conditions, resulting in death or severe injury.
CAUTION
• Before starting operation, confirm and adjust the parameters. A failure to do so
Assumes that incorrect handling may cause may cause some machines to make unexpected motions.
CAUTION hazardous conditions, resulting in medium or slight
injury, or may cause physical damage only. (4) Operation WARNING
Note that even the CAUTION level may lead to a serious consequence • When you have chosen the retry function, stay away from the equipment as it
according to conditions. Please follow strictly the instructions of both levels will restart suddenly after an alarm stop.
because they are important to personnel safety.
• The key is valid only when the appropriate function setting has been
1. Electric Shock Prevention made. Prepare an emergency stop switch separately.
WARNING • Make sure that the start signal is off before resetting the inverter alarm. A failure
to do so may restart the motor suddenly.
• While power is on or when the inverter is running, do not open the front cover.
Otherwise you may get an electric shock. • The load used should be a three-phase induction motor only. Connection of any
• Do not run the inverter with the front cover or wiring cover removed. other electrical equipment to the inverter output may damage the inverter as well as
Otherwise, you may access the exposed high-voltage terminals or the charging equipment.
part of the circuitry and get an electric shock. • Performing pre-excitation (LX signal and X13 signal) under torque control (real
• Even if power is off, do not remove the front cover except for wiring or periodic sensorless vector control) may start the motor running at a low speed even
inspection.You may access the charged inverter circuits and get an electric shock. when the start command (STF or STR) is not input. The motor may run also at a
• Before starting wiring or inspection, check to make sure that the operation panel low speed when the speed limit value = 0 with a start command input. Perform
indicator is off, wait for at least 10 minutes after the power supply has been pre-excitation after making sure that there will be no problem in safety if the
switched off, and check that there are no residual voltage using a tester or the motor runs.
like. The capacitor is charged with high voltage for some time after power off and • Do not modify the equipment.
it is dangerous. • Do not perform parts removal which is not instructed in this manual. Doing so
• This inverter must be earthed (grounded). Earthing (grounding) must conform to may lead to fault or damage of the inverter.
the requirements of national and local safety regulations and electrical codes.
(JIS, NEC section 250, IEC 536 class 1 and other applicable standards)
• Any person who is involved in the wiring or inspection of this equipment should
CAUTION
be fully competent to do the work. • The electronic thermal relay function does not guarantee protection of the motor
• Always install the inverter before wiring. Otherwise, you may get an electric shock from overheating.
or be injured. • Do not use a magnetic contactor on the inverter input for frequent starting/
• Perform setting dial and key operations with dry hands to prevent an electric stopping of the inverter.
shock. Otherwise you may get an electric shock. • Use a noise filter to reduce the effect of electromagnetic interference. Otherwise
• Do not subject the cables to scratches, excessive stress, heavy loads or nearby electronic equipment may be affected.
pinching. Otherwise you may get an electric shock. • Take measures to suppress harmonics. Otherwise power supply harmonics from
• Do not replace the cooling fan while power is on. It is dangerous to replace the the inverter may heat/damage the power factor correction capacitor and
cooling fan while power is on. generator.
• Do not touch the printed circuit board with wet hands. You may get an electric shock. • When a 400V class motor is inverter-driven, please use an insulation-enhanced
motor or measures taken to suppress surge voltages. Surge voltages
2. Fire Prevention CAUTION attributable to the wiring constants may occur at the motor terminals,
deteriorating the insulation of the motor.
• Mount the inverter to non-combustible surface such as metal or concrete.
Mounting it to or near combustible material can cause a fire. • When parameter clear or all clear is performed, reset the required parameters
• If the inverter has become faulty, switch off the inverter power. before starting operations. Each parameter returns to the initial value.
A continuous flow of large current could cause a fire. • The inverter can be easily set for high-speed operation. Before changing its
• When using a brake resistor, make up a sequence that will turn off power when setting, fully examine the performances of the motor and machine.
an alarm signal is output. • In addition to the inverter's holding function, install a holding device to ensure
Otherwise, the brake resistor may excessively overheat due to damage of the safety.
brake transistor and such, causing a fire. • Before running an inverter which had been stored for a long period, always
• Do not connect a resistor directly to the DC terminals P/+, N/−. This could cause perform inspection and test operation.
a fire. • For prevention of damage due to static electricity, touch nearby metal before
touching this product to eliminate static electricity from your body.
3. Injury Prevention CAUTION (5) Emergency stop CAUTION
• Apply only the voltage specified in the instruction manual to each terminal.
Otherwise, burst, damage, etc. may occur. • Provide a safety backup such as an emergency brake which will prevent the
• Ensure that the cables are connected to the correct terminals. Otherwise, burst, machine and equipment from hazardous conditions if the inverter fails.
damage, etc. may occur. • When the breaker on the inverter input side trips, check for the wiring fault (short
• Always make sure that polarity is correct to prevent damage, etc. Otherwise, circuit), damage to internal parts of the inverter, etc. Identify the cause of the trip,
burst, damage, etc. may occur. then remove the cause and power on the breaker.
• While power is on or for some time after power-off, do not touch the inverter as it • When the protective function is activated, take the corresponding corrective
is hot and you may get burnt. action, then reset the inverter, and resume operation.
4. Additional Instructions (6) Maintenance, inspection and parts replacement
Also note the following points to prevent an accidental failure, injury, electric
shock, etc. CAUTION
(1) Transportation and installation • Do not carry out a megger (insulation resistance) test on the control circuit of the
inverter.
CAUTION (7) Disposing of the inverter
• When carrying products, use correct lifting gear to prevent injury.
• Do not stack the inverter boxes higher than the number recommended. CAUTION
• Ensure that installation position and material can withstand the weight of the • Treat as industrial waste.
inverter. Install according to the information in the instruction manual.
• Do not install or operate the inverter if it is damaged or has parts missing. This can General instructions
result in breakdowns. Many of the diagrams and drawings in this instruction manual (basic) show the
• When carrying the inverter, do not hold it by the front cover or setting dial; it may inverter without a cover, or partially open. Never run the inverter in this status.
fall off or fail. Always replace the cover and follow this instruction manual (basic) when
• Do not stand or rest heavy objects on the product. operating the inverter.
• Check the inverter mounting orientation is correct.
• Prevent other conductive bodies such as screws and metal fragments or other
flammable substance such as oil from entering the inverter.
• As the inverter is a precision instrument, do not drop or subject it to impact.
• Use the inverter under the following environmental conditions. Otherwise, the
inverter may be damaged.
Ambient temperature -10°C to +50°C (non-freezing)
Ambient humidity 90% RH or less (non-condensing)
Environment
Storage temperature -20°C to +65°C *1

Atmosphere Indoors (free from corrosive gas, flammable
gas, oil mist, dust and dirt)
Maximum 1000m above sea level for standard
Altitude, vibration operation. 5.9m/s2 or less *2 (conforming to
JIS C 60068-2-6)
*1 Temperature applicable for a short time, e.g. in transit.
2
*2 2.9m/s or less for the 160K or more.
A-1
— CONTENTS —
1 PRODUCT CHECKING AND PARTS IDENTIFICATION 1
2 INSTALLATION AND WIRING 2
2.1 Peripheral devices ................................................................................................. 3

2.2 Method of removal and reinstallation of the front cover ......................................... 5
2.3 Installation of the inverter and instructions............................................................. 7
2.4 Wiring..................................................................................................................... 8
2.4.1 Terminal connection diagram .................................................................................................... 8
2.4.2 EMC filter................................................................................................................................... 9
2.4.3 Specification of main circuit terminal ....................................................................................... 10
2.4.4 Terminal arrangement of the main circuit terminal, power supply and the motor wiring. ........ 10
2.4.5 Control circuit terminals ........................................................................................................... 20
2.4.6 Changing the control logic ....................................................................................................... 23
2.4.7 Wiring of control circuit ............................................................................................................ 25
2.4.8 When connecting the operation panel using a connection cable ............................................ 26
2.4.9 RS-485 terminal block ............................................................................................................. 26
2.4.10 Communication operation........................................................................................................ 27
2.4.11 USB connector ........................................................................................................................ 27
2.4.12 Connection of motor with encoder(vector control) ................................................................... 28
2.5 Power-off and magnetic contactor (MC) .............................................................. 35
2.6 Precautions for use of the inverter ....................................................................... 36
2.7 When using the high-duty brake resistor (FR-ABR)............................................. 37
3 DRIVE THE MOTOR 38
3.1 Step of operation.................................................................................................. 38

3.2 Operation panel (FR-DU07) ................................................................................. 39
3.2.1 Parts of the operation panel (FR-DU07) .................................................................................. 39
3.2.2 Basic operation (factory setting) .............................................................................................. 40
3.2.3 Operation lock (Press [MODE] for an extended time (2s)) ...................................................... 41
3.2.4 Monitoring of output current and output voltage ...................................................................... 42
3.2.5 First priority monitor ................................................................................................................. 42
3.2.6 Setting dial push ...................................................................................................................... 42
3.2.7 Change the parameter setting value ....................................................................................... 43
3.2.8 Parameter clear, all parameter clear ....................................................................................... 44
3.2.9 Parameter copy and parameter verification............................................................................. 45
3.3 Before operation .................................................................................................. 48
3.3.1 Simple mode parameter list ..................................................................................................... 48
3.3.2 Overheat protection of the motor by the inverter (Pr. 9) .......................................................... 49
3.3.3 When the rated motor frequency is 50Hz (Pr. 3) .................................................................... 50
3.3.4 Increase the starting torque (Pr. 0) ......................................................................................... 51
3.3.5 Limit the maximum and minimum output frequency (Pr. 1, Pr. 2) ........................................... 52
3.3.6 Change acceleration and deceleration time (Pr. 7, Pr. 8)........................................................ 53
3.3.7 Selection of the start command and frequency command locations (Pr. 79) .......................... 54
3.3.8 Large starting torque and low speed torque are necessary (advanced magnetic
flux vector control, real sensorless vector control) (Pr. 71, Pr. 80, Pr. 81, Pr. 800) ............... 55
I
3.3.9 Higher accuracy operation using a motor with encoder (Vector control)
(Pr.71, Pr.80, Pr.81, Pr.359, Pr.369, Pr.800) .......................................................................... 58
3.3.10 To exhibit the best performance of the motor performance (offline auto tuning)
(Pr. 71, Pr. 83, Pr. 84, Pr. 96) .............................................................................................. 63
CONTENTS
3.3.11 High accuracy operation unaffected by the motor temperature
(online auto tuning) (Pr. 95) ................................................................................................ 67
3.3.12 To perform high accuracy / fast response operation (gain adjustment of real
sensorless vector control) (Pr. 818 to Pr. 821, Pr. 880)
............................................................................................................................................... 68
3.4 Start/stop from the operation panel (PU operation mode) ................................... 73
3.4.1 Set the set frequency to operate (example: performing operation at 30Hz) ............................ 73
3.4.2 Use the setting dial like a potentiometer to perform operation. ............................................... 74
3.4.3 Use switches to give a start command and a frequency command (multi-speed setting) ....... 75
3.4.4 Perform frequency setting by analog (voltage input) ............................................................... 76
3.4.5 Perform frequency setting by analog (current input) ............................................................... 77
3.5 Make a start and stop with terminals (external operation) ................................... 78
3.5.1 Use the set frequency set by the operation panel (Pr. 79 = 3) ................................................ 78
3.5.2 Use switches to give a start command and a frequency command
(multi-speed setting) (Pr. 4 to Pr. 6) ........................................................................................ 79
3.5.3 Perform frequency setting by analog (voltage input) ............................................................... 81
3.5.4 Change the frequency (60Hz) of the maximum value of potentiometer
(at 5V, initial value) .................................................................................................................. 82
3.5.5 Perform frequency setting by analog (current input) ............................................................... 83
(at 20mA, initial value) ............................................................................................................. 84
3.6 Parameter List...................................................................................................... 85
3.6.1 List of parameters classified by purpose of use ...................................................................... 85
3.6.2 Parameter list .......................................................................................................................... 88
4 TROUBLESHOOTING 129
4.1 Reset method of protective function .................................................................. 129

4.2 List of alarm display ........................................................................................... 130
4.3 Causes and corrective actions........................................................................... 131
4.4 Correspondences between digital and actual characters .................................. 143
4.5 Check and clear of the alarm history ................................................................. 144
4.6 Check first when you have troubles ................................................................... 146
4.6.1 Motor does not rotate as commanded ................................................................................... 146
4.6.2 Motor generates abnormal noise........................................................................................... 146
4.6.3 Motor generates heat abnormally .......................................................................................... 146
4.6.4 Motor rotates in opposite direction ........................................................................................ 147
4.6.5 Speed greatly differs from the setting .................................................................................... 147
4.6.6 Acceleration/deceleration is not smooth ................................................................................ 147
4.6.7 Motor current is large............................................................................................................. 147
4.6.8 Speed does not increase ....................................................................................................... 147
4.6.9 Speed varies during operation............................................................................................... 147
4.6.10 Operation mode is not changed properly .............................................................................. 148
4.6.11 Operation panel (FR-DU07) display is not operating............................................................. 148
4.6.12 POWER lamp is not lit ........................................................................................................... 148
4.6.13 Parameter write cannot be performed ................................................................................... 148
II
5 PRECAUTIONS FOR MAINTENANCE AND INSPECTION 149
5.1 Inspection item................................................................................................... 149

5.1.1 Daily inspection ..................................................................................................................... 149
5.1.2 Periodic inspection ................................................................................................................ 149
5.1.3 Daily and periodic inspection ................................................................................................. 150
5.1.4 Display of the life of the inverter parts ................................................................................... 151
5.1.5 Cleaning ................................................................................................................................ 152
5.1.6 Replacement of parts ............................................................................................................ 152
5.1.7 Inverter replacement.............................................................................................................. 156
6 SPECIFICATIONS 157
6.1 Rating................................................................................................................. 157

6.1.1 Inverter rating ........................................................................................................................ 157
6.1.2 Motor rating ........................................................................................................................... 159
6.2 Common specifications ...................................................................................... 161
6.3 Outline dimension drawings............................................................................... 162
6.3.1 Inverter outline dimension drawings ...................................................................................... 162
6.3.2 Dedicated motor outline dimension drawings ........................................................................ 170
6.4 Heatsink protrusion attachment procedure ........................................................ 175
6.4.1 When using a heatsink protrusion attachment (FR-A7CN) ................................................... 175
6.4.2 Protrusion of heatsink of the FR-A740-160K or more ........................................................... 175
APPENDICES 178
Appendix 1For customers who have replaced the older model with this
inverter...................................................................................................... 178
Appendix 1-1Replacement of the FR-A500 series ............................................................................. 178
Appendix 1-2Replacement of the FR-A200 <EXCELENT> series .................................................... 179
Appendix 2 Instructions for UL and cUL...................................................................... 180
Appendix 3 Instructions for Compliance with the European Directives ....................... 182
<Abbreviations>
DU: Operation panel (FR-DU07)
PU: Operation panel(FR-DU07) and parameter unit (FR-PU04, FR-PU07)
Inverter: Mitsubishi inverter FR-A700 series
FR-A700: Mitsubishi inverter FR-A700 series
Pr.: Parameter Number
PU operation: Operation using the PU (FR-DU07/FR-PU04/FR-PU07).
External operation: Operation using the control circuit signals
Combined operation: Combined operation using the PU (FR-DU07/FR-PU04/FR-PU07) and external operation
Standard motor: SF-JR
Constant-torque motor: SF-HRCA
Vector dedicated motor: SF-V5RU
<Trademarks>
LONWORKS® is registered trademarks of Echelon Corporation in the U.S.A. and other countries.
DeviceNet is a registered trademark of ODVA (Open DeviceNet Vender Association, Inc.).
Company and product names herein are the trademarks and registered trademarks of their respective owners.
III
1 PRODUCT CHECKING AND PARTS IDENTIFICATION
Unpack the inverter and check the capacity plate on the front cover and the rating plate on the inverter side face to
ensure that the product agrees with your order and the inverter is intact.
• Inverter Type
FR - A720 - 3.7 K
Symbol Voltage Class Indicate inverter
A720 Three-phase 200V class capacity (kW)
Cooling fan
A740 Three-phase 400V class (Refer to page 153)
USB connector (Refer to page 27)
RS-485 terminals PU connector
(Refer to page 26) (Refer to page 22)
Connector for plug-in option connection
(Refer to the instruction manual of options.)
Voltage/current input switch
(Refer to page 8)
AU/PTC switchover switch
(Refer to the Instruction Manual (applied).)
EMC filter ON/OFF connector
(Refer to page 9)
Operation panel (FR-DU07)

(Refer to page 39)
Power lamp
Lit when the control circuit
(R1/L11, S1/L21) is supplied
with power.
Alarm lamp
Lit when the inverter is
in the alarm status
Control circuit 1
terminal block
(major fault). (Refer to page 20)
Main circuit
PRODUCT CHECKING AND PARTS IDENTIFICATION

terminal block
Front cover (Refer to page 10) Charge lamp
Lit when power is
(Refer to page 5)
supplied to the main
circuit
Combed shaped (Refer to page 10)
wiring cover
Capacity plate (Refer to page 14) Rating plate
Capacity plate FR-A720-3.7K Rating plate
Inverter type FR-A720-3.7K
Inverter type Serial number Applied motor
capacity
Input rating
• Accessory Output rating
· Fan cover fixing screws (22K or less)(Refer to page 182 ) Serial number
These screws are necessary for compliance with the

European Directive
· DC reactor supplied (75K or more)
Capacity Screw Size (mm) Number
2 1.5K to 3.7K M3 × 35 1
· Eyebolt for hanging the inverter (30K to
0 5.5K to 11K M4 × 40 2 280K)
0 M8 × two pieces
V 15K to 22K M4 × 50 1
4 2.2K, 3.7K M3 × 35 1
0 5.5K to 15K M4 × 40 2
0
V 18.5K, 22K M4 × 50 1
REMARKS
For removal and reinstallation of covers, refer to page 5.
Harmonic suppression guideline
All models of general-purpose inverters used by specific consumers are covered by "Harmonic suppression guideline for consumers who
receive high voltage or special high voltage". (For further details, refer to Instruction Manual (applied).)
1
2 INSTALLATION AND WIRING
USB connector (Refer to page 27)

Three-phase AC power supply
A personal computer and an inverter can
Use within the permissible power supply
be connected with a USB (Ver1. 1) cable.
specifications of the inverter.
(Refer to page 157)
Moulded case circuit breaker (MCCB) or Inverter (FR-A700)

earth leakage current breaker (ELB), The life of the inverter is influenced by
fuse ambient temperature. The ambient
The breaker must be selected carefully temperature should be as low as possible
since an in-rush current flows in the inverter within the permissible range. This must be
at power on. noted especially when the inverter is
installed in an enclosure. (Refer to page 7)
(Refer to page 3)
Wrong wiring might lead to damage of the
inverter. The control signal lines must be
kept fully away from the main circuit to
protect them from noise.(Refer to page 8)
Refer to page 9 for the built-in EMC filter.
Magnetic contactor (MC)
Install the magnetic contactor to ensure
safety. Do not use this magnetic contactor
to start and stop the inverter. Doing so will
cause the inverter life to be shorten.
(Refer to page 35)
Reactor (FR-HAL, FR-HEL option)
Reactors (option) must be used when power
harmonics measures are taken, the power factor is High-duty brake resistor
to be improved or the inverter is installed near a (FR-ABR*3)
large power supply system (1000kVA or more). Braking capability of the
The inverter may be damaged if you do not use inverter built-in brake can be
reactors. Select the reactor according to the model. improved. Remove the jumper
across terminal PR-PX when
Remove the jumpers across terminals P/+ - P1
connecting the high-duty brake
to connect the DC reactor to the 55K or less.
resistor. (7.5K or less)
(Refer to Instruction Manual (applied)) ) *3 Compatible with the 22K or less.
AC reactor
(FR-HAL) P/+
PR
Noise filter
R/L1 S/L2 T/L3 (FR-BSF01, FR-BLF)
P/+ P1 P/+ N/- U V W
Install a noise filter to reduce
DC reactor Earth the electromagnetic noise
Noise filter (FR-HEL) (Ground) generated from the inverter.
(FR-BLF) For the 75K or more, a Effective in the range from
The 55K or less has DC reactor is supplied.
Always install the reactor.
about 1MHz to 10MHz. A wire
a built-in common
mode core.
should be wound four turns at
a maximum.
Motor
Brake unit
(FR-BU*1, MT-BU5*2)
Earth (Ground)
P/+ PR Devices connected to the output
P/+ Do not install a power factor correction capacitor,
PR surge suppressor or radio noise filter on the output
side of the inverter. When installing a moulded case
circuit breaker on the output side of the inverter,
contact each manufacturer for selection of the
Power regeneration
High power factor converter Resistor unit moulded case circuit breaker.
common converter (FR-CV*1)
(FR-HC*1, MT-HC*2) (FR-BR*1, MT-BR5*2) Earth (Ground)
Power regeneration
Power supply harmonics can The regenerative braking
converter (MT-RC*2) To prevent an electric shock, always earth (ground) the
be greatly suppressed. Great braking capability is capability of the inverter can
Install this as required. be exhibited fully. motor and inverter. For reduction of induction noise
obtained.
Install this as required. from the power line of the inverter, it is recommended
Install this as required.
to wire the earth (ground) cable by returning it to the
*1 Compatible with the 55K or less.
*2 Compatible with the 75K or more. earth (ground) terminal of the inverter.
CAUTION
· Do not install a power factor correction capacitor, surge suppressor or radio noise filter on the inverter output side. This will cause the
inverter to trip or the capacitor, and surge suppressor to be damaged. If any of the above devices are connected, immediately remove them.
· Electromagnetic wave interference
The input/output (main circuit) of the inverter includes high frequency components, which may interfere with the communication
devices (such as AM radios) used near the inverter. In this case, set the EMC filter valid to minimize interference.
(Refer to Instruction Manual (applied).)
· Refer to the instruction manual of each option and peripheral devices for details of peripheral devices.
2
Peripheral devices
2.1 Peripheral devices

Check the motor capacity of the inverter you purchased. Appropriate peripheral devices must be selected according to
the capacity. Refer to the following list and prepare appropriate peripheral devices:
200V class
Breaker Selection*2,4 Input Side Magnetic Contactor*3
Motor Output
Applicable Inverter Type Reactor connection Reactor connection
(kW)*1
without with without with
0.4 FR-A720-0.4K 30AF 5A 30AF 5A S-N10 S-N10
0.75 FR-A720-0.75K 30AF 10A 30AF 10A S-N10 S-N10
1.5 FR-A720-1.5K 30AF 15A 30AF 15A S-N10 S-N10
2.2 FR-A720-2.2K 30AF 20A 30AF 15A S-N10 S-N10
3.7 FR-A720-3.7K 30AF 30A 30AF 30A S-N20, N21 S-N10
5.5 FR-A720-5.5K 50AF 50A 50AF 40A S-N25 S-N20, N21
7.5 FR-A720-7.5K 100AF 60A 50AF 50A S-N25 S-N25
11 FR-A720-11K 100AF 75A 100AF 75A S-N35 S-N35
15 FR-A720-15K 225AF 125A 100AF 100A S-N50 S-N50
18.5 FR-A720-18.5K 225AF 150A 225AF 125A S-N65 S-N50
22 FR-A720-22K 225AF 175A 225AF 150A S-N80 S-N65
30 FR-A720-30K 225AF 225A 225AF 175A S-N95 S-N80
37 FR-A720-37K 400AF 250A 225AF 225A S-N150 S-N125
45 FR-A720-45K 400AF 300A 400AF 300A S-N180 S-N150
55 FR-A720-55K 400AF 400A 400AF 350A S-N220 S-N180
75 FR-A720-75K  400AF 400A  S-N300
90 FR-A720-90K  400AF 400A  S-N300
*1 Selections for use of the Mitsubishi 4-pole standard motor with power supply voltage of 200VAC 50Hz.
*2 Select the MCCB according to the inverter power supply capacity.
Install one MCCB per inverter. MCCB INV IM
For installations in the United States or Canada, use the fuse certified by the UL and cUL.
(Refer to page 180.) MCCB INV IM
*3 Magnetic contactor is selected based on the AC-1 class. The electrical durability of magnetic contactor is 500,000 times. When the magnetic
contactor is used for emergency stop during motor driving, the electrical durability is 25 times.
When using the MC for emergency stop during motor driving or using on the motor side during commercial-power supply operation, select the MC
with class AC-3 rated current for the motor rated current.
*4 When the breaker on the inverter primary side trips, check for the wiring fault (short circuit), damage to internal parts of the inverter, etc. Identify
the cause of the trip, then remove the cause and power on the breaker.
2
INSTALLATION AND WIRING
3
Peripheral devices
400V class
Breaker Selection*2,4 Input Side Magnetic Contactor*3

Motor Output
Applicable Inverter Type Reactor connection Reactor connection
(kW)*1
without with without with
0.4 FR-A740-0.4K 30AF 5A 30AF 5A S-N10 S-N10
0.75 FR-A740-0.75K 30AF 5A 30AF 5A S-N10 S-N10
1.5 FR-A740-1.5K 30AF 10A 30AF 10A S-N10 S-N10
2.2 FR-A740-2.2K 30AF 10A 30AF 10A S-N10 S-N10
3.7 FR-A740-3.7K 30AF 20A 30AF 15A S-N10 S-N10
5.5 FR-A740-5.5K 30AF 30A 30AF 20A S-N20 S-N11, N12
7.5 FR-A740-7.5K 30AF 30A 30AF 30A S-N20 S-N20
11 FR-A740-11K 50AF 50A 50AF 40A S-N20 S-N20
15 FR-A740-15K 100AF 60A 50AF 50A S-N25 S-N20
18.5 FR-A740-18.5K 100AF 75A 100AF 60A S-N25 S-N25
22 FR-A740-22K 100AF 100A 100AF 75A S-N35 S-N25
30 FR-A740-30K 225AF 125A 100AF 100A S-N50 S-N50
37 FR-A740-37K 225AF 150A 225AF 125A S-N65 S-N50
45 FR-A740-45K 225AF 175A 225AF 150A S-N80 S-N65
55 FR-A740-55K 225AF 200A 225AF 175A S-N80 S-N80
75 FR-A740-75K  225AF 225A  S-N95
90 FR-A740-90K  225AF 225A  S-N150
110 FR-A740-110K  225AF 225A  S-N180
132 FR-A740-132K  400AF 400A  S-N220
150 FR-A740-160K  400AF 400A  S-N300
160 FR-A740-160K  400AF 400A  S-N300
185 FR-A740-185K  400AF 400A  S-N300
220 FR-A740-220K  600AF 500A  S-N400
250 FR-A740-250K  600AF 600A  S-N600
280 FR-A740-280K  600AF 600A  S-N600
315 FR-A740-315K  800AF 700A  S-N600
355 FR-A740-355K  800AF 800A  S-N600
400 FR-A740-400K  1000AF 900A  S-N800
1000A
450 FR-A740-450K  1000AF 1000A 
Rated product
1000A
500 FR-A740-500K  1200AF 1200A 
Rated product
*1 Selections for use of the Mitsubishi 4-pole standard motor with power supply voltage of 400VAC 50Hz.
*2 Select the MCCB according to the inverter power supply capacity.
Install one MCCB per inverter. MCCB INV IM
For installations in the United States or Canada, use the fuse certified by the UL and cUL.
(Refer to page 180.) MCCB INV IM
*3 Magnetic contactor is selected based on the AC-1 class. The electrical durability of magnetic contactor is 500,000 times. When the magnetic
contactor is used for emergency stop during motor driving, the electrical durability is 25 times.
When using the MC for emergency stop during motor driving or using on the motor side during commercial-power supply operation, select the MC
with class AC-3 rated current for the motor rated current.
*4 When the breaker on the inverter primary side trips, check for the wiring fault (short circuit), damage to internal parts of the inverter, etc. Identify
the cause of the trip, then remove the cause and power on the breaker.
4
Method of removal and reinstallation of the
front cover
2.2 Method of removal and reinstallation of the front cover

•Removal of the operation panel
1) Loosen the two screws on the operation panel. 2) Push the left and right hooks of the operation panel
(These screws cannot be removed.) and pull the operation panel toward you to remove.
When reinstalling the operation panel, insert it straight to reinstall securely and tighten the fixed screws of the
operation panel.
FR-A720-0.4K to 22K, FR-A740-0.4K to 22K
•Removal
1) Loosen the installation screws of the 2) Pull the front cover toward you to remove by pushing an
front cover. installation hook using left fixed hooks as supports.
Front cover Front cover
Installation hook
2
•Reinstallation
1) Insert the two fixed hooks on the left side of 2) Using the fixed hooks as supports, 3) Tighten the installation
the front cover into the sockets of the securely press the front cover screws and fix the front
inverter. against the inverter. cover.
(Although installation can be done
with the operation panel mounted,
make sure that a connector is
securely fixed.)
Front cover Front cover

Front cover
5
Method of removal and reinstallation of the
front cover
FR-A720-30K or more, FR-A740-30K or more

•Removal
1) Remove installation screws on 2) Loosen the installation 3) Pull the front cover 2 toward you to
the front cover 1 to remove the screws of the front cover 2. remove by pushing an installation
front cover 1. hook on the right side using left
fixed hooks as supports.
Installation hook
Front cover 1
Front cover 2
•Reinstallation
1) Insert the two fixed hooks on the left side of the 2) Using the fixed hooks as supports, securely
front cover 2 into the sockets of the inverter. press the front cover 2 against the inverter.
(Although installation can be done with the
operation panel mounted, make sure that a
connector is securely fixed.)
Front cover 2 Front cover 2
3) Fix the front cover 2 with the 4) Fix the front cover 1 with the
installation screws. installation screws.
Front cover 1
Front cover 2
REMARKS
⋅ For the FR-A720-55Kand the 160K or more, the front cover 1 is separated into two parts.
CAUTION
1. Fully make sure that the front cover has been reinstalled securely. Always tighten the installation screws of the front cover.
2. The same serial number is printed on the capacity plate of the front cover and the rating plate of the inverter. Before reinstalling the front
cover, check the serial numbers to ensure that the cover removed is reinstalled to the inverter from where it was removed.
6
Installation of the inverter and instructions
2.3 Installation of the inverter and instructions

• Installation of the Inverter
Installation on the enclosure CAUTION
0.4K to 22K 30K or more
⋅ When encasing multiple inverters, install them in
parallel as a cooling measure.
⋅ Install the inverter vertically.
Vertical
Fix six positions for the FR-A740- *

160K to 355K and fix eight positions
for the FR-A740-400K to 500K.
* Refer to the clearances below.
• Install the inverter under the following conditions.
Ambient temperature and humidity Clearances (Front) Clearances (Side)

Measurement 55K or less 75K or more
position 10cm or more 20cm or more
5cm Inverter 5cm
5cm or 5cm or 10cm or 10cm or
more * more * more more 5cm or
5cm more Inverter
Measurement
position
Temperature: -10°C to 50°C
10cm or more 20cm or more
Humidity: 90% RH maximum
Leave enough clearances *1cm or more for 3.7K or less
and take cooling measures.
REMARKS
For replacing the cooling fan of the FR-A740-160K or more, 30cm of space is necessary in front of the inverter.
Refer to page 153 for fan replacement.
• The inverter consists of precision mechanical and electronic parts. Never install or handle it in any of the following
conditions as doing so could cause an operation fault or failure. 2
Vibration(5.9m/s2 or more*)
Direct sunlight * 2.9m/s2 or more for the High temperature, Horizontal placement
160K or more high humidity
Vertical mounting Oil mist, flammable

(When installing two or Transportation by gas, corrosive gas,
more inverters, install holding the front cover fluff, dust, etc. Mounting to
them in parallel.) combustible material
7
Wiring
2.4 Wiring
2.4.1 Terminal connection diagram
Sink logic *1. DC reactor (FR-HEL) Brake unit *7. A CN8 connector is provided with the 75K
*1
Main circuit terminal Be sure to connect the DC reactor (Option) or more.
supplied with the 75K or more. R
Control circuit terminal When a DC reactor is connected to *8 *8. Brake resistor (FR-ABR)
the 55K or less, remove the jumper
Earth Jumper Jumper Remove the jumper across terminal PR-PX
across P1-P/+. when connecting a brake resistor.
(Ground)
(0.4K to 7.5K)
P1 P/+ PX PR N/- CN8
*7 Terminal PR is provided for the 0.4K to 22K.
Install a thermal relay to prevent an overheat
MCCB MC R and burnout of the brake resistor.
R/L1 (Refer to page 37)
Three-phase AC S/L2
power supply U Motor
T/L3
ON EMC filter V
IM
R1/L11 ON/OFF W
Jumper
*2 S1/L21 OFF connecter *9 Earth (Ground)
*2. To supply power to the
control circuit separately, Main circuit *9.The FR-A720-0.4K and 0.75K
are not provided with the EMC
remove the jumper across Earth filter ON/OFF connector. (Always on)
R1/L11 and S1/L21. (Ground) Control circuit
Control input signals (No voltage input allowed) C1 Relay output
Forward STF
Terminal functions vary with rotation
the input terminal B1 Terminal functions
start Relay output 1 vary with the output
assignment (Pr. 178 to Pr. 189) Reverse STR
(Alarm output) terminal assignment
(Refer to the Instruction rotation A1
Manual (applied))
start STOP (Pr. 195, Pr. 196)
Start self- (Refer to the
holding selection C2 Instruction Manual
RH
High speed (applied))
B2
Multi-speed Middle RM Relay output 2
selection speed A2
RL
*3. JOG terminal can be used
Low speed
as pulse train input terminal. Open collector output
Use Pr.291 to select JOG *3 RUN
JOG/pulse. Jog mode Running
Terminal functions
RT SU
Second function selection Up to frequency vary with the output
terminal assignment
*4. AU terminal can be MRS IPF Instantaneous (Pr. 190 to Pr. 194)
Output stop power failure
used as PTC input (Refer to the
terminal. RES *4 OL Instruction Manual
Reset Overload
AU (applied))
Terminal 4 input selection AU FU
(Current input selection) Frequency detection
SOURCE
Selection of automatic restart CS PTC SE Open collector output common

SINK
after instantaneous
power failure SD Sink/source common
Contact input common *10. It is not necessary *11. FM terminal can
PC PU when calibrating the be used for pulse
24VDC power supply indicator from the train output of open
(Common for external power supply transistor) *5 Voltage/current connector collector output
operation panel. using Pr.291.
input switch
Frequency setting signal (Analog) 4 2 + - Indicator
10E(+10V)
ON USB FM
10(+5V) OFF (Frequency meter, etc.)
3 connector *11 Calibration
Frequency setting
2 0 to 5VDC (Initial value) SD resistor *10 Moving-coil type
potentiometer 2 0 to 10VDC selected 1mA full-scale
1/2W1kΩ 4 to 20mADC
*5
*6 1 5
(Analog common) AM (+) Analog signal output
*5. Terminal input specifications
can be changed by analog 5 (0 to 10VDC)
input specifications 0 to ±10VDC (Initial value) (-)
switchover (Pr. 73, Pr. 267). Auxiliary (+) 1
Note that the current at input (-) 0 to ±5VDC selected *5
terminal 2 and 4 is always 4 TXD+ RS-485 terminals
Terminal 4 to 20mADC (Initial value)
to 20mA when the
4 input (+) 4 0 to 5VDC selected *5 TXD- Data transmission
voltage/current input switch is
set to ON. (A voltage/current
(Current (-) 0 to 10VDC
input switch is provided for input) RXD+
the 5.5K or more.) Connector RXD- Data reception
(Refer to the Instruction for plug-in option
Option connector 1
Manual (applied)) SG
connection Option connector 2 GND
*6. It is recommended to use 2W1kΩ
when the frequency setting signal Option connector 3
is changed frequently.
Terminating
resistor VCC 5V (Permissible load
current 100mA)
CAUTION
· To prevent a malfunction due to noise, keep the signal cables more than 10cm away from the power cables.
· After wiring, wire offcuts must not be left in the inverter.
Wire offcuts can cause an alarm, failure or malfunction. Always keep the inverter clean.
When drilling mounting holes in an enclosure etc., take care not to allow chips and other foreign matter to enter the inverter.
8
Wiring
2.4.2 EMC filter

The inverter is equipped with a built-in EMC filter.
Effective for reduction of air-propagated noise on the input side of the inverter.
The EMC filter is factory-set to disable (OFF).
To enable it, fit the EMC filter ON/OFF connector to the ON position.
3.7K or less 5.5K, 7.5K 11K or more
EMC filter OFF EMC filter ON EMC filter OFF EMC filter ON EMC filter OFF EMC filter ON
(initial setting) (initial setting) (initial setting)
FR-A720-1.5K to 3.7K FR-A720-5.5K, 7.5K FR-A720-11K FR-A720-15K to 22K FR-A720-30K or more

FR-A740-0.4K to 3.7K FR-A740-5.5K, 7.5K FR-A740-11K, 15K FR-A740-18.5K, 22K FR-A740-30K or more
EMC filter
ON/OFF
connector
U V W
The FR-A720-0.4K and 0.75K are not provided with the EMC filter ON/OFF connector. (The EMC filter is always valid.)
<How to disconnect the connector>
(1) Before removing a front cover, check to make sure that the indication of the inverter operation panel is off, wait for
at least 10 minutes after the power supply has been switched off, and check that there are no residual voltage
using a tester or the like. (Refer to page 5.)
(2) When disconnecting the connector, push the fixing tab and pull the connector straight without pulling the cable or
forcibly pulling the connector with the tab fixed. When installing the connector, also engage the fixing tab securely.
If it is difficult to disconnect the connector, use a pair of long-nose pliers, etc.
2
EMC filter Disengage connector fixing tab With tab disengaged,

ON/OFF connector pull off connector straight.
(Side view)
CAUTION
⋅ Fit the connector to either ON or OFF.
⋅ Enabling (turning on) the EMC filter increase leakage current. (Refer to Instruction Manual (applied))
WARNING
While power is on or when the inverter is running, do not open the front cover. Otherwise you may get an electric shock.
9
Wiring
2.4.3 Specification of main circuit terminal

Terminal
Terminal Name Description
Symbol
R/L1, Connect to the commercial power supply.
S/L2, AC power input Keep these terminals open when using the high power factor converter
T/L3 (FR-HC and MT-HC) or power regeneration common converter (FR-CV).
U, V, W Inverter output Connect a three-phase squirrel-cage motor.
Connected to the AC power supply terminals R/L1 and S/L2. To retain the
alarm display and alarm output or when using the high power factor
converter (FR-HC and MT-HC) or power regeneration common converter
(FR-CV), remove the jumpers from terminals R/L1-R1/L11 and S/L2-S1/
L21 and apply external power to these terminals.
R1/L11, Power supply for
Do not turn off the power supply for control circuit (R1/L11, S1/L21) with the
S1/L21 control circuit
main circuit power (R/L1, S/L2, T/L3) on. Doing so may damage the
inverter. The circuit should be configured so that the main circuit power (R/
L1, S/L2, T/L3) is also turned off when the power supply for control circuit
(R1/L11, S1/L21) is off.
15K or less : 60VA, 18.5K or more : 80VA
Remove the jumper from terminals PR-PX (7.5K or less) and connect an
Brake resistor optional brake resistor (FR-ABR) across terminals P/+-PR.
P/+, PR
connection For the 22K or less, connecting the resistor further provides regenerative
braking power.
Connect the brake unit (FR-BU, BU and MT-BU5), power regeneration
Brake unit
P/+, N/- common converter (FR-CV), high power factor converter (FR-HC and
connection
MT-HC) or power regeneration converter (MT-RC).
For the 55K or less, remove the jumper across terminals P/+ - P1 and
DC reactor
P/+, P1 connect the DC reactor. (For the 75K or more, a DC reactor is supplied
connection
as standard.)
Built-in brake circuit When the jumper is connected across terminals PX-PR (initial status),
PR, PX
connection the built-in brake circuit is valid. (Provided for the 7.5K or less.)
For earthing (grounding) the inverter chassis. Must be earthed
Earth (ground)
(grounded).
CAUTION
· When connecting a dedicated brake resistor (FR-ABR) and brake unit (FR-BU, BU) remove jumpers across terminals PR-PX
(7.5K or less). For details, refer to Instruction Manual (applied).
2.4.4 Terminal arrangement of the main circuit terminal, power supply and the motor
wiring.
200V class
FR-A720-0.4K, 0.75K FR-A720-1.5K, 2.2K, 3.7K
Jumper Jumper
Screw size (M4) Screw size (M4)
R/L1 S/L2 T/L3 PR PR
Jumper Jumper R/L1 S/L2 T/L3 N/- P/+
R1/L11 S1/L21 PX
R1/L11 S1/L21 N/- P/+ PX
IM Screw size Screw size Charge lamp

Power supply Motor (M4) Charge lamp
IM (M4)
As this is an inside cover fixing screw, Power Motor

supply
do not remove it.
10
Wiring
FR-A720-5.5K, 7.5K FR-A720-11K
R1/L11 S1/L21
Screw size
(M4)
Charge lamp
Jumper
Charge lamp
Jumper
*
* * N/- P/+ PR Jumper P/+
Jumper R1/L11 S1/L21
Screw size (M5)
Screw size
(M5)
PX R/L1 S/L2 T/L3 N/- PR
R/L1 S/L2 T/L3 *
IM IM
Power supply Motor
Power supply Motor
Screw size (M5)
Screw size (M5)
* Screw size of terminal R1/L11, S1/L21, PR, and PX is M4.
FR-A720-15K, 18.5K, 22K FR-A720-30K, 37K, 45K
R1/L11 S1/L21
R1/L11 S1/L21 Screw size
(M4)
Screw size (M4) Charge lamp
Charge lamp
Screw size Jumper
Jumper PR
(15K:M6, 18.5K, 22K:M8)
R/L1 S/L2 T/L3 N/- P/+
Jumper Screw size

IM (30K:M8, 37K, 45K:M10)
Power supply Motor
Screw size (M6)

R/L1 S/L2 T/L3 N/- P/+
Jumper
Screw size
IM
Power (30K:M6, 37K, 45K:M8) Motor
2
supply
FR-A720-55K FR-A720-75K, 90K
R1/L11 S1/L21 Screw size (M4) R1/L11 S1/L21 Screw size (M4)
Charge lamp Charge lamp
Jumper Jumper
Screw size (M12) Screw size (M12)
R/L1 S/L2 T/L3 N/- P/+ R/L1 S/L2 T/L3 N/- P/+
P/+
Jumper
Screw size
(M10)
Screw size (M8) P/+
IM IM
Power supply Motor Power supply Motor
Screw size (M12) DC reactor
(for option)
11
Wiring
400V class
FR-A740-0.4K to 3.7K FR-A740-5.5K, 7.5K
Jumper
Screw size (M4)
R/L1 S/L2 T/L3 N/- P/+ PR Charge lamp

Jumper
R1/L11 S1/L21 PX
N/- P/+ PR Jumper

Screw size Jumper R1/L11 S1/L21
Charge lamp
IM (M4)
Screw size
Power Motor
supply (M4)
PX
R/L1 S/L2 T/L3
IM
Power supply Motor
Screw size
(M4)
FR-A740-11K, 15K FR-A740-18.5K, 22K
R1/L11 S1/L21
Screw size
(M4) R1/L11 S1/L21
Screw size (M4)
Charge lamp
Jumper
Charge lamp Jumper PR
Screw size (M6)
Jumper
P/+
Screw size (M5) R/L1 S/L2 T/L3 N/- P/+
IM Jumper
R/L1 S/L2 T/L3 N/- PR
Power supply Motor
IM
Screw size (M6)
Power supply Motor
Screw size (M5)
FR-A740-30K to 45K FR-A740-55K
R1/L11 S1/L21
R1/L11 S1/L21
Screw size(M4)
Screw size (M4)
Jumper Jumper
Screw size (M8) Screw size (M10) Screw size (M8)

Screw size (30K: M6, 37K, 45K: M8)
R/L1 S/L2 T/L3 N/- P/+

Jumper
Screw size (M8)
R/L1 S/L2 T/L3 N/- P/+ IM
Jumper
Power Motor
supply
Screw size
IM
Power (30K: M6, 37K, 45K: M8) Motor
supply
12
Wiring
FR-A740-75K, 90K FR-A740-110K, 132K

R1/L11 S1/L21 Screw size (M4)
Charge lamp
Jumper
R1/L11 S1/L21
Screw size (M4)
Charge lamp
Screw size (M10)
Jumper
R/L1 S/L2 T/L3 N/- P/+
Screw size(M10)
P/+
Screw size
(M10)
P/+
R/L1 S/L2 T/L3 N/- P/+
IM
Power supply Motor
P/+ Screw size (M12) DC reactor
IM (for option)
Power Motor
supply
DC reactor
Screw size
(M10)
FR-A740-160K, 185K FR-A740-220K to 500K

R1/L11 S1/L21 Screw size (M4) R1/L11 S1/L21 Screw size (M4)
Jumper Jumper
Screw size (M12)
R/L1 S/L2 T/L3 N/- P/+
P/+
Screw size (M12)
2
Screw size R/L1 S/L2 T/L3 N/- P/+
(M10)
P/+
IM
Power supply Motor
Screw size (M12) DC reactor

(for option) P/+
IM
Power supply Motor
DC reactor
Screw size (M10)
13
Wiring
CAUTION
· The power supply cables must be connected to R/L1, S/L2, T/L3. Never connect the power cable to the U, V, W of the inverter.
Doing so will damage the inverter. (Phase sequence needs not to be matched.)
· Connect the motor to U, V, W. At this time, turning on the forward rotation switch (signal) rotates the motor in the
counterclockwise direction when viewed from the motor shaft.
· When wiring the inverter main circuit conductor of the FR-F740-220K or more, tighten a nut from the right side of the conductor.
When wiring two wires, place wires on both sides of the conductor. (Refer to the drawing below.) For wiring, use bolts (nuts)
provided with the inverter.
• Handling of the wiring cover

(FR-A720-15K, 18.5K, 22K, FR-A740-18.5K, 22K)
For the hook of the wiring cover, cut off the necessary
parts using a pair of long-nose pliers etc.
CAUTION
Cut off the same number of lugs as wires. If parts where
no wire is put through has been cut off (10mm or more),
protective structure (JEM1030) becomes an open type
(IP00).
14
Wiring
(1) Cable sizes etc., of the main control circuit terminals and earth (ground) terminals
Select the recommended cable size to ensure that a voltage drop will be 2% max.
If the wiring distance is long between the inverter and motor, a main circuit cable voltage drop will cause the motor
torque to decrease especially at the output of a low frequency.
The following table indicates a selection example for the wiring length of 20m.
200V class (when input power supply is 220V)
Crimping Cable Sizes
Terminal Tightening Terminal HIV, etc. (mm2) *1 AWG/MCM *2 PVC, etc. (mm2) *3
Applicable
Screw Torque Earth Earth
Inverter Type R/L1, R/L1, R/L1, R/L1,
Size *4 N·m S/L2, U, V, W S/L2, U, V, W P/+, P1 (Ground) S/L2, U, V, W S/L2, U, V, W (Ground)
T/L3 T/L3 cable T/L3 T/L3 cable
FR-A720-0.4K
M4 1.5 2-4 2-4 2 2 2 2 14 14 2.5 2.5 2.5
to 2.2K
FR-A720-3.7K M4 1.5 5.5-4 5.5-4 3.5 3.5 3.5 3.5 12 12 4 4 4
FR-A720-5.5K M4/M5 2.5 5.5-5 5.5-5 5.5 5.5 5.5 5.5 10 10 6 6 6
FR-A720-7.5K M4/M5 2.5 14-5 8-5 14 8 14 14 6 8 16 10 16
FR-A720-11K M5 2.5 14-5 14-5 14 14 14 14 6 6 16 16 16
FR-A720-15K M6 4.4 22-6 22-6 22 22 22 14 4 4 25 25 16
FR-A720-18.5K M8/M6 7.8 38-8 38-8 38 38 38 22 2 2 35 35 25
FR-A720-22K M8/M6 7.8 38-8 38-8 38 38 38 22 2 2 35 35 25
FR-A720-30K M8/M6 7.8 60-8 60-8 60 60 60 38 1/0 1/0 50 50 25
FR-A720-37K M10/M8 14.7 80-10 80-10 80 80 80 38 3/0 3/0 70 70 35
FR-A720-45K M10/M8 14.7 100-10 100-10 100 100 100 60 4/0 4/0 95 95 50
FR-A720-55K M12/M8 24.5 100-12 100-12 100 100 100 60 4/0 4/0 95 95 50
FR-A720-75K M12/M10 24.5 150-12 150-12 125 125 125 38 250 250   
FR-A720-90K M12/M10 24.5 150-12 150-12 150 150 150 60 300 300   
*1 For the 55K or less, the cable size is that of the cable (HIV cable (600V class 2 vinyl-insulated cable) etc.) with continuous maximum permissible
temperature of 75°C. Assumes that the ambient temperature is 50°C or less and the wiring distance is 20m or less.
For the 75K or more, the recommended cable size is that of the cable (LMFC (heat resistant flexible cross-linked polyethylene insulated cable)
etc.) with continuous maximum permissible temperature of 90°C. Assumes that the ambient temperature is 50°C or less and wiring is performed
in an enclosure.
*2 The recommended cable size is that of the cable (THHW cable) with continuous maximum permissible temperature of 75°C. Assumes that the
ambient temperature is 40°C or less and the wiring distance is 20m or less.
(Selection example for use mainly in the United States.)
*3 For the 15K or less, the recommended cable size is that of the cable (PVC cable) with continuous maximum permissible temperature of 70°C.
Assumes that the ambient temperature is 40°C or less and the wiring distance is 20m or less.
For the 18.5K or more, the recommended cable size is that of the cable (XLPE cable) with continuous maximum permissible temperature of 90°C.
Assumes that the ambient temperature is 40°C or less and wiring is performed in an enclosure.
(Selection example for use mainly in Europe.)
*4 The terminal screw size indicates the terminal size for R/L1, S/L2, T/L3, U, V, W, and a screw for earthing (grounding). For the 5.5K and 7.5K,
screw sizes are different (R1/L11, S1/L21, PR, PX / R/L1, S/L2, T/L3, U, V, W, a screw for earthing (grounding)). For the 18.5K or more, screw 2
sizes are different. (R/L1, S/L2, T/L3, U, V, W / a screw for earthing (grounding))
15
Wiring
400V class (when input power supply is 440V)

Crimping Cable Sizes
Terminal Tightening Terminal 2
HIV, etc. (mm ) *1 AWG/MCM *2 PVC, etc. (mm2) *3
Applicable
Screw Torque Earth Earth
Inverter Type R/L1, R/L1, R/L1, R/L1,
Size *4 N·m S/L2, U, V, W S/L2, U, V, W P/+, P1 (Ground) S/L2, U, V, W S/L2, U, V, W (Ground)
T/L3 T/L3 Cable T/L3 T/L3 Cable
FR-A740-0.4K
M4 1.5 2-4 2-4 2 2 2 2 14 14 2.5 2.5 2.5
to 3.7K
FR-A740-5.5K M4 1.5 2-4 2-4 2 2 3.5 3.5 12 14 2.5 2.5 4
FR-A740-7.5K M4 1.5 5.5-4 5.5-4 3.5 3.5 3.5 3.5 12 12 4 4 4
FR-A740-11K M5 2.5 5.5-5 5.5-5 5.5 5.5 5.5 8 10 10 6 6 10
FR-A740-15K M5 2.5 8-5 8-5 8 8 8 8 8 8 10 10 10
FR-A740-18.5K M6 4.4 14-6 8-6 14 8 14 14 6 8 16 10 16
FR-A740-22K M6 4.4 14-6 14-6 14 14 22 14 6 6 16 16 16
FR-A740-30K M6 4.4 22-6 22-6 22 22 22 14 4 4 25 25 16
FR-A740-37K M8 7.8 22-8 22-8 22 22 22 14 4 4 25 25 16
FR-A740-45K M8 7.8 38-8 38-8 38 38 38 22 1 2 50 50 25
FR-A740-55K M8 7.8 60-8 60-8 60 60 60 22 1/0 1/0 50 50 25
FR-A740-75K M10 14.7 60-10 60-10 60 60 60 38 1/0 1/0 50 50 25
FR-A740-90K M10 14.7 60-10 60-10 60 60 80 38 3/0 3/0 50 50 25
FR-A740-110K M10/M12 14.7 80-10 80-10 80 80 80 38 3/0 3/0 70 70 35
FR-A740-132K M10/M12 14.7 100-10 100-10 100 100 100 38 4/0 4/0 95 95 50
FR-A740-160K M12/M10 24.5 150-12 150-12 125 150 150 38 250 250 120 120 70
FR-A740-185K M12/M10 24.5 150-12 150-12 150 150 150 38 300 300 150 150 95
FR-A740-220K M12/M10 24.5 100-12 100-12 2×100 2×100 2×100 60 2×4/0 2×4/0 2×95 2×95 95
FR-A740-250K M12/M10 24.5 100-12 100-12 2×100 2×100 2×125 60 2×4/0 2×4/0 2×95 2×95 95
FR-A740-280K M12/M10 24.5 150-12 150-12 2×125 2×125 2×125 60 2×250 2×250 2×120 2×120 120
FR-A740-315K M12/M10 24.5 150-12 150-12 2×150 2×150 2×150 100 2×300 2×300 2×150 2×150 150
FR-A740-355K M12/M10 24.5 C2-200 C2-200 2×200 2×200 2×200 100 2×350 2×350 2×185 2×185 2×95
FR-A740-400K M12/M10 24.5 C2-200 C2-200 2×200 2×200 2×200 100 2×400 2×400 2×185 2×185 2×95
FR-A740-450K M12/M10 24.5 C2-250 C2-200 2×250 2×250 2×250 100 2×500 2×500 2×240 2×240 2×120
FR-A740-500K M12/M10 24.5 C2-200 C2-250 3×200 2×250 3×200 2×100 2×500 2×500 2×240 2×240 2×120
*1 For the 55K or less, the cable size is that of the cable (HIV cable (600V class 2 vinyl-insulated cable) etc.) with continuous maximum permissible
temperature of 75°C. Assumes that the ambient temperature is 50°C or less and the wiring distance is 20m or less.
For the 75K or more, the recommended cable size is that of the cable (LMFC (heat resistant flexible cross-linked polyethylene insulated cable) etc.) with
continuous maximum permissible temperature of 90°C. Assumes that the ambient temperature is 50°C or less and wiring is performed in an enclosure.
*2 For the 45K or less, the recommended cable size is that of the cable (THHW cable) with continuous maximum permissible temperature of 75°C.
Assumes that the ambient temperature is 40°C or less and the wiring distance is 20m or less.
For the 55K or more, the recommended cable size is that of the cable (THHN cable) with continuous maximum permissible temperature of 90°C.
(Selection example for use mainly in the United States.)
*3 For the 45K or less, the recommended cable size is that of the cable (PVC cable) with continuous maximum permissible temperature of 70°C. Assumes
that the ambient temperature is 40°C or less and the wiring distance is 20m or less.
For the 55K or more, the recommended cable size is that of the cable (XLPE cable) with continuous maximum permissible temperature of 90°C.
(Selection example for use mainly in Europe.)
*4 The terminal screw size indicates the terminal size for R/L1, S/L2, T/L3, U, V, W, and a screw for earthing (grounding).
For the 110K and 132K, screw sizes are different (R/L1, S/L2, T/L3, U, V, W, a screw for earthing (grounding) / P/+ for option connection)
For the 160K or more, screw sizes are different. (R/L1, S/L2, T/L3, U, V, W / a screw for earthing (grounding))
The line voltage drop can be calculated by the following formula:
line voltage drop [V]=

3 × wire resistance[mΩ/m] × wiring distance[m] × current[A]
1000
Use a larger diameter cable when the wiring distance is long or when it is desired to decrease the voltage drop (torque
reduction) in the low speed range.
CAUTION
· Tighten the terminal screw to the specified torque.
A screw that has been tighten too loosely can cause a short circuit or malfunction.
A screw that has been tighten too tightly can cause a short circuit or malfunction due to the unit breakage.
· Use crimping terminals with insulation sleeve to wire the power supply and motor.
16
Wiring
(2) Notes on earthing (grounding)

• Leakage currents flow in the inverter. To prevent an electric shock, the inverter and motor must be earthed (grounded). This
inverter must be earthed (grounded). Earthing (Grounding) must conform to the requirements of national and local safety
regulations and electrical codes. (JIS, NEC section 250, IEC 536 class 1 and other applicable standards)
• Use the dedicated earth (ground) terminal to earth (ground) the inverter.
(Do not use the screw in the casing, chassis, etc.)
• Use the thickest possible earth (ground) cable. Use the cable whose size is equal to or greater than that indicated in page
15, 16, and minimize the cable length. The earthing (grounding) point should be as near as possible to the inverter.
To be compliant with the European Directive (Low Voltage Directive), earth (ground) the inverter
according to the instructions on page 182.
(3) Total wiring length

The overall wiring length for connection of a single motor or multiple motors should be within the value in the table below.
(The wiring length should be 100m maximum for vector control.)
Pr. 72 PWM frequency selection setting
0.4K 0.75K 1.5K or more
(carrier frequency)
2 (2kHz) or less 300m 500m 500m
3 to 15 (3kHz to 14.5kHz) 200m 300m 500m
Total wiring length (1.5K or more)
500m or less
300m
300m
300m + 300m = 600m

When driving a 400V class motor by the inverter, surge voltages attributable to the wiring constants may occur at the
motor terminals, deteriorating the insulation of the motor.
Take the following measures (1) or (2) in this case.
(1) Use a "400V class inverter-driven insulation-enhanced motor" and set frequency in Pr. 72 PWM frequency selection
according to wiring length 2
Wiring Length
50m or less 50m to 100m exceeding 100m
Carrier frequency 14.5kHz or less 9kHz or less 4kHz or less
(2) Connect the surge voltage suppression filter (FR-ASF-H) to the 55K or less and the sine wave filter (MT-BSL/BSC) to
the 75K or more on the inverter output side.
CAUTION
· Especially for long-distance wiring, the inverter may be affected by a charging current caused by the stray capacitances of the
wiring, leading to a malfunction of the overcurrent protective function or fast response current limit function or a malfunction or fault
of the equipment connected on the inverter output side. If fast-response current limit function malfunctions, disable this function.
(For Pr. 156 Stall prevention operation selection, refer to Instruction Manual (applied).)
· For details of Pr. 72 PWM frequency selection , refer to Instruction Manual (applied). (When using an option sine wave filter
(MT-BSL/BSC) for the 75K or more, set "25" (2.5kHz) in Pr. 72.)
For explanation of surge voltage suppression filter (FR-ASF-H) and sine wave filter (MT-BSL/BSC), refer to the manual of each
option.
· Do not perform vector control with a surge voltage suppression filter (FR-ASF-H) or sine wave filer (MT-BSL/BSC) connected.
(4) Cable size of the control circuit power supply (terminal R1/L11, S1/L21)
· Terminal screw size: M4
· Cable size: 0.75mm2 to 2mm2
· Tightening torque: 1.5N·m
17
Wiring
(5) When connecting the control circuit and the main circuit separately to the power supply
(separate power)
<Connection diagram> When the protected circuit is activated, opening of the electromagnetic
MC contactor (MC) on the inverter power supply side results in power loss in the
R/L1 Inverter control circuit, disabling the alarm output signal retention. Terminals R1/L11
S/L2 and S1/L21 are provided to hold an alarm signal. In this case, connect the
power supply terminals R1/L11 and S1/L21 of the control circuit to the
T/L3
primary side of the MC.
R1/L11
S1/L21
Remove the jumper
• FR-A720-0.4K to 3.7K, FR-A740-0.4K to 3.7K
1) Loosen the upper screws.

2) Remove the lower screws. 3)
3) Remove the jumper
4) Connect the separate power
supply cable for the control
circuit to the lower terminals 1)
(R1/L11, S1/L21). R/L1
S/L2
2) T/L3
R1/L11
4) S1/L21
R1/L11
S1/L21
Main circuit terminal block
• FR-A720-5.5K, 7.5K, FR-A740-5.5K, 7.5K

1) Remove the upper screws.
2) Remove the lower screws.
3)
3) Remove the jumper.
4) Connect the separate power
supply cable for the control 1)
circuit to the upper terminals
R1/L11 R1/L11
(R1/L11, S1/L21). S1/L21 S1/L21
2)
4)
R/
L1 S/
L2 T/
L3
Main circuit
terminal block
18
Wiring
• FR-A720-11K or more, FR-A740-11K or more

1) Remove the upper screws.
R1/ S1/
2) Remove the lower screws. L11 L21 Power supply 3)
3) Pull the jumper toward you to terminal block
remove. for the control circuit
Power supply terminal block
4) Connect the separate power supply for the control circuit
R/L1S/L2 T/L3
cable for the control circuit to the R1/L11
upper terminals (R1/L11, S1/L21). S1/L21
Never connect the power cable to
MC
the terminals in the lower stand.
Doing so will damage the inverter.
Main power supply 1)

2)
4)
FR-A720-11K, FR-A720-15K, 18.5K, 22K FR-A720-30K or more,
FR-A740-11K, 15K FR-A740-18.5K, 22K FR-A740-30K or more
Power supply
terminal block for
the control circuit
U V W
CAUTION
· Do not turn off the control power (terminals R1/L11 and S1/L21) with the main circuit power (R/L1, S/L2, T/L3) on. Doing so may
damage the inverter.
· Be sure to use the inverter with the jumpers across terminals R/L1-R1/L11 and S/L2-S1/L21 removed when supplying power from
other sources. The inverter may be damaged if you do not remove the jumper.
· The voltage should be the same as that of the main control circuit when the control circuit power is supplied from other than the
primary side of the MC.
· The power capacity is 60VA or more for 15K or less, 80VA or more for 18.5K or more when separate power is supplied from R1/L11,
S1/L21.
· When the power supply used with the control circuit is different from the one used with the main circuit, make up a circuit which will
switch off the main circuit power supply terminals R/L1, S/L2, T/L3 when the control circuit power supply terminals R1/L11, S1/L21
are switched off.
· If the main circuit power is switched off (for 0.1s or more) then on again, the inverter resets and an alarm output will not be held.
2
19
Wiring
2.4.5 Control circuit terminals
indicates that terminal functions can be selected using Pr. 178 to Pr. 196 (I/O terminal function selection) (Refer to
Instruction Manual (applied).)
(1) Input signals

Terminal Terminal Rated Refer to
Type
Description
Symbol Name Specifications page
Forward Turn on the STF signal to start forward When the STF and STR
STF
rotation start rotation and turn it off to stop. signals are turned on
78
Reverse Turn on the STR signal to start reverse simultaneously, the stop Input resistance
STR command is given.
rotation start rotation and turn it off to stop. 4.7kΩ
Start self- Voltage at Instruction
STOP holding Turn on the STOP signal to self-hold the start signal. opening: 21 to Manual
selection 27VDC (applied)
RH, Multi-speed Multi-speed can be selected according to the combination of RH, Contacts at
short-circuited: 4 79
RM, RL selection RM and RL signals.
to 6mADC
Instruction
Jog mode Turn on the JOG signal to select Jog operation (initial setting) and
Manual
selection turn on the start signal (STF or STR) to start Jog operation.
(applied)
JOG Input resistance
JOG terminal can be used as pulse train input terminal. To use as 2kΩ Instruction
Pulse train
pulse train input terminal, the Pr. 291 setting needs to be changed. Contacts at Manual
input
(maximum input pulse: 100kpulses/s) short-circuited: 8 (applied)
to 13mADC
Turn on the RT signal to select second function.
Second Instruction
When the second function such as "second torque boost" and
RT function Manual
"second V/F (base frequency)" are set, turning on the RT signal
selection (applied)
selects these functions.
Turn on the MRS signal (20ms or more) to stop the inverter
Instruction
output.
MRS Output stop Manual
Use to shut off the inverter output when stopping the motor by
(applied)
electromagnetic brake.
Contact input
Used to reset alarm output provided when protective function is Input resistance
activated. 4.7kΩ
Turn on the RES signal for more than 0.1s, then turn it off. Voltage at
RES Reset 129
Initial setting is for reset always. By setting Pr. 75, reset can be set opening: 21 to
to enabled only at an inverter alarm occurrence. Recover about 27VDC
1s after reset is cancelled. Contacts at
Terminal 4 is made valid only when the AU signal is turned on. (The short-circuited: 4
Terminal 4 input to 6mADC
frequency setting signal can be set between 4 and 20mADC.) 83
selection
Turning the AU signal on makes terminal 2 (voltage input) invalid.
AU
AU terminal is used as PTC input terminal (thermal protection of Instruction
PTC input the motor). When using it as PTC input terminal, set the AU/PTC Manual
switch to PTC. (applied)
Selection of
When the CS signal is left on, the inverter restarts automatically at
automatic Instruction
power restoration. Note that restart setting is necessary for this
CS restart after Manual
operation. In the initial setting, a restart is disabled.
instantaneous (applied)
(Refer to Pr. 57 Restart coasting time in Instruction Manual (applied).)
power failure
Common terminal for contact input terminal (sink logic) and
terminal FM.
Contact input
SD Common output terminal for 24VDC 0.1A power supply (PC -------------------- —
common (sink)
terminal).
Isolated from terminals 5 and SE.
When connecting the transistor output (open collector output), such
External
as a programmable controller (PLC), when sink logic is selected, Power supply
transistor
connect the external power supply common for transistor output to voltage range
common,
this terminal to prevent a malfunction caused by undesirable 19.2 to 28.8VDC
PC 24VDC power 24
currents. Current
supply, contact
Can be used as 24VDC 0.1A power supply. consumption
input common
When source logic has been selected, this terminal serves as a 100mA
(source)
contact input common.
20
Wiring

Type
Description
When connecting the frequency setting potentiometer at an initial 10VDC Instruction

10E status, connect it to terminal 10. Permissible load Manual
Frequency current 10mA (applied)
setting power Change the input specifications of terminal 2 when connecting it
supply 5VDC
10 to terminal 10E. (Refer to Pr. 73 Analog input selection in Permissible load 76, 81
Instruction Manual (applied).) current 10mA
Inputting 0 to 5VDC (or 0 to 10V, 4 to 20mA) provides the
maximum output frequency at 5V (10V, 20mA) and makes input
Frequency and output proportional. Use Pr.73 to switch between input 0 to
2 setting 5VDC (initial setting) and 0 to 20mADC when the voltage/current Voltage input: 76, 81
(voltage) input switch is in the OFF position (initially set to OFF). The Input resistance
current input is always the same when the voltage/current input 10kΩ ± 1kΩ
switch is in the ON position (Pr.73 needs to be set to current input). Maximum
Frequency setting
Inputting 4 to 20mADC (or 0 to 5V, 0 to 10V) provides the maximum permissible

output frequency at 20mA (5V, 10V) makes input and output voltage 20VDC
proportional. This input signal is valid only when the AU signal is on Current input:
(terminal 2 input is invalid). Use Pr.267 to switch between input 4 to Input resistance
Frequency 20mA (initial setting) and 0 to 10VDC when the voltage/current input 245Ω ± 5Ω
4 setting switch is in the OFF position (initially set to ON). The current input is Maximum 77, 83
(current) always the same when the voltage/current input switch is in the ON permissible
position (Pr.267 needs to be set to current input). current 30mA *
Use Pr. 858 to switch terminal functions.
Input resistance
Inputting 0 to ±5 VDC or 0 to ±10VDC adds this signal to terminal
Frequency 10kΩ ± 1kΩ Instruction
2 or 4 frequency setting signal. Use Pr. 73 to switch between the
1 setting Maximum Manual
input 0 to ±5VDC and 0 to ±10VDC (initial setting).
auxiliary permissible voltage (applied)
Use Pr. 868 to switch terminal functions.
± 20VDC
Frequency
Common terminal for frequency setting signal (terminal 2, 1 or 4)
5 setting -------------------- ------
and analog output terminal AM. Do not earth (ground).
common
* In the following case, the input resistance is 10kΩ ± 1kΩ while power is off.
⋅ When current input is selected for Pr.73 or Pr.267 for the 3.7K or less
⋅ When the voltage/current input switch is in the OFF position and current input is selected for Pr.73 or Pr.267 for the 5.5K or more
(2) Output signals

Type
Description
1 changeover contact output indicates that the inverter
A1, Instruction
Relay output 1 protective function has activated and the output stopped. Contact capacity:
B1, Manual
(alarm output) Abnormal: No conduction across B-C (Across A-C Continuity), 230VAC 0.3A
C1 (applied)
Relay
Normal: Across B-C Continuity (No conduction across A-C) (Power 2

A2, factor=0.4) Instruction
B2, Relay output 2 1 changeover contact output 30VDC 0.3A Manual
C2 (applied)
21
Wiring

Type
Description
Switched low when the inverter output frequency is equal to or higher Instruction
Inverter
RUN than the starting frequency (initial value 0.5Hz). Switched high during Manual
running
stop or DC injection brake operation.*1 (applied)
Switched low when the output frequency
reaches within the range of ±10% (initial Instruction
Up to
SU value) of the set frequency. Switched high Manual
frequency
during acceleration/deceleration and at a (applied)
stop. *1 Permissible load
Switched low when stall prevention is 24VDC 0.1A
Open collector
Instruction
activated by the stall prevention (A voltage drop is
OL Overload alarm Manual
function. Switched high when stall 2.8V maximum
Alarm code (4bit) (applied)
prevention is cancelled. *1 when the signal is
output
Switched low when an instantaneous on.) Instruction
Instantaneous
IPF power failure and under voltage Manual
power failure
protections are activated. *1 (applied)
Switched low when the inverter output
frequency is equal to or higher than the Instruction
Frequency
FU preset detected frequency and high Manual
detection
when less than the preset detected (applied)
frequency. *1
Open collector
SE Common terminal for terminals RUN, SU, OL, IPF, FU -------------------- -----
output common
Permissible load
Output item: Instruction
current 2mA
For meter Output frequency Manual
1440pulses/s at
(initial setting) (applied)
60Hz
Pulse
FM
Signals can be output Maximum output
Select one e.g. output frequency from Instruction
NPN open from the open pulse: 50kpulses/s
monitor items. *2 Manual
collector output collector terminals by Permissible load
The output signal is proportional to the (applied)
setting Pr. 291. current : 80mA
magnitude of the corresponding
Output signal 0 to
monitoring item. 10VDC
Output item: Permissible load Instruction
Analog
Analog signal
AM Output frequency current 1mA Manual
output (load impedance
(initial setting) (applied)
10kΩ or more)
Resolution 8 bit
*1 Low indicates that the open collector output transistor is on (conducts).
High indicates that the transistor is off (does not conduct).
*2 Not output during inverter reset.
(3) Communication
Terminal Terminal Refer to
Type
Description
Symbol Name page
With the PU connector, communication can be made through RS-485.
(for connection on a 1:1 basis only)
PU . Conforming standard : EIA-485(RS-485)
-------------------- 26
connector . Transmission format : Multidrop
. Communication speed : 4800 to 38400bps
. Overall length : 500m
RS-485
TXD+ Inverter
RS-485 terminals
transmission
TXD- With the RS-485 terminals, communication can be made through RS-485.
terminal Conforming standard : EIA-485(RS-485)
RXD+ Inverter Transmission format : Multidrop link 26
reception Communication speed : 300 to 38400bps
RXD- terminal Overall length : 500m
SG Earth (Ground)
The FR-Configurator can be performed by connecting the inverter to the personnel
computer through USB.
USB
USB
-------------------- Interfase:Conforms to USB1.1 27

connector
Transmission speed:12Mbps
Connector:USB B connector (B receptacle)
22
Wiring
2.4.6 Changing the control logic

The input signals are set to sink logic (SINK) when shipped from the factory.
To change the control logic, the jumper connector on the back of the control circuit terminal block must be moved to the
other position.
(The output signals may be used in either the sink or source logic independently of the jumper connector position.)
1) Loosen the two installation screws in both ends of the control circuit terminal block. (These screws cannot be
removed.)
Pull down the terminal block from behind the control circuit terminals.
2) Change the jumper connector set to the sink logic (SINK) on the rear panel of the control circuit terminal block to
source logic (SOURCE).
Jumper connector
3) Using care not to bend the pins of the inverter's control circuit connector, reinstall the control circuit terminal block
and fix it with the mounting screws.
2
CAUTION
1. Make sure that the control circuit connector is fitted correctly.
2. While power is on, never disconnect the control circuit terminal block.
23
Wiring
4) Sink logic and source logic

⋅ In sink logic, a signal switches on when a current flows from the corresponding signal input terminal.
Terminal SD is common to the contact input signals. Terminal SE is common to the open collector output signals.
⋅ In source logic, a signal switches on when a current flows into the corresponding signal input terminal.
Terminal PC is common to the contact input signals. Terminal SE is common to the open collector output signals.
Current flow concerning the input/output signal Current flow concerning the input/output signal
when sink logic is selected when source logic is selected
Sink logic Source logic

PC
Current Sink
STF Current
connector
R STF
R Source
connector
STR
R STR
R
SD
Inverter DC input (sink type) Inverter DC input (source type)

<Example: AX40> <Example: AX80>
RUN 1 RUN 1
R R
R R
SE - + 9 SE + - 9
24VDC 24VDC
Current flow Current flow
• When using an external power supply for transistor output

⋅ Sink logic type ⋅ Source logic type
Use terminal PC as a common terminal to prevent a When using an external power supply for transistor
malfunction caused by undesirable current. (Do not output, use terminal SD as a common to prevent
connect terminal SD of the inverter with terminal 0V of misoperation caused by undesirable current.
the external power supply. When using terminals PC-
SD as a 24VDC power supply, do not install a power
supply in parallel in the outside of the inverter. Doing so
may cause a malfunction due to undesirable current.)
AY40 type Inverter AY80 type Inverter

transistor transistor
output unit 1 STF output unit
24VDC 9 PC
(SD)
24VDC
2 STR 1 STF
(SD)
2 STR
9
24VDC
PC
109 10 SD
24VDC SD
Current flow Current flow
24
Wiring
2.4.7 Wiring of control circuit

(1) Control circuit terminal layout
Terminal screw size: M3.5

Tightening torque: 1.2N·m A1 B1 C1 A2 B2 C2 10E 10 2 5 4
RL RM RH RT AU STOP MRS RES SD FM AM 1
SE RUN SU IPF OL FU SD SD STF STR JOG CS PC
(2) Wiring instructions

1) Terminals 5, SD and SE are common to the I/O signals and isolated from each other. Do not earth (ground). Avoid
connecting the terminal SD and 5 and the terminal SE and 5.
2) Use shielded or twisted cables for connection to the control circuit terminals and run them away from the main and
power circuits (including the 200V relay sequence circuit).
3) Use two or more parallel micro-signal contacts or twin contacts to
prevent a contact faults when using contact inputs since the
control circuit input signals are micro-currents.
Micro signal contacts Twin contacts
4) Do not apply a voltage to the contact input terminals (e.g. STF) of the control circuit.
5) Always apply a voltage to the alarm output terminals (A, B, C) via a relay coil, lamp, etc.
6) It is recommended to use the cables of 0.75mm2 gauge for connection to the control circuit terminals.
If the cable gauge used is 1.25mm2 or more, the front cover may be lifted when there are many cables running or
the cables are run improperly, resulting in an operation panel contact fault.
7) The wiring length should be 30m maximum.
z Wiring of the control circuit of the 75K or more

For wiring of the control circuit of the 75K or more, separate away from wiring of the main circuit.
Make cuts in rubber bush of the inverter side and lead wires.
<Wiring>
2
Rubber bush
(view from the inside)
Make cuts along the lines inside with

a cutter knife and such.
25
Wiring
2.4.8 When connecting the operation panel using a connection cable

When connecting the operation panel (FR-DU07) to the inverter using a cable, the operation panel can be mounted
on the enclosure surface and operationality improves.
Parameter unit connection cable
(FR-CB2)(option)
Operation panel(FR-DU07)
Operation panel connection connector

(FR-ADP)(option)
CAUTION
Do not connect the PU connector to the computer's LAN port, FAX modem socket or telephone connector.
The inverter and machine could be damaged due to differences in electrical specifications.
REMARKS
⋅ Refer to page 5 for removal method of the operation panel.
⋅ When using a commercially available connector and cable as a parameter unit connection cable, refer to Instruction Manual
(applied).
⋅ The inverter can be connected to the computer and FR-PU04/FR-PU07.
2.4.9 RS-485 terminal block

⋅ Conforming standard: EIA-485(RS-485)
⋅ Transmission format: Multidrop link OPEN
⋅ Communication speed: MAX 38400bps
⋅ Overall length: 500m Terminating resistor switch
⋅ Connection cable:Twisted pair cable Factory-set to "OPEN".
(4 paires) Set only the terminating resistor switch of
100Ω the remotest inverter to the "100Ω" position.
RDA1 RDB1 RDA2 RDB2 RXD

(RXD1+)(RXD1-)(RXD2+)(RXD2-)
SDA1 SDB1 SDA2 SDB2

TXD (TXD1+)(TXD1-) (TXD2+) (TXD2-)
P5S SG P5S SG
(VCC) (GND) (VCC) (GND) VCC
26
Wiring
2.4.10 Communication operation

Using the PU connector or RS-485 terminal, you can
PLC
perform communication operation from a personal
computer etc. When the PU connector is connected
with a personal, FA or other computer by a
communication cable, a user program can run and
Multidrop link
monitor the inverter or read and write to parameters.
For the Mitsubishi inverter protocol (computer link
Inverter Inverter Inverter
operation), communication can be performed with the
PU connector and RS-485 terminal. (32 inverters maximum
For the Modbus RTU protocol, communication can be are connectable)
performed with the RS-485 terminal.
For further details, refer to Instruction Manual
(applied).
2.4.11 USB connector

A personal computer and an inverter can be connected with a USB (Ver1. 1) cable.
You can perform parameter setting and monitoring with the FR-Configurator.
•USB communication specifications

Interfase Conforms to USB1.1
Transmission speed 12Mbps
Wiring length Maximum 5m
Connector USB B connector (B receptacle)
Power supply Self-power supply
USB cable USB connector
2
Removal of cover
Place a flat-blade screwdriver,
etc. in a slot and push up the
cover to open.
27
Wiring
2.4.12 Connection of motor with encoder(vector control)
Orientation control and encoder feedback control, and speed control, torque control and position control by full-scale
vector control operation can be performed using a motor with encoder and a plug-in option FR-A7AP.
(1) Structure of the FR-A7AP
Mounting
Terminal Front view hole Rear view
block
4 SW2 2 LED1
SW3
N
3 O 1
N 2
O 1 LED2
LED3
FR-A7AP
SW1
Mounting
hole Switch for manufacturer Connector
setting (SW3) Mounting
Connect to the inverter
Do not change from initially- hole
2
option connector.
set status (1, 2:OFF ).
N
O 1
Terminating resistor selection Terminal layout

switch (SW2)
Switch ON/OFF of the internal PA1
PA2
terminating resistor. PB1
PB2
(Refer to page 29.) PZ1
PZ2
CON2 connector PG
SD
Not used. PG
SD
PO PIN
Encoder specification selection switch (SW1)
Used to change the specification of encoder PIN and PO are
(differential line driver/complementary). not used.
(Refer to page 29.)
(2) Terminals of the FR-A7AP

Terminal Terminal Name Description
PA1 Encoder A-phase signal input
PA2 Encoder A-phase inverse signal input
PB1 Encoder B-phase signal input
A-, B- and Z-phase signals are input from the encoder.
PB2 Encoder B-phase inverse signal input
PZ1 Encoder Z-phase signal input
PZ2 Encoder Z-phase inversion signal input
PG Power supply (positive side) input Input power for the encoder power supply.
Connect the external power supply (5V, 12V, 15V, 24V) and the
SD Power supply ground encoder power cable.
PIN
Not used.
PO
28
Wiring
(3) Switches of the FR-A7AP

• Encoder specification selection switch (SW1) Differential line
4 SW2 2
SW3
N
3 O 1
N 2
Select either differential line driver or complementary

O 1
driver (initial status)

It is initially set to the differential line driver. Switch its position according
FR-A7AP
to output circuit. SW1
Complementary
• Terminating resistor selection switch (SW2) Internal terminating

Select ON/OFF of the internal terminating resistor. Set the switch to ON resistor-ON 4 SW2 2
SW3
N
3 O 1
N 2
(initial status) when an encoder output type is differential line driver and
O 1
(initial status)
set to OFF when complimentary.
FR-A7AP
ON : with internal terminating resistor (initial setting status) SW1
OFF : without internal terminating resistor
Internal terminating resistor-OFF

REMARKS
· Set all swithces to the same setting (ON/OFF).
· If the encoder output type is differential line driver, set the terminating resistor
switch to the "OFF" position when sharing the same encoder with other unit (NC
(numerical controller), etc) or a terminating resistor is connected to other unit.
• Motor used and switch setting

Encoder Specification Terminating Resistor Power
Motor
Selection Switch (SW1) Selection Switch (SW2) Specifications *2
Mitsubishi standard motorSF-JR Differential ON 5V
Mitsubishi high efficiency
SF-HR Differential ON 5V
motor Others *1 *1 *1
SF-JRCA Differential ON 5V
Mitsubishi constant-
SF-HRCA Differential ON 5V
torque motor
Others *1 *1 *1
SF-V5RU Complimentary OFF 12V
Dedicated motor
SF-VR Differential ON 5V
Other manufacturer motor – *1 *1 *1
*1 Set according to the motor encoder used.
*2 Choose a power supply for encoder according to the encoder used (5V/12V/15V/24V).
CAUTION
SW3 switch is for manufacturer setting. Do not change the setting.
• Encoder specification 2
Item Encoder for SF-JR Encoder for SF-V5RU
Resolution 1024 Pulse/Rev 2048 Pulse/Rev
Power supply
DC5V±10% DC12V±10%
voltage
Current
150mA 150mA
consumption
A, B phases (90° phase shift) A, B phases (90° phase shift)
Output signal form
Z phase: 1 pulse/rev Z phase: 1 pulse/rev
Complimentary
Differential line driver 74LS113
Output circuit (constant voltage output matched
equivalent
by emitter follow)
H level: 2.4V or more H level: -3V or more
Output voltage
L level: 0.5V or less L level: 3V or less
CAUTION
Encoder with resolution of 1000 to 4096 pulse/rev is recommended.
29
Wiring
(4) Encoder Cable

SF-JR Motor with Encoder SF-V5RU
Inverter side Encoder side
F-DPEVSB 12P 0.2mm2 MS3057-12A connector MS3057-12A
Approx. 140
F-DPEVSB 12P 0.2mm2
Earth cable Earth cable
11mm
60 60mm
L
MS3106B20-29S L MS3106B20-29S
Type Length L (m) ⋅ A P clip for earthing (grounding) a Type Length L (m)
FR-JCBL5 5 shielded cable is provided.
FR-V7CBL5 5
FR-JCBL15 15 FR-V7CBL15 15
FR-JCBL30 30 FR-V7CBL30 30
FR-A700 FR-A700
(FR-A7AP) Encoder (FR-A7AP) Encoder
PA1 C PA1 A
PA2 R PA2 B
PB1 A PB1 C
PB2 N PB2 D
PZ1 B PZ1 F
PZ2 P Positioning keyway PZ2 G Positioning keyway
A B M A B
M
N C PG S L N C
PG H L
SD K T P D SD R T P D
K K E
S E S R
J R J F
H G F H G
MS3106B20-29S
MS3106B20-29S As viewed from wiring side
(As viewed from wiring side)
2mm 2 2mm2
* As the terminal block of the FR-A7AP is an insertion type, earth cables need to be modified. (See below)
• When using the dedicated encoder cable (FR-JCBL, FR-V5CBL, etc.) for the conventional motor, cut the crimpling
terminal of the encoder cable and strip its sheath to make its cables loose.
Also, protect the shielded cable of the twisted pair shielded cable to ensure that it will not make contact with the
conductive area.
Cable stripping size Wire the stripped cable after twisting it to prevent it from becoming loose. In addition, do not
solder it. In addition, do not solder it. In addition, do not solder it.
Use a bar terminal as necessary.
5mm
REMARKS
Information on bar terminals
Introduced products (as of August, 2005): Phoenix Contact Co.,Ltd.
Bar Terminal Model Bar Terminal Model
Terminal Screw
Size
(with insulation (without insulation Wire Size (mm2)
sleeve) sleeve)
M2 Al 0.5-6WH A 0.5-6 0.3 to 0.5
When using the bar terminal (without insulation sleeve),
use care so that the twisted wires do not come out.
Connection terminal compatibility table

SF-JR/HR/JRCA/HRCA
Motor SF-V5RU
(with Encoder)
Encoder cable FR-V7CBL/FR-V5CBL FR-JCBL
PA1 PA PA
PA2 Keep this open. PAR
PB1 PB PB
PB2 Keep this open. PBR
FR-A7AP terminal
PZ1 PZ PZ
PZ2 Keep this open. PZR
PG PG 5E
SD SD AG2
30
Wiring
(5) Wiring
• Speed control
Vector control dedicated motor
Standard motor with encoder (SF-JR), 5V differential line driver
(SF-V5RU), 12V complimentary
SF-JR motor MCCB SF-V5RU

MCCB Inverter with encoder *1 A
Three-phase B
R/L1 U U AC power supply FAN
Three-phase C
S/L2 V V
AC power supply IM
T/L3 W W Inverter U U
E V V
IM
W W
Forward rotation start STF Earth External E
FR-A7AP (Ground) thermal Earth
Reverse rotation start STR PA1 C *3 (Ground) Thermal relay
PC
relay input *2 protector
CS(OH) 2W1kΩ G1
Contact input common SD PA2 R
SD G2
PB1 A FR-A7AP
PA1 A *3
PB2 N PA2 B
10 Differential Encoder
Frequency command 3 PZ1 B PB1 C
Frequency setting 2 PB2 D
2 PZ2 P *4 Encoder
potentiometer Differential PZ1 F
1/2W1kΩ 1 5 Complimentary
PG H PZ2 G *4
Terminating SD K Complimentary PG S
resistor ON Terminating SD R
Torque limit PG resistor
(+) 1 PG
command (-) SD
*5 ON
SD *5
( 10V) 5VDC power supply *7 12VDC power supply *7
OFF *8 (+) (-) *6 *8
(+) (-)
OFF
*6
• Torque control
Vector control dedicated motor
Standard motor with encoder (SF-JR), 5V differential line driver
(SF-V5RU), 12V complimentary
SF-JR motor MCCB SF-V5RU

MCCB Inverter with encoder *1 A
Three-phase B
R/L1 U U AC power supply FAN
Three-phase C
S/L2 V V
AC power supply IM
T/L3 W W Inverter U U
E V V
IM
W W
Forward rotation start STF Earth E
External
FR-A7AP (Ground) Earth
Reverse rotation start STR PA1 C *3
thermal
(Ground) Thermal relay
PC
relay input *2 protector
2W1kΩ G1
Contact input common SD PA2 R CS(OH)
SD G2
PB1 A FR-A7AP
*3
PA1 A
PB2 N PA2 B
10 Differential Encoder
Speed limit command 3 PZ1 B PB1 C
Frequency setting 2 PB2 D
2
2 PZ2 P *4
potentiometer F
Encoder
Differential PZ1
1/2W1kΩ 1 5 Complimentary
PG H PZ2 G *4
Terminating SD K Complimentary PG S
resistor ON Terminating SD R
PG
Torque command (+) 1 resistor

PG
*5 ON
( 10V) (-) SD 5VDC SD *5
12VDC power supply *7
OFF *8 (+) (-) power supply *7 *6 *8
(+) (-)
OFF
*6
*1 For the fan of the 7.5kW or less dedicated motor, the power supply is single phase. (200V/50Hz, 200 to 230V/60Hz)
*2 Assign OH (external thermal input) signal to the terminal CS. (Set "7" in Pr. 186 )
Connect a 2W1kW resistor between the terminal PC and CS (OH). Install the resistor pushing against CS(OH)
the bottom part of the terminal block so as to avoid a contact with other cables. PC
Control circuit
Refer to the instruction manual (applied) for details of Pr.186 CS terminal function selection. terminal block
Resistor (2W1kΩ)
*3 The pin number differs according to the encoder used.
*4 Connect the encoder so that there is no looseness between the motor and motor shaft. Speed ratio should be 1:1.
*5 Earth (Ground) the shielded cable of the encoder cable to the enclosure with a P clip, etc. (Refer to page 33.)
*6 For the complementary, set the terminating resistor selection switch to off position. (Refer to page 29.)
*7 A separate power supply of 5V/12V/15V/24V is necessary according to the encoder power specification.
When performing orientation control together, an encoder and power supply can be shared.
*8 For terminal compatibility of the FR-JCBL, FR-V7CBL and FR-A7AP, refer to page 30.
31
Wiring
• Position control
Vector control dedicated motor (SF-V5RU), 12V complimentary
MCCB SF-V5RU
*1 A
Three-phase AC B
power supply FAN
C
Positioning unit MCCB
MELSEQ-Q QD75P1 R/L1 Inverter U U
Three-phase AC S/L2 V V
power supply IM
T/L3 W W
FLS
E
RLS Earth
DOG (ground) Thermal
External thermal PC protector
STOP relay input *2CS(OH) 2W1kΩ G1
Forward stroke end SD G2
STF
Reverse stroke end FR-A7AP
STR PA1 A *3
Pre-excitation/servo on
LX *9 PA2 B
Clear signal
CLEAR CLR *9 C
PB1
Pulse train
PULSE F JOG *10 PB2 D
Sign signal Differential
PULSE R NP *9 Encoder
24VDC power supply line driver PZ1 F
CLEAR COM PC PZ2 G *4
PULSE COM SE
Complimentary PG S
RDY COM
Terminating SD R
COM resistor
Preparation ready signal ON PG
READY RDY *11
SD *5
5 12VDC
*6 *8 (+) (-) power supply *7
OFF
Torque limit command (+) 1
(±10V) (-)
*1 For the fan of the 7.5kW or less dedicated motor, the power supply is single phase. (200V/50Hz, 200 to 230V/60Hz)
*2 Assign OH (external thermal input) signal to the terminal CS. (Set "7" in Pr. 186 )
Connect a 2W1kW resistor between the terminal PC and CS (OH). Install the CS(OH)
resistor pushing against the bottom part of the terminal block so as to avoid a PC
Control circuit
contact with other cables. terminal block
Refer to the instruction manual (applied) for details of Pr.186 CS terminal function
selection.
Resistor (2W1kΩ)
*3 The pin number differs according to the encoder used.
*4 Connect the encoder so that there is no looseness between the motor and motor shaft. Speed ratio should be 1:1.
*5 Earth (Ground) the shielded cable of the encoder cable to the enclosure with a P clip, etc. (Refer to page 33.)
*6 For the complementary, set the terminating resistor selection switch to off position. (Refer to page 29.)
*7 A separate power supply of 5V/12V/15V/24V is necessary according to the encoder power specification.
When performing orientation control together, an encoder and power supply can be shared.
*8 For terminal compatibility of the FR-JCBL, FR-V7CBL and FR-A7AP, refer to page 30.
*9 Assign the function using Pr.178 to Pr.184, Pr.187 to Pr.189 (input terminal function selection).
*10 When position control is selected, terminal JOG function is made invalid and conditional position pulse train input
terminal becomes valid.
*11 Assign the function using Pr.190 to Pr.194 (output terminal function selection).
32
Wiring
(6) Instructions for encoder cable wiring

• Use twisted pair shield cables (0.2mm2 or larger) to connect the FR-A7AP and position detector. Cables to terminals
PG and SD should be connected in paralell or be larger in size according to the cable length.
To protect the cables from noise, run them away from any source of noise (e.g. the main circuit and power voltage).
Wiring Length Paralell Connection Larger-Size Cable
Within 10m At least 2 cables 0.4mm2 or larger
Cable gauge
Within 20m At least 4 cables 0.75mm2 or larger
0.2mm2
Within 100m * At least 6 cables 1.25mm2 or larger
* When differential driver is set and a wiring length is 30m or more
The wiring length can be extended to 100m by slightly increasing the power by 5V (approx. 5.5V) using six or more cables with gauge size of
0.2mm2 in parallel or a cable with gauge size of 1.25mm2 or more. Note that the voltage applied should be within power supply specifications of
encoder.
• To reduce noise of the encoder cable, earth (ground) the encoder Earthing (grounding) example using a P clip
shielded cable to the enclosure (as near as the inverter) with a P clip or
Encoder cable
U clip made of metal.
Shield
REMARKS P clip
· For details of the optional encoder dedicated cable (FR-JCBL/FR-

V7CBL), refer to page 30.
· The FR-V7CBL is provided with a P clip for earthing (grounding) shielded
cable.
(7) Parameter for encoder (Pr.359, Pr.369)
Parameter Initial Setting
Name Description
Number Value Range
CW
0 Forward rotation is clockwise
A
rotation when viewed from A.
Encoder rotation Encoder
359 1
direction
CCW
1 Forward rotation is counterclockwise
A
rotation when viewed from A.
Encoder
Number of encoder Set the number of encoder pulses output.
369 1024 0 to 4096
pulses Set the number of pulses before it is multiplied by 4.
The above parameters can be set when the FR-A7AP (option) is mounted.
(8) Motor for vector control and parameter setting

Pr.9 Pr.81 Pr.359 Pr.369
Pr.71 Pr.80
Motor name Electronic thermal Number of motor Encoder rotation Number of
O/L relay
Applied motor Motor capacity
poles direction encoder pulses 2
SF-JR Motor rated current 0 Motot capacity Number of motor poles 1 1024
SF-JR 4P 1.5kW
Mitsubishi Motor rated current 20 Motot capacity Number of motor poles 1 1024
or less
standard motor
SF-HR Motor rated current 40 Motot capacity Number of motor poles 1 1024
Others Motor rated current 3 *1 Motot capacity Number of motor poles *2 *2
Mitsubishi SF-JRCA 4P Motor rated current 1 Motot capacity 4 1 1024

constant- SF-HRCA 4P Motor rated current 50 Motot capacity 4 1 1024
torque motor Others Motor rated current 13 *1 Motot capacity Number of motor poles *2 *2
Vector control SF-V5RU

0 *3 30 Motot capacity 4 1 2048
dedicated 1500r/min series
motor SF-V5RU1, 3, 4 0 *3 33 *1 Motot capacity 4 1 2048
Other
manufacturer's — Motor rated current 3 *1 Motot capacity Number of motor poles *2 *2
standard motor
Other
manufacturer's
— Motor rated current 13 *1 Motot capacity Number of motor poles *2 *2
constant torque
motor
Values in the bolded frame are initial values.
*1 Offline auto tuning is necessary. (Refer to page 63)
*2 Set this parameter according to the motor (encoder) used.
*3 Use thermal protector input provided with the motor.
33
Wiring
(9) Combination with a vector control dedicated motor

Refer to the table below when using with a vector control dedicated motor.
• Combination with the SF-V5RU and SF-THY
Voltage 200V class 400V class
Rated speed 1500r/min
Base
50Hz
frequency
Maximum
3000r/min
speed
Motor Motor frame Motor frame
Motor type Inverter type Motor type Inverter type
capacity number number
1.5kW 90L SF-V5RU1K FR-A720-2.2K 90L SF-V5RUH1K FR-A740-2.2K
2.2kW 100L SF-V5RU2K FR-A720-3.7K 100L SF-V5RUH2K FR-A740-2.2K
3.7kW 112M SF-V5RU3K FR-A720-5.5K 112M SF-V5RUH3K FR-A740-3.7K
5.5kW 132S SF-V5RU5K FR-A720-7.5K 132S SF-V5RUH5K FR-A740-7.5K
7.5kW 132M SF-V5RU7K FR-A720-11K 132M SF-V5RUH7K FR-A740-11K
11kW 160M SF-V5RU11K FR-A720-15K 160M SF-V5RUH11K FR-A740-15K
15kW 160L SF-V5RU15K FR-A720-18.5K 160L SF-V5RUH15K FR-A740-18.5K
18.5kW 180M SF-V5RU18K FR-A720-22K 180M SF-V5RUH18K FR-A740-22K
22kW 180M SF-V5RU22K FR-A720-30K 180M SF-V5RUH22K FR-A740-30K
30kW 200L*2 SF-V5RU30K FR-A720-37K 200L*2 SF-V5RUH30K FR-A740-37K
55kW 225S*1 SF-V5RU55K FR-A720-75K 225S*1 SF-V5RUH55K FR-A740-75K
75kW 250MD SF-THY FR-A720-90K 250MD SF-THY FR-A740-90K
90kW — — — 250MD SF-THY FR-A740-110K
110kW — — — 280MD SF-THY FR-A740-132K
132kW — — — 280MD SF-THY FR-A740-160K
160kW — — — 280MD SF-THY FR-A740-185K
200kW — — — 280L SF-THY FR-A740-220K
250kW — — — 315H SF-THY FR-A740-280K
• Combination with the SF-V5RU1, 3, 4 and SF-THY

SF-V5RU1 (1:2) SF-V5RU3 (1:3) SF-V5RU4 (1:4)
Voltage 200V class
Rated speed 1000r/min 1000r/min 500r/min
Base
33.33Hz 33.33Hz 16.6Hz
frequency
Maximum
2000r/min 3000r/min 2000r/min
speed
Motor Motor Motor
Motor
frame Motor type Inverter type frame Motor type Inverter type frame Motor type Inverter type
capacity
number number number
1.5kW 100L SF-V5RU1K1 FR-A720-2.2K 112M SF-V5RU1K3 FR-A720-2.2K 132M SF-V5RU1K4 FR-A720-2.2K
2.2kW 112M SF-V5RU2K1 FR-A720-3.7K 132S SF-V5RU2K3 FR-A720-3.7K 160M SF-V5RU2K4 FR-A720-3.7K
3.7kW 132S SF-V5RU3K1 FR-A720-5.5K 132M SF-V5RU3K3 FR-A720-5.5K 160L SF-V5RU3K4 FR-A720-7.5K
5.5kW 132M SF-V5RU5K1 FR-A720-7.5K 160M SF-V5RU5K3 FR-A720-7.5K 180L SF-V5RU5K4 FR-A720-7.5K
7.5kW 160M SF-V5RU7K1 FR-A720-11K 160L SF-V5RU7K3 FR-A720-11K 200L*2 SF-V5RU7K4 FR-A720-11K
11kW 160L SF-V5RU11K1 FR-A720-15K 180M SF-V5RU11K3 FR-A720-15K 225S*2 SF-V5RU11K4 FR-A720-15K
15kW 180M SF-V5RU15K1 FR-A720-18.5K 180L SF-V5RU15K3 FR-A720-18.5K 225S*2 SF-V5RU15K4 FR-A720-22K
18.5kW 180L SF-V5RU18K1 FR-A720-22K 200L*2 SF-V5RU18K3 FR-A720-22K 250MD*2 SF-THY FR-A720-22K
22kW 200L SF-V5RU22K1 FR-A720-30K 200L*2 SF-V5RU22K3 FR-A720-30K 280MD*2 SF-THY FR-A720-30K
30kW 200L SF-V5RU30K1 FR-A720-37K 225S*1 SF-V5RU30K3 FR-A720-37K 280MD*2 SF-THY FR-A720-37K
37kW 225S SF-V5RU37K1 FR-A720-45K 250MD*1 SF-THY FR-A720-45K 280MD*2 SF-THY FR-A720-45K
45kW 250MD SF-THY FR-A720-55K 250MD*1 SF-THY FR-A720-55K 280MD*2 SF-THY FR-A720-55K
55kW 250MD SF-THY FR-A720-75K 280MD*1 SF-THY FR-A720-75K 280L*2 SF-THY FR-A720-75K
Models surrounded by black borders and 400V class are developed upon receipt of order.
*1 The maximum speed is 2400r/min.
*2 80% output in the high-speed range. (The output is reduced when the speed is 2400r/min or more.)
34
Power-off and magnetic contactor (MC)
2.5 Power-off and magnetic contactor (MC)

(1) Inverter input side magnetic contactor (MC)
On the inverter input side, it is recommended to provide an MC for the following purposes.
( Refer to page 3 for selection.)
1) To release the inverter from the power supply when the inverter's protective function is activated or when the drive is
not functioning (e.g. emergency stop operation).
When cycle operation or heavy-duty operation is performed with an optional brake resistor connected, overheat and
burnout of the electrical-discharge resistor can be prevented if a regenerative brake transistor is damaged due to
insufficient heat capacity of the electrical-discharge resistor and excess regenerative brake duty.
2) To prevent any accident due to an automatic restart at restoration of power after an inverter stop made by a power failure
3) To reset the inverter for an extended period of time
The control power supply for inverter is always running and consumes a little power. When stopping the inverter for an
extended period of time, powering off the inverter will save power slightly.
4) To separate the inverter from the power supply to ensure safe maintenance and inspection work
The inverter's input side MC is used for the above purpose, select class JEM1038-AC3MC for the inverter input side
current when making an emergency stop during normal operation.
REMARKS
Since repeated inrush currents at power on will shorten the life of the converter circuit (switching life is about 1,000,000 times. (For
the 200V class 37K or more, switching life is about 500,000)), frequent starts and stops of the MC must be avoided. Turn on/off the
inverter start controlling terminals (STF, STR) to run/stop the inverter.
MCCB MC
• Inverter start/stop circuit example
R/L1 U
To the
As shown on the left, always use the start signal (ON or
Power V
supply
S/L2
motor OFF across terminals STF or STR-SD) to make a start
W
T/L3 or stop.
R1/L11 *1 When the power supply is 400V class, install a step-down
*2
S1/L21 transformer.
T *1
*2 Connect the power supply terminals R1/L11, S1/L21 of the
Inverter
control circuit to the primary side of the MC to hold an
Operation preparation
OFF
C1 alarm signal when the inverter's protective circuit is
ON
MC B1 activated. At this time, remove jumpers across terminals R/
A1 L1-R1/L11 and S/L2-S1/L21. (Refer to page 18 for removal
MC
RA of the jumper.)
STF(STR)
Start/Stop SD
MC Operation
RA
Stop RA
(2) Handling of the inverter output side magnetic contactor

Switch the magnetic contactor between the inverter and motor only when both the inverter and motor are at a stop.
When the magnetic contactor is turned on while the inverter is operating, overcurrent protection of the inverter and
such will activate. When an MC is provided to switch to a commercial power supply, for example, it is recommended to 2
use commercial power supply-inverter switchover operation Pr. 135 to Pr. 139 ( Instruction Manual (applied)).
35
Precautions for use of the inverter
2.6 Precautions for use of the inverter

The FR-A700 series is a highly reliable product, but incorrect peripheral circuit making or operation/handling method
may shorten the product life or damage the product.
Before starting operation, always recheck the following items.
(1) Use crimping terminals with insulation sleeve to wire the power supply and motor.
(2) Application of power to the output terminals (U, V, W) of the inverter will damage the inverter. Never perform such wiring.
(3) After wiring, wire offcuts must not be left in the inverter.
Wire offcuts can cause an alarm, failure or malfunction. Always keep the inverter clean. When drilling mounting holes in
an enclosure etc., take care not to allow chips and other foreign matter to enter the inverter.
(4) Use cables of the size to make a voltage drop 2% maximum.

If the wiring distance is long between the inverter and motor, a main circuit cable voltage drop will cause the motor torque
to decrease especially at the output of a low frequency.
Refer to page 15 for the recommended cable sizes.
(5) The overall wiring length should be 500m maximum.

(The wiring length should be 100m maximum for vector control.)
Especially for long distance wiring, the fast-response current limit function may be reduced or the equipment connected to
the inverter output side may malfunction or become faulty under the influence of a charging current due to the stray capacity
of the wiring. Therefore, note the overall wiring length. (Refer to page 17.)
(6) Electromagnetic wave interference

The input/output (main circuit) of the inverter includes high frequency components, which may interfere with the
communication devices (such as AM radios) used near the inverter. In this case, set the EMC filter valid to minimize
interference. (Refer to page 9)
(7) Do not install a power factor correction capacitor, surge suppressor or radio noise filter on the inverter output side.
This will cause the inverter to trip or the capacitor, and surge suppressor to be damaged. If any of the above devices is
installed, immediately remove it.
(8) Before starting wiring or other work after the inverter is operated, wait for at least 10 minutes after the power supply has
been switched off, and check that there are no residual voltage using a tester or the like. The capacitor is charged with high
voltage for some time after power off and it is dangerous.
(9) A short circuit or earth (ground) fault on the inverter output side may damage the inverter modules.
· Fully check the insulation resistance of the circuit prior to inverter operation since repeated short circuits caused by
peripheral circuit inadequacy or an earth (ground) fault caused by wiring inadequacy or reduced motor insulation
resistance may damage the inverter modules.
· Fully check the to-earth (ground) insulation and inter-phase insulation of the inverter output side before power-on.
Especially for an old motor or use in hostile atmosphere, securely check the motor insulation resistance etc.
(10) Do not use the inverter input side magnetic contactor to start/stop the inverter.
Always use the start signal (ON/OFF of STF and STR signals) to start/stop the inverter. (Refer to page 8)
(11) Across P/+ and PR terminals, connect only an external regenerative brake discharge resistor.
Do not connect a mechanical brake.
(12) Do not apply a voltage higher than the permissible voltage to the inverter I/O signal circuits.
Contact to the inverter I/O signal circuits or opposite polarity may damage the I/O devices. Especially check the wiring to
prevent the speed setting potentiometer from being connected incorrectly to short terminals 10E-5.
(13) Provide electrical and mechanical interlocks for MC1 and

MC1
MC2 which are used for commercial power supply-inverter Interlock
switch-over. Power R/L1 U
When the wiring is incorrect or if there is a commercial IM
supply S/L2 V MC2
power supply-inverter switch-over circuit as shown on the
right, the inverter will be damaged by leakage current from T/L3 W Undesirable current
the power supply due to arcs generated at the time of Inverter
switch-over or chattering caused by a sequence error.
(Commercial operation can not be performed with the vector
dedicated motor (SF-V5RU, SF-THY).)
36
When using the high-duty brake
resistor (FR-ABR)
(14) If the machine must not be restarted when power is restored after a power failure, provide a magnetic contactor in the
inverter's input side and also make up a sequence which will not switch on the start signal.
If the start signal (start switch) remains on after a power failure, the inverter will automatically restart as soon as the
power is restored.
(15) Instructions for overload operation

When performing an operation of frequent start/stop with the inverter, rise/fall in the temperature of the transistor element
of the inverter will repeat due to a continuous flow of large current, shortening the life from thermal fatigue. Since thermal
fatigue is related to the amount of current, the life can be increased by reducing current at locked condition, starting
current, etc. Decreasing current may increase the life. However, decreasing current will result in insufficient torque and
the inverter may not start. Therefore, choose the inverter which has enough allowance for current (up to 2 rank larger in
capacity).
(16) Make sure that the specifications and rating match the system requirements.
(17) A motor with encoder is necessary for vector control. In addition, connect the encoder directly to the backlash-free motor
shaft. An encoder is not necessary for real sensorless vector control.
2.7 When using the high-duty brake resistor (FR-ABR)

• When the regenerative brake transistor is damaged, the wiring sequence as shown in the following diagrams is
recommended to prevent overheating and burnout of the brake resistor.
<Example 1> Thermal High-duty <Example 2> Thermal High-duty

relay brake resistor relay brake resistor
MC Inverter (OCR)(*2) (FR-ABR) MC Inverter (OCR)(*2) (FR-ABR)
R/L1 P/+ R R/L1 P/+ R
Power Power
S/L2 PX S/L2 PX
Supply Supply
T/L3 PR T/L3 PR
T Disconnect jumper. (*1) T Disconnect jumper. (*1)
F F
B
OCR OCR
ON ON Contact
Contact
MC MC C
OFF OFF MC
MC
Note that the built-in brake resistor need not be removed. The leads of the built-in brake resistor need not be
disconnected from the terminals.
*1 Remove the jumper from across the PR-PX terminals of the inverter. *1 This disables (switches off) the built-in brake resistor. When you use
the 11K or more inverter, you need not remove the jumper since that inverter does not have the PX terminals. (Refer to the instruction
manual of the inverter.)
*2 Refer to the following table for the thermal relay model number and to the following diagram for connection. (When using the 11K or more,
always install a thermal relay.) 2
Power
High-duty Brake Thermal Relay Type 1/L1 5/L3
Supply Contact Rating
Resistor (Mitsubishi product) TH-N20
Voltage
FR-ABR-0.4K TH-N20CXHZ-0.7A
FR-ABR-0.75K TH-N20CXHZ-1.3A 2/T1 6/T3
FR-ABR-2.2K TH-N20CXHZ-2.1A To the inverter To the ABR
FR-ABR-3.7K TH-N20CXHZ-3.6A P/+ terminal
200V FR-ABR-5.5K TH-N20CXHZ-5A
FR-ABR-7.5K TH-N20CXHZ-6.6A
FR-ABR-11K TH-N20CXHZ-11A
FR-ABR-15K TH-N20CXHZ-11A AC110V 5A,
AC220V 2A(AC-11 class)
FR-ABR-22K TH-N60-22A
DC110V 0.5A,
FR-ABR-H0.4K TH-N20CXHZ-0.24A DC220V 0.25A(DC-11 class)
FR-ABR-H0.75K TH-N20CXHZ-0.35A
400V
FR-ABR-H11K TH-N20CXHZ-6.6A
FR-ABR-H15K TH-N20CXHZ-6.6A
37
Step of operation
3 DRIVE THE MOTOR
3.1 Step of operation

The inverter needs frequency command and start command. Turning the start command on
start the motor rotating and the motor speed is determined by the frequency command (set
frequency).
Refer to the flow chart below to perform setting.
Step
Step of
off operation
op
operation
Installation/mounting {Refer to page 7}
Wiring of the power {Refer to page 10}

supply and motor
System examination
Start command using the PU connector and

How RS-485 terminal of the inverter and plug-in
to give a start
option (Communication)
command?
Refer to Instruction Manual (applied).
Connect a switch, relay, etc.

Start command with to the control circuit
on the operation panel (PU) terminal block of the inverter
to give a start command. (External)
How to How to
give a frequency give a frequency
command? command?
Set from the Change frequency Perform frequency Perform frequency

setting by a current setting by a voltage
PU (FR-DU07/ with ON/OFF switches
output device output device
FR-PU04/ connected to terminals (Connection across (Connection across
FR-PU07). (multi-speed setting) terminals 4-5) terminals 2-5)
(PU) (External) (External) (External)
{Refer to page 73} {Refer to page 75} {Refer to page 77} {Refer to page 76}
Set from the Change of frequency Perform frequency Perform frequency

setting by a current setting by a voltage
PU (FR-DU07/ with ON/OFF switches
output device output device
FR-PU04/ connected to terminals (Connection across (Connection across
FR-PU07). (multi-speed setting) terminals 4-5) terminals 2-5)
(PU) (External) (External) (External)
{Refer to page 78} {Refer to page 79} {Refer to page 83} {Refer to page 81}
CAUTION
Check the following items before powering on the inverter.
· Check that the inverter is installed correctly in a correct place. (Refer to page 7)
· Check that wiring is correct. (Refer to page 8)
· Check that no load is connected to the motor.
·When protecting the motor from overheat by the inverter, set Pr.9 Electronic thermal O/L relay (Refer to
page 49)
· When the rated frequency of the motor is 50Hz, set Pr.3 Base frequency (Refer to page 50)
38
3.2 Operation panel (FR-DU07)

3.2.1 Parts of the operation panel (FR-DU07)
Operation mode indication

PU: Lit to indicate PU operation mode.
EXT: Lit to indicate external operation mode.
NET: Lit to indicate network operation mode.
Rotation direction indication

FWD: Lit during forward rotation
REV: Lit during reverse rotation
On: Forward/reverse operation
Flickering: When the frequency command is
Unit indication not given even if the
· Hz: Lit to indicate frequency. forward/reverse command is given.
· A: Lit to indicate current.
· V: Lit to indicate voltage.
(Flicker when the set frequency monitor is Monitor indication
displayed.) Lit to indicate monitoring mode.
No function
Monitor(4-digit LED)
Shows the frequency, parameter
number, etc.
Start command
forward rotation
Start command
reverse rotation
Setting dial
(Setting dial: Mitsubishi inverter
dial) Stop operation
Used to change the Alarms can be reset
frequency setting and
parameter values.
Used to set each setting.

If pressed during operation, monitor
changes as below;
Mode Running Output Output

3
*
frequency current voltage
switchover
Used to change
* Energy saving monitor is displayed when the
each setting mode. energy saving monitor of Pr. 52 is set.
DRIVE THE MOTOR
Operation mode switchover

Used to switch between the PU and external operation mode.
When using the external operation mode (operation using a separately
connected frequency setting potentiometer and start signal), press this key to
light up the EXT indication. (Change the Pr.79 value to use the combined mode.)
PU: PU operation mode
EXT: External operation mode
39
3.2.2 Basic operation (factory setting)

Operation mode switchover
At powering on (external operation mode)
PU Jog operation mode
(Refer to page 43)

(Example)
Monitor/frequency setting
Value change and frequency flicker.

PU operation mode
(output frequency monitor) Frequency setting has been
written and completed!!
Output current monitor Output voltage monitor

Parameter setting
Display the current

Parameter setting mode setting
(Example)
Value change Parameter and a setting value

flicker alternately.
Parameter write is completed!!
Parameter clear All parameter Alarm clear

clear
Parameter copy
[Operation for displaying alarm history] (Refer to page 144)

Alarm history
Past eight alarms can be displayed.

(The latest alarm is ended by ".".)
When no alarm history exists, is displayed.
CAUTION
⋅ Release the operation lock to release the PU stop by key operation.
40
3.2.3 Operation lock (Press [MODE] for an extended time (2s))
Operation using the setting dial and key of the operation panel can be made invalid to prevent parameter change
and unexpected start and stop.
· Set "10 or 11" in Pr. 161, then press for 2s to make the setting dial and key operation invalid.
· When the setting dial and key operation is made invalid, appears on the operation panel.
When the setting dial and key operation is invalid, appears if the setting dial or key operation is
performed. (When the setting dial or key operation is not performed for 2s, the monitor display appears.)
· To make the setting dial and key operation valid again, press for 2s.
POINT
Set "10 or 11" (key lock mode valid) in Pr.161 Frequency setting/key lock operation selection.
Operation Display
1.Screen at powering on
The monitor display appears.
2.Press to choose the PU PU indication is lit.

operation mode.
The parameter
3.Press to choose the parameter
number read
setting mode. previously
appears.
4.Turn until (Pr. 161) appears.
5.Press to read the currently set value.

" " (initial value) appears.
6.Turn to change it to the setting

value " ".
7.Press to set.
Flicker ··· Parameter setting complete!!
8.Press for 2s to show the key lock mode.

Press for 2s. 3
Functions valid even in the operation lock status

DRIVE THE MOTOR
Stop and reset with .
CAUTION
Release the operation lock to release the PU stop by key operation.
41
3.2.4 Monitoring of output current and output voltage
POINT
Monitor display of output frequency, output current and output voltage can be changed by pushing during
monitoring mode.
Operation Display
1.Press during operation to choose the output
frequency monitor
2.Independently of whether the inverter is running

in any operation mode or at a stop, the output
current monitor appears by pressing .
3.Press to show the output voltage monitor.
3.2.5 First priority monitor
Hold down for 1s to set monitor description to be appeared first in the monitor mode.
(To return to the output frequency monitor, hold down for 1s after displaying the output frequency monitor.)
3.2.6 Setting dial push
Push the setting dial ( ) to display the set frequency currently set.
42
3.2.7 Change the parameter setting value
Changing example Change the Pr. 1 Maximum frequency .
Operation Display
2.Press to choose the PU operation PU indication is lit.

mode.
The parameter
3.Press to choose the parameter number read
setting mode. previously appears.
4. Pr. 1) appears.

" "(initial value) appears.
6.Turn to change it to the set

value " ".
7.Press to set.

· By turning , you can read another parameter.
· Press to show the setting again.
· Press twice to show the next parameter.
· Press twice to return the monitor to frequency monitor.
to are displayed ... Why?

appears. ......Write disable error
appears. ......Write error during operation
appears. ......Calibration error
appears. ......Mode designation error
For details refer to page 131.
3
DRIVE THE MOTOR
43
3.2.8 Parameter clear, all parameter clear
POINT
· Set "1" in Pr. CL parameter clear , ALLC all parameter clear to initialize all parameters. (Parameters are not cleared
when "1" is set in Pr. 77 Parameter write selection.)
· Refer to the parameter list on page 88 and later for parameters to be cleared with this operation.
Operation Display

mode.
The parameter
4.Turn until " ", " "

appears.
Parameter clear All parameter clear
6.Turn clockwise to change it to

the setting value of " ". Parameter clear All parameter clear
7.Press to set.

· Turn to read another parameter.
and are displayed alternately ... Why?

The inverter is not in the PU operation mode.
1. Press .
is lit and the monitor (4 digit LED) displays "0" (Pr. 79 = "0" (initial value)).
2. Carry out operation from step 6 again.
44
3.2.9 Parameter copy and parameter verification
PCPY Setting Description

0 Cancel
1 Copy the source parameters to the operation panel.
2 Write the parameters copied to the operation panel into the destination inverter.
3 Verify parameters in the inverter and operation panel. (Refer to page 47 .)
REMARKS
· When the copy destination inverter is not the FR-A700 series or parameter copy write is performed after parameter read is
stopped, "model error ( )" is displayed.
· Refer to the parameter list on page 88 and later for availability of parameter copy.
· When the power is turned off or an operation panel is disconnected, etc. during parameter copy write, perform write again or
check the values by parameter verification.
(1) Parameter copy
Multiple inverters and parameter settings can be copied.
Operation Display
1.Connect the operation panel to the
copy source inverter.
• Connect it during a stop.
The parameter
number previously
setting mode. read appears.
3.Turn until (parameter copy)

appears.
4.Press to to read the currently set value.

5.Turn to change it to the setting value

‫" "ޓ‬.
6.Press to copy the source parameters Flickers for about 30s

to the operation panel.
About 30s later
Flicker ··· Parameter copy complete!!

7.Connect the operation panel to the
copy source inverter.
3
8.After performing steps 2 to 5,
DRIVE THE MOTOR
turn to change it to " ".
9.Press to write the parameters copied to The frequency flickers

for about 30s
the operation panel to the destination inverter.
10.When copy is completed,

" " and " " flicker.
Flicker ··· Parameter copy complete!!
11.After writing the parameter values to the copy
destination inverter, always reset the inverter,
e.g. switch power off once, before starting operation.
45
appears...Why? Parameter read error. Perform operation from step 3 again.

appears...Why? Parameter write error. Perform operation from step 8 again.
and flicker alternately

Appears when parameters are copied between the inverter of 55K or less and 75K or more.
1. Set "0" in Pr. 160 User group read selection.
2. Set the following setting (initial value) in Pr. 989 Parameter copy alarm release.
55K or less 75K or more
Pr. 989 Setting 10 100
3. Reset Pr. 9, Pr. 30, Pr. 51, Pr. 52, Pr. 54, Pr. 56, Pr. 57, Pr. 61, Pr. 70, Pr. 72, Pr. 80, Pr. 82, Pr. 90 to Pr. 94 , Pr. 158,
Pr. 455, Pr. 458 to Pr. 462, Pr. 557, Pr. 859, Pr. 860, Pr. 893.
46
(2) Parameter verification
Whether same parameter values are set in other inverters or not can be checked.
Operation Display
1.Replace the operation panel on the
inverter to be verified.
• Replace it during a stop.
3.Press to choose the parameter The parameter

setting mode. number read
previously appears.
4.Turn until (parameter copy)

appears.
5.Press to read the currently set

value.
6.Turn to change it to the set value

" "(parameter copy verification mode).
7.Press to read the parameter setting

Flickers for about 30s
of the verified inverter to the operation panel.
• If different parameters exist, different

parameter numbers and flicker.
• Hold down to verify. Flickering
8.It there is no difference, and

flicker to complete verification.
Flicker ··· Parameter verification complete!!
REMARKS
When the copy destination inverter is not the FR-A700 series, "model error ( )" is displayed. 3
DRIVE THE MOTOR
flickers ... Why?

Set frequencies, etc. may be different. Check set frequencies.
47
Before operation
3.3 Before operation

3.3.1 Simple mode parameter list
For simple variable-speed operation of the inverter, the initial setting of the parameters may be used as they are. Set the
necessary parameters to meet the load and operational specifications. Parameter setting, change and check can be made from
the operation panel (FR-DU07). For details of parameters, refer to Instruction Manual (applied).
POINT
Only simple mode parameter can be displayed using Pr.160 User group read selection. (All parameters are displayed
with the initial setting.) Set Pr. 160 User group read selection as required. (Refer to page 43 for parameter change.)
Pr. 160 Description

9999 Only the simple mode parameters can be displayed.
0
Simple mode and extended mode parameters can be displayed.
(Initial Value)
1 Only the parameters registered in the user group can be displayed.
Parameter Incre Initial Refer

Name Range Applications
Number ments Value to
Set to increase a starting torque or when the
motor with a load will not rotate, resulting in an
6/4/3/2/ alarm [OL] and a trip [OC1]
0 Torque boost 0.1% 0 to 30% 51
1%*1 *1 The initial value differs according to the inverter
capacity. (0.4K, 0.75K/1.5K to 3.7K/5.5K, 7.5K/
11K to 55K/75K or more)
Set when the maximum output frequency need
Maximum 120/ to be limited.
1 0.01Hz 0 to 120Hz 52
frequency 60Hz*2 *2 The initial value differs according to the inverter
capacity. (55K or less/75K or more)
Minimum Set when the minimum output frequency need
2 0.01Hz 0Hz 0 to 120Hz 52
frequency to be limited.
Set when the rated motor frequency is 50Hz.
3 Base frequency 0.01Hz 60Hz 0 to 400Hz 50
Check the motor rating plate.
Multi-speed setting
4 0.01Hz 60Hz 0 to 400Hz
(high speed)
Multi-speed setting Set when changing the preset speed in the
5 0.01Hz 30Hz 0 to 400Hz 79
(middle speed) parameter with a terminal.
Multi-speed setting
6 0.01Hz 10Hz 0 to 400Hz
(low speed)
7 Acceleration time 0.1s 5/15s*3 0 to 3600s Acceleration/deceleration time can be set.
*3 The initial value differs according to the inverter 53
8 Deceleration time 0.1s 5/15s*3 0 to 3600s capacity. (7.5K or less/11K or more)
Protect the motor from overheat by the inverter.
Rated
Electronic thermal 0.01/ inverter 0 to 500/ Set the rated motor current.
9 *4 The increments and setting range differ 49
O/L relay 0.1A*4 output 0 to 3600A*4
according to the inverter capacity. (55K or less/
current
75K or more)
Operation mode Select the operation command location and
79 1 0 0, 1, 2, 3, 4, 6, 7 54
selection frequency command location.
Terminal 2
Frequency for the maximum value of the
125 frequency setting 0.01Hz 60Hz 0 to 400Hz 82
potentiometer (5V initial value) can be changed.
gain frequency
Terminal 4
Frequency for the maximum current input
126 frequency setting 0.01Hz 60Hz 0 to 400Hz 84
(20mA initial value) can be changed.
gain frequency
Parameter which can be read from the
User group read
160 1 0 0, 1, 9999 operation panel and parameter unit can be —
selection
restricted.
48
Before operation
3.3.2 Overheat protection of the motor by the inverter (Pr. 9)

Set this parameter when using a motor other than the Mitsubishi standard motor (SF-JR) and Mitsubishi
constant torque motor (SF-HRCA).
Set the rated motor current in Pr. 9 Electronic thermal O/L relay to protect the motor from overheat.
Parameter
Name Initial Value Setting Range *2 Description
Number
Rated inverter 55K or less 0 to 500A
9 Electronic thermal O/L relay Set the rated motor current.
output current *1 75K or more 0 to 3600A
*1 Refer to page 157 for the rated inverter current value.
The initial values of the 0.4K and 0.75K are set to 85% of the rated inverter current.
*2 The minimum setting increments are 0.01A for the 55K or less and 0.1A for the 75K or more.
Changing example Change the Pr. 9 Electronic thermal O/L relay setting to 8.5A according to the motor rated current.
(FR-A720-1.5K)
Operation Display

operation mode.
3.Press to choose the parameter The parameter number

setting mode. read previously appears.
4.Turn until Pr. 9 Electronic

thermal O/L relay appears.
Refer to page
5.Press to show the currently 157 for initial
value of the
set value. (8A for FR-A720-1.5K)
inverter rated
current.
6.Turn to change the set value

to " ". (8.5A)
7.Press to set.


3
CAUTION
· Protective function by electronic thermal relay function is reset by inverter power reset and reset signal input. Avoid
unnecessary reset and power-off.
DRIVE THE MOTOR
· When two or more motors are connected to the inverter, they cannot be protected by the electronic thermal relay function.
Install an external thermal relay to each motor.
· When the difference between the inverter and motor capacities is large and the setting is small, the protective characteristics of
the electronic thermal relay function will be deteriorated. In this case, use an external thermal relay.
· A special motor cannot be protected by the electronic thermal relay function. Use an external thermal relay.
· PTC thermistor output built-in the motor can be input to the PTC signal (AU terminal). For details, refer to Instruction
Manual (applied).
49
Before operation
3.3.3 When the rated motor frequency is 50Hz (Pr. 3) V/F
First, check the motor rating plate. If a frequency given on the rating plate is "50Hz" only, always set Pr. 3 Base frequency
to "50Hz". Leaving the base frequency unchanged from "60Hz" may make the voltage low and the torque insufficient. It
may result in an inverter trip (E.OC) due to overload.
Parameter
Name Initial Value Setting Range Description
Number
Set the frequency when the motor
3 Base frequency 60Hz 0 to 400Hz
rated torque is generated.
Changing example Change Pr. 3 Base frequency to 50Hz according to the motor rated frequency.
Operation Display

mode.
The parameter
3.Press to choose the parameter number
setting mode. read previously
appears.
4.Turn until Pr. 3 Base frequency
appears.
5.Press to show the currently set

value. (60Hz)
6.Turn to change it to
the set value " ". (50Hz)
7.Press to set.

REMARKS
· Pr. 3 is invalid under advanced magnetic flux vector control, real sensorless vector control, and vector control and Pr.84 Rated
motor frequency is valid.
50
Before operation
3.3.4 Increase the starting torque (Pr. 0) V/F
Set this parameter when "the motor with a load will not rotate", "an alarm [OL] is output, resulting in an inverter
trip due to [OC1], etc.
Parameter Setting
Name Initial Value Description
Number Range
0.4K, 0.75K 6%
1.5K to 3.7K 4% Motor torque in the low-
frequency range can be
0 Torque boost 5.5K, 7.5K 3% 0 to 30%
adjusted to the load to increase
11K to 55K 2% the starting motor torque.
75K or more 1%
Changing example When the motor with a load will not rotate,
increase the Pr. 0 value 1% by 1% unit by looking at 100%
the motor movement. (The guideline is for about 10%
change at the greatest.) Output
voltage
Pr.0 Setting
Pr.46
Pr.112 range
0 Output Base
frequency frequency
(Hz)
Operation Display
2.Press to choose the PU operation mode. PU indication is lit.
The parameter
4. Pr. 0) appears.
5.Press to read the currently set value. The initial value

" "(initial value is 6% for the 0.75K) differs according
appears. to the capacity.
6.Turn to change it to the set value

" ".
7.Press to set.
3
DRIVE THE MOTOR
REMARKS
· A too large setting may cause the motor to overheat, resulting in an overcurrent shut-off (OL (overcurrent alarm) then E.OC1
(overcurrent shutoff during acceleration)), overload shut-off (E.THM (motor overload shutoff), and E.THT (inverter overload shutoff)).
(When a protective function occurs, release the start command, and decrease the Pr. 0 setting 1% by 1% to reset. (Refer to page 43)
POINT
If the inverter still does not operate properly after the above measures, adjust Pr. 80, Pr. 81 (Advanced magnetic flux
vector control), Pr.800 (Real sensorless vector control). The Pr.0 setting is invalid under advanced magnetic flux
vector control, real sensorless vector control and vector control. (Refer to Instruction Manual (applied).)
51
Before operation
3.3.5 Limit the maximum and minimum output frequency (Pr. 1, Pr. 2)
Motor speed can be limitted.
Parameter Setting
Number Range
55K or less 120Hz
1 Maximum frequency 0 to 120Hz Set the upper limit of the output frequency.
75K or more 60Hz
2 Minimum frequency 0Hz 0 to 120Hz Set the lower limit of the output frequency.
Changing example Limit the frequency set by the potentiometer, Clamped at the
etc. to 60Hz maximum. Output frequency maximum frequency
(Set "60"Hz in Pr. 1 Maximum frequency.) (Hz)
Pr.1
Pr.18
Pr.2 Frequency setting
0 5, 10V
Clamped at the (4mA) (20mA)
minimum frequency
Operation Display

mode.
The parameter
4. Pr. 1) appears.


value " ".
7.Press to set.

REMARKS
· The output frequency is clamped by the Pr. 2 setting even if the set frequency is lower than the Pr. 2 setting (The frequency will
not decrease to the Pr. 2 setting.)
Note that Pr. 15 Jog frequency has higher priority than the minimum frequency.
· When the Pr. 1 setting is changed, frequency higher than the Pr. 1 setting can not be set by .
· When performing a high speed operation at 120Hz or more, setting of Pr. 18 High speed maximum frequency is necessary.
CAUTION
If the Pr. 2 setting is higher than the Pr. 13 Starting frequency value, note that the motor will run at the set frequency
according to the acceleration time setting by merely switching the start signal on, without entry of the command
frequency.
52
Before operation
3.3.6 Change acceleration and deceleration time (Pr. 7, Pr. 8)
Set in Pr. 7 Acceleration time a larger value for a slower speed increase and a smaller value for a faster speed increase.
Set in Pr. 8 Deceleration time a larger value for a slower speed decrease and a smaller value for a faster speed decrease.
Parameter Setting
Number Range
7.5K or less 5s 0 to 3600/
7 Acceleration time Set the motor acceleration time.
11K or more 15s 360s *
7.5K or less 5s 0 to 3600/
8 Deceleration time Set the motor deceleration time.
11K or more 15 360s *
* Depends on the Pr. 21 Acceleration/deceleration time increments setting. The initial value for the setting range is "0 to 3600s" and setting increments is
"0.1s".
Changing example Change the Pr. 7 Acceleration time setting from "5s" to
"10s". Pr.20
(60Hz) Running
frequency
frequency (Hz)
Output
Time
Acceleration Pr.7 Deceleration Pr.8

time Pr.44 time Pr.45
Pr.110 Pr.111
Operation Display

mode.
The parameter
number read
4. Pr. 7) appears.
5.Press to read the currently set value. The initial value

" "(initial value) appears. differs according
to the capacity.

value " ".
3
7.Press to set.

DRIVE THE MOTOR
53
Before operation
3.3.7 Selection of the start command and frequency command locations (Pr. 79)
Select the start command location and frequency command location.
LED Indication
Parameter Initial Setting
Name Description : Off
Number Value Range
: On
External operation mode
Use external/PU switchover mode (press to switch
0 between the PU and external operation mode. (Refer to PU operation mode

page 73))
At power on, the inverter is in the external operation
mode.
1 Fixed to PU operation mode
External operation mode

Fixed to external operation mode
2 Operation can be performed by switching between the NET operation mode
external and NET operation mode.
External/PU combined operation mode 1

Running frequency Start signal
PU (FR-DU07/FR-PU04/
3 FR-PU07) setting or
external signal input (multi- External signal input
speed setting, across (terminal STF, STR)
Operation terminals 4-5 (valid when
AU signal turns on)).
79 mode 0
selection External/PU combined operation mode 2
Running frequency Start signal
Input from the PU (FR-
4 External signal input DU07/FR-PU04/FR-PU07)
(Terminal 2, 4, 1, JOG,
multi-speed selection, etc.) ( , )
PU operation mode
Switchover mode External operation mode

6 Switch among PU operation, external operation, and
NET operation while keeping the same operation status.
NET operation mode
External operation mode (PU operation interlock)

X12 signal ON*
PU operation mode
Operation mode can be switched to the PU operation
mode.
7 External operation mode
(output stop during external operation)
X12 signal OFF*
Operation mode can not be switched to the PU
operation mode.
* For the terminal used for the X12 signal (PU operation interlock signal) input, set "12" in Pr. 178 to Pr. 189 (input terminal function selection) to assign
functions.
For Pr. 178 to Pr. 189, refer to Instruction Manual (applied).
When the X12 signal is not assigned, function of the MRS signal switches from MRS (output stop) to PU operation interlock signal.
54
Before operation
3.3.8 Large starting torque and low speed torque are necessary (advanced magnetic
flux vector control, real sensorless vector control) (Pr. 71, Pr. 80, Pr. 81, Pr. 800)
Magnetic flux Sensorless
Advanced magnetic flux vector control can be selected by setting the capacity, poles and type of the motor used
in Pr. 80 and Pr. 81. When higher accuracy and fast response control is necessary, select the real sensorless
vector control and perform offline auto tuning and online auto tuning.
• What is advanced magnetic flux vector control?
The low speed torque can be improved by providing voltage compensation so that the motor current which
meets the load torque to flow. Output frequency compensation (slip compensation) is made so that the motor
actual speed approximates a speed command value. Effective when load fluctuates drastically, etc.
• What is real sensorless vector control?
This function enables vector control with a general-purpose motor without encoder. It is suitable for
applications below.
· To minimize the speed fluctuation even at a severe load fluctuation
· To generate low speed torque
· To prevent machine from damage due to too large torque (torque limit)
· To perform torque control
Parameter Initial
Name Setting Range Description
Number Value
0 to 8, 13 to 18, 20, By selecting a standard motor or constant
71 Applied motor 0 23, 24, 30, 33, 34, 40, 43, torque motor, thermal characteristic and
44, 50, 53, 54 motor constants of each motor are set.
55K or less 0.4 to 55kW
Set the applied motor capacity.
80 Motor capacity 9999 75K or more 0 to 3600kW
9999 V/F control
2, 4, 6, 8, 10 Set the number of motor poles.
X18 signal-ON:V/F Set 10 + number of
81 Number of motor poles 9999 12, 14, 16, 18, 20
control * motor poles.
9999 V/F control
0 to 5 Vector control (Refer to page 58)
9 Vector control test operation
10 Speed control
11 Torque control Real sensorless
800 Control method selection 20
MC signal-ON:torque vector control
12
MC signal-OFF:speed *
V/F control (advanced magnetic flux vector
20
control)
* Use Pr. 178 to Pr. 189 to assign the terminals used for the X18 and MC signal. (Refer to Instruction Manual (applied)).
POINT
If the following conditions are not satisfied, select V/F control since malfunction such as insufficient torque and
uneven rotation may occurr.
· The motor capacity should be equal to or one rank lower than the inverter capacity. (note that the capacity is
0.4kW or more) 3
· Motor to be used is either Mitsubishi standard motor, high efficiency motor (SF-JR, SF-HR two-pole, four-pole, six-
pole 0.4kW or more) or Mitsubishi constant torque motor (SF-JRCA, SF-HRCA 200V class four-pole 0.4kW to
55kW). When using a motor other than the above (other manufacturer's motor), perform offline auto tuning without
DRIVE THE MOTOR
fail. (advanced magnetic flux vector control)

When performing real sensorless vector control, offline auto tuning are necessary even when Mitsubishi motor is
used.
· Single-motor operation (one motor run by one inverter) should be performed.
· The wiring length from inverter to motor should be within 30m. (Perform offline auto tuning in the state where
actual wiring work is performed when the wiring length exceeds 30m.)
CAUTION
· Uneven rotation slightly increases as compared to the V/F control. (It is not suitable for machines such as grinding machine and
wrapping machine which requires less uneven rotation at low speed.)
· When terminal assignment is changed using Pr. 178 to Pr. 189 (input terminal function selection) , other functions may be affected.
Please make setting after confirming the function of each terminal.
· When advanced magnetic flux vector control is performed with a surge voltage suppression filter (FR-ASF-H) connected,
output torque may decrease. In addition, do not use a sine wave filter (MT-BSL/BSC).
· Do not perform real sensorless vector control with a surge voltage suppression filter (FR-ASF-H) or sine wave filer (MT-BSL/
BSC) connected.
55
Before operation
<Selection method of advanced magnetic flux vector control>

Setting procedure
Perform secure wiring. (Refer to page 8.)
Set the motor. (Pr. 71) (Refer to page 55.)

Motor Pr. 71 Setting *1 Remarks
SF-JR 0 (initial value)
Mitsubishi standard SF-JR 4P-1.5kW or less 20
motor
Mitsubishi high SF-HR 40
efficiency motor Offline auto tuning is
Others 3
necessary.*2
SF-JRCA 200V 4P 1
Mitsubishi constant- SF-HRCA 200V 4P 50
torque motor Offline auto tuning is
Others (SF-JRC, etc.) 13
necessary. *2
Other
Offline auto tuning is
manufacturer's − 3
necessary. *2
standard motor
Other
manufacturer's Offline auto tuning is
constant torque
− 13
necessary. *2
motor
*1 For other settings of Pr. 71 , refer to Instruction Manual (applied).
*2 Refer to page 63 for offline auto tuning.
Set the motor capacity and the number of motor poles according as required.
(Pr. 80, Pr. 81) (Refer to page 55.)
Set the motor capacity (kW) in Pr. 80 Motor capacity and set the number
of motor poles (number of poles) in Pr. 81 Number of motor poles. (V/F
control is performed when the setting is "9999" (initial value).
Set the run command. (Refer to page 73.)
Select the start command and speed command.
(1) Start command
1) Operation panel: Setting by pressing / of the
operation panel
2) External command: Setting by forward rotation or reverse
rotation command (terminal STF or STR)
(2)Speed command
1) Operation panel: Setting by pressing of the operation panel
2) External analog command (terminal 2 or 4) :
Give a speed command using the analog signal input to
terminal 2 (or terminal 4).
3) Multi-speed command:
The external signals (RH, RM, RL) may also be used to give
speed command.
Test run
As required
· Perform offline auto tuning. (Pr.96) (refer to page 63).
· Select online auto tuning. (Pr.95) (refer to page 67).
REMARKS
· When higher accuracy operation is necessary, set online auto tuning after performing offline auto tuning and select real
sensorless vector control.
· Use Pr. 89 to adjust the motor speed fluctuation at load fluctuation. (Refer to Instruction Manual (applied).)
56
Before operation
<Selection method of real sensorless vector control (speed control)>

Speed control is exercised to match the speed command and actual motor speed.
Setting procedure
Set the motor. (Pr. 71) (Refer to page 55.)

Set "3" (standard motor) or "13" (constant torque motor) in Pr. 71
Applied motor.
Select a control method. (Refer to page 55.)
Make speed control valid by selecting "10" (speed control) or "12"
(speed-torque switchover) for Pr. 800.
(1) Start command
operation panel
(2)Speed command
speed command.
Set the torque limit. (Pr. 810)
Perform offline auto tuning. (Pr. 96) (Refer to page 63.)
Test run
As required
· Select online auto tuning. (Pr. 95) (refer to page 67.) 3
· Easy gain tuning (refer to page 68).
· Manual input speed control gain adjustment (refer to page 70).
DRIVE THE MOTOR
CAUTION
· Make sure to perform offline auto tuning before performing real sensorless vector control.
· The carrier frequencies are selectable from among 2k, 6k, 10k, 14kHz for real sensorless vector control.
· Torque control can not be performed in the low speed region and at a low speed with light load. Choose vector control.
· Performing pre-excitation (LX signal and X13 signal) under torque control may start the motor running at a low speed even
when the start command (STF or STR) is not input. The motor may run also at a low speed when the speed limit value=0 with a
start command input. Perform pre-excitation after making sure that there will be no problem in safety if the motor runs.
· Do not switch between the STF (forward rotation command) and STR (reverse rotation command) during operation under
torque control. Overcurrent shut-off error (E.OC) or opposite rotation deceleration error (E.11) occurs.
· For the 0.4K to 3.7K, the speed deviation may become large at 20Hz or less and torque may become insufficient in the low
speed region under 1Hz during continuous operation under real sensorless vector control. In such case, stop operation once
and reaccelerate to improve the problems.
· When the inverter is likely to start during motor coasting under real sensorless vector control, set to make frequency search of
automatic restart after instantaneous power failure valid (Pr. 57 ≠ "9999", Pr. 162 = "10").
57
Before operation
3.3.9 Higher accuracy operation using a motor with encoder (Vector control)
(Pr.71, Pr.80, Pr.81, Pr.359, Pr.369, Pr.800) Vector
Full-scale vector control can be performed fitting the FR-A7AP and using a motor with encoder. Fast response/
high accuracy speed control (zero speed control, servo lock), torque control, and position control can be
performed.
• What is vector control?
Excellent control characteristics when compared to V/F control and other control techniques, achieving the
control characteristics equal to those of DC machines.
It is suitable for applications below.
· To minimize the speed fluctuation even at a severe load fluctuation
· To generate low speed torque
· To prevent machine from damage due to too large torque (torque limit)
· To perform torque control or position control
· Servo-lock torque control which generates a torque at zero speed (i.e. status of motor shaft = stopped)
Parameter Initial
Number Value
71 Applied motor 0 23, 24, 30, 33, 34, 40, 43, torque motor, thermal characteristic and motor
44, 50, 53, 54 constants of each motor are set.
55K or less 0.4 to 55kW
80 Motor capacity 9999 75K or more 0 to 3600kW
9999 V/F control
2, 4, 6, 8, 10 Set the number of motor poles.
X18 signal-ON:V/F Set 10 + number of
81 Number of motor poles 9999 12, 14, 16, 18, 20
control * motor poles.
9999 V/F control
CW
A
0
Encoder
Clockwise direction as viewed
Encoder rotation from A is forward rotation
359 1
direction
CCW
A
1
Encoder
Counter clockwise direction as
viewed from A is forward rotation
Set the number of pulses of the encoder.
Number of encoder
369 1024 0 to 4096 Set the number of pulses before multiplied by
pulses four.
0 Speed control
1 Torque control
MC signal-ON:torque
2
3 Position control Vector control
MC signal-ON:position
4
800 Control method selection 20 MC signal-ON:torque
5
MC signal-OFF:position *
Vector control test operation
9
(Refer to Instruction Manual (applied))
Real sensorless vector control
10 to 12
(Refer to page 57)
V/F control (advanced magnetic flux vector
20
control)
* Use Pr. 178 to Pr. 189 to assign the terminals used for the X18 and MC signal. (Refer to Instruction Manual (applied)).
58
Before operation
POINT
If the conditions below are not satisfied, malfunction such as insufficient torque and uneven rotation may occur.
· The motor capacity should be equal to or one rank lower than the inverter capacity. (note that the capacity is
0.4kW or more)
· Motor to be used is either Mitsubishi standard motor with encoder, high efficiency motor (SF-JR, SF-HR two-pole,
four-pole, six-pole 0.4kW or more) or Mitsubishi constant torque motor (SF-JRCA, SF-HRCA 200V class four-pole
0.4kW to 55kW) or vector control dedicated motor (SF-V5RU). When using a motor other than the above (other
manufacturer's motor), perform offline auto tuning without fail.
· Single-motor operation (one motor run by one inverter) should be performed.
· Wiring length from inverter to motor should be within 30m. (Perform offline auto tuning in the state where wiring
work is performed when the wiring length exceeds 30m.)
CAUTION
· Changing the terminal assignment using Pr. 178 to Pr. 189 (input terminal function selection) may affect the other functions. Make
setting after confirming the function of each terminal.
· Do not perform vector control with a surge voltage suppression filter (FR-ASF-H) or sine wave filer (MT-BSL/BSC) connected.
3
DRIVE THE MOTOR
59
Before operation
<Selection method of speed control>

Speed control is exercised to match the speed command and actual motor speed.
Setting procedure

Mount the FR-A7AP.
Set the motor and encoder. (Pr. 71, Pr.359, Pr.369)
Set Pr.71 Applied motor, Pr.359 Encoder rotation direction and Pr.369
Number of encoder pulses according to the motor and encoder used.
(Refer to page 33.)
Make speed control valid by selecting "0" (speed control), "2" (speed-
torque switchover), or "4" (speed-control switchover) for Pr.800.

(1) Start command
operation panel
(2)Speed command
speed command.

Test run
As required
· Easy gain tuning (refer to page 68)
· Manual input speed control gain adjustment (refer to page 70)
60
Before operation
<Selection method of torque control>

z Torque control is exercised to develop torque as set in the torque command.
z The motor speed becomes constant when the motor output torque and load torque are balanced.
For torque control, therefore, the speed is determined by the load.
z For torque control, the motor gains speed as the motor output torque becomes greater than the motor load.
To prevent overspeed, set the speed limit value so that the motor speed does not increase too high.
(Speed control is exercised during speed limit and torque control is disabled.)
z When speed limit is not set, the speed limit value setting is regarded as 0Hz to disable torque control.
Setting procedure

Mount the FR-A7AP.
(Refer to page 33.)
Set either "1" (torque control), "2" (speed-torque switchover) or "5"
(position-torque switchover) in Pr.800 and make torque control valid.

Set the speed limit.. (Pr. 807)

Test run
As required
· Manual input torque control gain adjustment (refer to Instruction Manual (applied)) 3
DRIVE THE MOTOR
61
Before operation
<Selection method of position control>

z In the position control, the speed command is calculated so that the difference between command pulse (or
parameter setting) and the number of feedback pulses from the encoder is zero to run the motor.
z This inverter can perform conditional position feed by contact input and position control by inverter conditional
pulse input.
Setting procedure

Mount the FR-A7AP.
(Refer to page 33.)
Make speed control valid by selecting "3" (speed control) "4" (speed-
torque switchover) or "5" (position/torque switchover) for Pr.800.
Selection of position command source. (Pr. 419)

Position command by contact input Position command by inverter pulse train input
Set "0" in Pr. 419 (initial value). Set "2" in Pr. 419.
Setting of parameter for position feed Selection of command pulse form.

(Pr.465 to Pr.494). (Pr. 465 to Pr.494) (Pr. 428)
(Refer to Instruction Manual (applied).) (Refer to Instruction Manual (applied).)
Test run
As required
· Set the electronic gear. (refer to Instruction Manual (applied))
· Setting of positioning adjustment parameter (refer to Instruction Manual (applied))
· Gain adjustment of position control (refer to Instruction Manual (applied))
62
Before operation
3.3.10 To exhibit the best performance of the motor performance (offline auto tuning)
(Pr. 71, Pr. 83, Pr. 84, Pr. 96) Magnetic flux Sensorless Vector
The motor performance can be maximized with offline auto tuning.

• What is offline auto tuning?
When performing advanced magnetic flux vector control, real sensorless vector control or vector control, the
motor can be run with the optimum operating characteristics by automaticaly measuring the motor constants
(offline auto tuning) even when each motor constants differs, other manufacturer's motor is used, or the wiring
length is long.
Parameter Initial
Number Value
71 Applied motor 0 23, 24, 30, 33, 34, 40, torque motor, thermal characteristic and motor
43, 44, 50, 53, 54 constants of each motor are set.
Set the rated motor voltage(V).
83 Motor rated voltage 200/400V * 0 to 1000V * The initial value differs according to the
voltage level. (200V/400V)
84 Rated motor frequency 60Hz 10 to 120Hz Set the rated motor frequency (Hz).
0 Offline auto tuning is not performed
Offline auto tuning is performed without motor
Auto tuning setting/ 1
96 0 running
status
Offline auto tuning is performed with motor
101
running
POINT
· This function is made valid only when a value other than "9999" is set in Pr. 80 and Pr. 81 and advanced magnetic
flux vector control or real sensorless vector control is selected.
· You can copy the offline auto tuning data (motor constants) to another inverter with the PU (FR-DU07/FR-PU04).
· Even when motors (other manufacturer's motor, SF-JRC, etc.) other than Mitsubishi standard motor, high
efficiency motor (SF-JR SF-HR 0.4kW or more), Mitsubishi constant-torque motor (SF-JRCA SF-HRCA 200V
class four-pole 0.4kW to 55kW) and vector control dedicated motor (SF-V5RU) are used or the wiring length is
long, using the offline auto tuning function runs the motor with the optimum operating characteristics.
· Tuning is enabled even when a load is connected to the motor. (As the load is lighter, tuning accuracy is higher.
Tuning accuracy does not change even if the inertia is large.)
· For the offline auto tuning, you can select either the motor non-rotation mode (Pr. 96 = "1") or rotation mode. (Pr.
96 = "101").
· The rotation mode has higher tuning accuracy than the non-rotation mode.
· Reading/writing/copy of motor constants tuned by offline auto tuning are enabled.
· The offline auto tuning status can be monitored with the PU (FR-DU07/FR-PU04).
· Do not connect a surge voltage suppression filter (FR-ASF-H) to the 55K or less and sine wave filter (MT-BSL/BSC) to
the 75K or more between the inverter and motor.
3
DRIVE THE MOTOR
63
Before operation
(1) Before performing offline auto tuning

Check the following before performing offline auto tuning.
· Make sure advanced magnetic flux vector control (Pr. 80, Pr. 81), real sensorless vector control or vector control (Pr.
800) is selected. (Refer to page 55 )
· A motor should be connected. Note that the motor should be at a stop at a tuning start.
· The motor capacity should be equal to or one rank lower than the inverter capacity. (note that the capacity is 0.4kW
or more)
· The maximum frequency is 120Hz.
· Motors such as high-slip motor, high-speed motor and special motor cannot be tuned.
· Even if tuning is performed without motor running (Pr. 96 Auto tuning setting/status = "1"), the motor may run slightly.
Therefore, fix the motor securely with a mechanical brake, or before tuning, make sure that there will be no
problem in safety if the motor runs. (Caution is required especially in vertical lift applications). Note that if the motor
runs slightly, tuning performance is unaffected.
· Note the following when selecting offline auto tuning performed with motor running (Pr. 96 Auto tuning setting/status =
"101").
Torque is not enough during tuning.
The motor may be run at nearly its rated speed.
The brake is open.
No external force is applied to rotate the motor.
· Offline auto tuning will not be performed properly if it is performed with a surge voltage suppression filter (FR-ASF-
H) connected to the 55K or less and sine wave filter (MT-BSL/BSC) connected to the 75K or more between the
inverter and motor. Remove it before starting tuning.
· When exercising vector control, use the encoder that is coupled directly to the motor shaft without looseness.
Speed ratio should be 1:1.
(2) Setting
1) Set "1" or "101" in Pr. 96 Auto tuning setting/status .
· When the setting is "1" . . . . . . . . Tuning is performed without motor running.
It takes approximately 25 to 120s * until tuning is completed.
(Excitation noise is produced during tuning.)
* Tuning time differs according to the inverter capacity and motor type.
· When the setting is "101" . . . . . . Tuning is performed without motor running.
It takes approximately 40s until tuning is completed.
The motor runs at nearly its rated frequency.
2) Set the rated voltage of motor (initial value is 200V/400V) in Pr. 83 Motor rated voltage and rated frequency of motor
(initial value is 60Hz) in Pr. 84 Rated motor frequency .
(For a Japanese standard motor, etc. which has both 50Hz and 60Hz rated values, use it with initial value (200V/
60Hz or 400V/60Hz).)
3) Set Pr. 71 Applied motor according to the motor used.

Motor Pr. 71 Setting *
Mitsubishi standard SF-JR, SF-TH 3
motor SF-JR 4P-1.5kW or less 23
Mitsubishi high efficiency SF-HR 43
motor Others 3
SF-JRCA 200V 4P,
13
Mitsubishi constant- SF-TH (constant torque)
torque motor SF-HRCA 200V 4P 53
Others (SF-JRC, etc.) 13
Vector control dediated SF-V5RU
33
motor SF-THY
Other manufacturer's
standard motor
− 3
Other manufacturer's
− 13
constant torque motor
* For other settings of Pr. 71 , refer to Instruction Manual (applied).
64
Before operation
(3) Execution of tuning
CAUTION
· Before performing tuning, check the monitor display of the operation panel (FR-DU07) or parameter unit (FR-PU04/FR-
PU07) if the inverter is in the state ready for tuning. (Refer to 2) below) When the start command is turned on under V/F
control, the motor starts.
1)When performing PU operation, press / of the operation panel.

For external operation, turn on the run command (STF signal or STR signal). Tuning starts.
CAUTION
· When selecting offline auto tuning performed with motor running (Pr. 96 Auto tuning setting/status = "101"), caution must be
taken since the motor runs.
· To force tuning to end, use the MRS or RES signal or press of the operation panel.
(Turning the start signal (STF signal or STR signal) off also ends tuning.)
· During offline auto tuning, only the following I/O signals are valid:
· Input signals <valid signal> STOP, OH, MRS, RT, CS, RES, STF, STR
· Output terminal RUN, OL, IPF, FM, AM, A1B1C1
· Since the RUN signal turns on when tuning is started, caution is required especially when a sequerence which releases a
mechanical brake by the RUN signal has been designed.
· When executing offline auto tuning, input the run command after switching on the main circuit power (R/L1, S/L2, T/L3) of the
inverter.
· Do not perform ON/OFF switching of the second function selection signal (RT) during execution of offline auto tuning. Auto
tuning is not excecuted properly.
· Setting offline auto tuning (Pr. 96 Auto tuning setting/status = "1 or 101") will make pre-excitation invalid.
2)Monitor is displayed on the operation panel (FR-DU07) and parameter unit (FR-PU04/FR-PU07) during tuning as
below.
Parameter Unit
Operation Panel (FR-DU07) Display
(FR-PU04/FR-PU07) Display
Pr. 96 setting 1 101 1 101
(1) Setting 1 101

STOP PU STOP PU
(2) Tuning in
TUNE 2 TUNE 102
progress
STF FWD PU STF FWD PU
103
3
TUNE 3 TUNE
(3) Normal end COMPLETION COMPLETION
STF STOP PU STF STOP PU
Flickering Flickering
(4) Error end (when
DRIVE THE MOTOR
the inverter TUNE 9

protective function ERROR
STF STOP PU
is activated)
·Reference: Offline auto tuning time (when the initial value is set)
Offline Auto Tuning Setting Time
Approximately 25 to 120s
Non-rotation mode (Pr. 96 = "1")
(Tuning time differs according to the inverter capacity and motor type.)
Approximately 40s
(Offline auto tuning time varies with the acceleration and deceleration time
Rotation mode (Pr. 96 = "101")
settings as indicated below. Offline auto tuning time = acceleration time +
deceleration time + approx. 30s)
65
Before operation
3)When offline auto tuning ends, press of the operation panel during PU operation. For external operation, turn
off the start signal (STF signal or STR signal).
This operation resets the offline auto tuning and the PU's monitor display returns to the normal indication.
(Without this operation, next operation cannot be started.)
REMARKS
· Do not change the Pr. 96 setting after completion of tuning (3 or 103).
If the Pr. 96 setting is changed, tuning data is made invalid.
If the Pr. 96 setting is changed, tuning must be performed again.
4)If offline auto tuning ended in error (see the table below), motor constants are not set.
Perform an inverter reset and restart tuning.
Error Display Error Cause Remedy
Set "1" or "101" in Pr. 96 and perform tuning
8 Forced end
again.
9 Inverter protective function operation Make setting again.
Current limit (stall prevention) function was Increase acceleration/deceleration time.
91
activated. Set "1" in Pr. 156 .
Converter output voltage reached 75% of
92 Check for fluctuation of power supply voltage.
rated value.
Calculation error Check the motor wiring and make setting
93
A motor is not connected. again.
5)When tuning is ended forcibly by pressing or turning off the start signal (STF or STR) during tuning, offline
auto tuning does not end normally. (The motor constants have not been set.)
Perform an inverter reset and restart tuning.
CAUTION
· The motor constants measured once in the offline auto tuning are stored as parameters and their data are held until the
offline auto tuning is performed again.
· An instantaneous power failure occurring during tuning will result in a tuning error.
After power is restored, the inverter goes into the normal operation mode. Therefore, when STF (STR) signal is on, the motor
runs in the forward (reverse) rotation.
· Any alarm occurring during tuning is handled as in the ordinary mode. Note that if an error retry has been set, retry is ignored.
· The set frequency monitor displayed during the offline auto tuning is 0Hz.
CAUTION
Note that the motor may start running suddenly.
When the offline auto tuning is used in vertical lift application, e.g. a lifter, it may drop due to insufficient torque.
66
Before operation
3.3.11 High accuracy operation unaffected by the motor temperature

(online auto tuning) (Pr. 95) Magnetic flux Sensorless Vector
When online auto tuning is selected under advanced magnetic flux vector control, real sensorless vector control
or vector control, excellent torque accuracy is provided by temperature compensation even if the secondary
resistance value of the motor varies with the rise of the motor temperature.
Parameter Initial
Number Value
0 Online auto tuning is not performed
Online auto tuning
95 0 1 Start-time online auto tuning
selection
2 Magnetic flux observer (normal tuning)
(1) Start-time online auto tuning (setting is "1")

· By quickly tuning the motor constants at a start, high accuracy operation unaffacted by the motor temperature and
stable operation with high torque down to ultra low speed can be performed.
· Make sure advanced magnetic flux vector control (Pr.80, Pr.81 ) or real sensorless vector control (Pr.800 ) is selected.
(Refer to page 55.)
· Before performing online auto tuning, perform offline auto tuning without fail.
<Operation method>
1) Check that "3" or "103" (offline auto tuning completion) is set in Pr. 96 Auto tuning setting/status.
2) Set "1" (start-time online auto tuning) in Pr. 95 Online auto tuning selection.
Online auto tuning is performed from the next starting.
3) When performing PU operation, press / of the operation panel.

For external operation, turn on the run command (STF signal or STR signal).
CAUTION
· For using start-time online auto tuning in vertical lift applications, examine the utilization of a brake sequence for the brake
opening timing at a start. Though the tuning ends in about a maximum of 500ms after a start, torque is not provided fully during
that period. Therefore, note that there may be a possibility of drop due to gravity.
(2) Magnetic flux observer (normal tuning) (setting value is "2")

· When exercising vector control using a motor with encoder, it is effective for torque accuracy improvement.
The current flowing in the motor and the inverter output voltage are used to estimate/observe the magnetic flux in
the motor.
The magnetic flux of the motor is always detected with high accuracy so that an excellent characteristic is provided
regardless of the change in the temperature of the secondary resistance.
· Vector control (Pr.80, Pr.81, Pr.800) should be selected. (Refer to page 58.)
CAUTION
· For the SF-V5RU, SF-JR (with encoder), SF-HR (with encoder), SF-JRCA (with encoder) or SF-HRCA (with encoder), it is not
necessary to perform offline auto tuning to select adaptive magnetic flux observer.(Note that it is necessary to perform offline
auto tuning (non-rotation mode) for the wiring length resistance to be reflected on the control when the wiring length is long
(30m or longer as reference).
3
REMARKS
DRIVE THE MOTOR
· Online auto tuning does not operate if the MRS signal is input, if the preset speed is less than the Pr. 13 Starting frequency, or if
the starting conditions of the inverter are not satisfied, e.g. inverter error.
· Online auto tuning does not operate during deceleration or at a restart during DC brake operation.
· Invalid for jog operation.
· Automatic restart after instantaneous power failure overrides when automatic restart after instantaneous power failure is selected.
(Start-time online auto tuning is not performed at frequency search.)
Perform online auto tuning at a stop with the X28 signal when using automatic restart after instantaneous power failure together.
(Refer to Instruction Manual (applied) for details.)
· Zero current detection and output current detection are valid during online auto tuning.
· The RUN signal is not output during online auto tuning. The RUN signal turns on at a start.
· If the period from an inverter stop to a restart is within 4s, start-time tuning is performed but the tuning results are not reflected.
67
Before operation
3.3.12 To perform high accuracy / fast response operation (gain adjustment of real
sensorless vector control) (Pr. 818 to Pr. 821, Pr. 880)
Sensorless Vector
The ratio of the load inertia to the motor inertia (load inertia moment ratio) is estimated in real time from the
torque command and speed during motor operation by vector control. As optimum gain of speed control and
position control are automatically set from the load inertia ratio and response level, time and effort of making gain
adjustment are reduced. (Easy gain tuning)
When the load inertia ratio can not be estimated due to load fluctuation or real sensorless vector control is
exercised, control gain is automatically set by manually inputting the load inertia ratio.
Make a manual input adjustment when vibration, noise or any other unfavorable phenomenon occurs due to
large load inertia or gear backlash, for example, or when you want to exhibit the best performance that matches
the machine.
Parameter
Name Initial Value Setting Range Description
Number
Easy gain tuning Set the response level.
818 2 1 to 15
response level setting 1: Slow response to 15: Fast response
0 Without easy gain tuning
Easy gain tuning With load estimation, with gain calculation
819 0 1
selection (only under vector control)
2 With load (Pr. 880) manual input, gain calculation
Set the proportional gain for speed control.
(Increasing the value improves trackability in
820 Speed control P gain 1 60% 0 to 1000%
response to a speed command change and
reduces speed variation with disturbance.)
Set the integral time during speed control.
Speed control integral (Decrease the value to shorten the time taken for
821 0.333s 0 to 20s
time 1 returning to the original speed if speed variation
with disturbance occurs.)
880 Load inertia ratio 7 times 0 to 200 times Set the load intertia ratio to the motor.
(1) Easy gain tuning execution procedure (Pr.819 = "1" load inertia ratio automatic estimation)
Easy gain tuning (load inertia ratio automatic
estimation) is valid only in the speed control or Pr.818 setting 1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 9 10 11 12 13 14 15
position control mode under vector control. Slow
Response level response
Middle Fast
response response
It is invalid under torque control, V/F control,
Guideline of
advanced magnetic flux vector control and real machine resonance 8 10 12 15 18 22 28 34 42 52 64 79 98 122 150
sensorless vector control. frequency (Hz)
1) Set the response level using Pr.818 Easy gain

tuning response level setting.
Refer to the diagram on the right and set the Large conveyor General machine tool,
conveyor
response level.
Increasing the value will improve trackability
to the command, but too high value will
Arm robot Precision
generate vibration. machine tool
The relationship between the setting and
response level are shown on the right.
68
Before operation
2) Each control gain is automatically set from the load inertia ratio estimated during acceleration/deceleration
operation and the Pr. 818 Easy gain tuning response level setting value.
Pr. 880 Load inertia ratio is used as the initial value of the load inertia ratio for tuning. Estimated value is set in Pr.
880 during tuning.
The load inertia ratio may not be estimated well, e.g. it takes a long time for estimation, if the following
conditions are not satisfied.
· Time taken for acceleration/deceleration to reach 1500r/min is 5s or less.
· Speed is 150r/min or more.
· Acceleration/deceleration torque is 10% or more of the rated torque.
· Abrupt disturbance is not applied during acceleration/deceleration.
· Load inertia ratio is approx. 30 times or less.
· No gear backlash nor belt looseness is found.
3) Press or to estimate the load inertia ratio or calculate gain any time.(The operation command for
external operation is the STF or STR signal.)
(2) Easy gain tuning execution procedure (Pr.819 = "2" load inertia manual input)
Easy gain tuning (load inertia ratio manual input) is valid only in the speed control under real sensorless vector
control or in the speed control or position control mode under vector control.
1) Set the load inertia ratio to the motor in Pr. 880 Load inertia ratio.
2) Set "2" (with easy gain tuning) in Pr. 819 Easy gain tuning selection. Then, Pr. 820 Speed control P gain 1 and Pr. 821
Speed control integral time 1 are automaticaly set by gain calculation.
Operation is performed in a gain adjusted status from the next operation.
3) Perform a test run and set the response level in Pr. 818 Easy gain tuning response level setting. Increasing the value will
improve trackability to the command, but too high value will generate vibration. (When "2" (parameter write enabled
during operation) is set in Pr. 77 Parameter write selection , response level adjustment can be made during operation.)
REMARKS
· When "1 or 2" is set in Pr. 819 and then returned the Pr. 819 setting to "0" after tuning is executed, tuning results which are set in
each parameter remain unchanged.
· When good tuning accuracy is not obtained after executing easy gain tuning due to disturbance and such, perform fine
adjustment by manual input. Set "0" (without easy gain tuning) in Pr. 819.
(3) Automatically set parameters by easy gain tuning

The following table indicates the relationship between easy gain tuning function and gain adjustment parameter.
Easy Gain Tuning Selection (Pr. 819 ) Setting
0 1 2
a) Inertia estimation result (RAM) by
easy gain tuning is dispayed.
b) Set the value in the following cases:
• Every hour after power-on
• When a value other than "1" is
Load inertia ratio
Manual input set in Pr.819 Manual input
(Pr. 880)
• When vector control is changed
to other control (V/F control etc.)
using Pr.800
c) Write is enabled only during a stop 3
(manual input)
a) Tuning result (RAM) is displayed. a) Gain is calculated when "2" is
DRIVE THE MOTOR
set in Pr.819 and the result is

Speed control P gain 1 set in the parameter.
(Pr. 820)
b) Set the value in the following cases: b) When the value is read, the
Speed control integral time 1
• Every hour after power-on tuning result (parameter
(Pr. 821)
Manual input • When a value other than "1" is setting value) is displayed.
Model speed control gain
set in Pr.819
(Pr. 828)
• When vector control is changed
Position loop gain
to other control (V/F control etc.)
(Pr. 422)
using Pr.800
c) Write (manual input) disabled c) Write (manual input) disabled
CAUTION
Performing easy gain tuning with larger inertia than the specified value during vector control may cause malfunction such as
hunting. In addition, when the motor shaft is fixed with servo lock or position control, bearing may be damaged. To prevent
these, make gain adjustment by manual input without performing easy gain tuning.
69
Before operation
(4) Manual input speed control gain adjustment

· Make adjustment when any of such phenomena as unusual machine vibration/noise, low response level and
overshoot has occurred.
Proportional gain
· Pr. 820 Speed control P gain 1 = "60%" (initial value) is equivalent to
120rad/s (speed responce of the motor alone). Increasing the
200rad/s
setting value improves the response level, but a too large gain will
produce vibration and/or unusual noise.
120rad/s
· Decreasing the Pr. 821 Speed control integral time 1 shortens the
Pr.820 return time taken at a speed change. However, a too short time will
60% 100% Setting generate an overshoot.
(initial value)
· When there is load inertia, the actual speed gain is as given below.
Load
fluctuation
Speed
Since increasing the proportional gain enhances the
response level and decreases the speed fluctuation.
Decreasing the integral time shortens the return time taken.

Also, when there is load inertia, the actual speed gain decreases as indicated below.
JM JM: Inertia of the motor
Actual speed gain = speed gain of motor without load ×
JM+JL JL: Motor shaft-equivalent load inertia
· Adjustment procedures are as below:

1)Check the conditions and simultaneously change the Pr. 820 value.
2)If you cannot make proper adjustment, change the Pr. 821 value and repeat step 1).
Phenomenon/
No. Adjustment Method
Condition
Set the Pr. 820 and Pr. 821 values a little higher.
When a speed rise is slow, increase the value 10% by 10% until just before
Load inertia Pr. 820
1 vibration/noise is produced, and set about 0.8 to 0.9 of that value.
is large
If an overshoot occurs, double the value until an overshoot does not occur, and
Pr. 821
set about 0.8 to 0.9 of that value.
Set the Pr. 820 value a little lower and the Pr. 821 value a little higher.
Vibration/noise Decrease the value 10% by 10% until just before vibration/noise is not produced,
Pr. 820
2 generated from and set about 0.8 to 0.9 of that value.
mechanical system If an overshoot occurs, double the value until an overshoot does not occur, and
Pr. 821
set about 0.8 to 0.9 of that value.
Set the Pr. 820 value a little higher.
3 Slow response When a speed rise is slow, increase the value 5% by 5% until just before
Pr. 820
vibration/noise is produced, and set about 0.8 to 0.9 of that value.
Set the Pr. 821 value a little lower.
Long return time
4 Decrease the Pr. 821 value by half until just before an overshoot or the unstable phenomenon
(response time)
does not occur, and set about 0.8 to 0.9 of that value.
Overshoot Set the Pr. 821 value a little higher.
5 or unstable Double the Pr. 821 value until just before an overshoot or the unstable phenomenon does not
phenomenon occurs. occur, and set about 0.8 to 0.9 of that value.
REMARKS
· When making manual input gain adjustment, set "0" (without easy gain tuning) (initial value) in Pr. 819 Easy gain tuning
selection.
70
Before operation
(5) Troubleshooting
Phenomenon Cause Countermeasures

(1) The motor wiring is wrong (1) Wiring check
Select V/F control (Pr.800 = 20) and check the rotation
direction of the motor.
Check the speed monitor output from output terminal
FM.
For the FR-V5RU, set "170V" for 3.7kW or less and "
160V " for more in Pr. 19 Base frequency voltage, and
set "50Hz" in Pr. 3 Base frequency.
When the forward rotation signal is input,
the motor running in the counterclockwise
direction as viewed from the motor shaft is
normal. (If it runs in the clockwise direction,
the phase sequence of the inverter
secondary side wiring is incorrect.)
(2) Encoder specifications (encoder (2) Check the encoder specifications.
specification selection switch Check the encoder specifications selection switch
FR-A7AP) are wrong (FR-A7AP) of differential/complimentary
(3) The encoder wiring is wrong. (3) Check that FWD is displayed when running the motor
in the counter-clockwise direction from outside during
a stop of the inverter with vector control setting.
If REV is displayed, the encoder phase sequence is
Motor does not rotate. wrong.
1
(Vector control) Perform the correct wiring or match the Pr.359 Encoder
rotation direction.
Pr. 359 Relationship between the motor
setting and encoder
CW
0 A
Encoder
from A is forward rotation
CCW
1 A
(Initial value) Encoder
Counter clockwise direction as
viewed from A is forward rotation
(4) The Pr. 369 Number of encoder (4) The motor will not run if the parameter setting is
pulses setting and the number of smaller than the number of encoder pulses used. Set
encoder used are different. the Pr. 369 Number of encoder pulses correctly.
(5) Encoder power specifications (5) Check the power specifications (5V/12V/15V/24V) of
are wrong. Or, power is not input. encoder and input the external power supply.
(1) The speed command from the (1) Check that a correct speed command comes from the
command device is incorrect. command device.
Motor does not run at

The speed command is Decrease Pr. 72 PWM frequency selection. 3
compounded with noise.
correct speed. (Speed
2 (2) The speed command value (2) Readjust speed command bias/gain Pr. 125, Pr. 126, C2
command does not match
does not match the inverter- to C7 and C12 to C15.
DRIVE THE MOTOR
actual speed)
recognized value.
(3) The number of encoder pulses (3) Check the setting of Pr.369 Number of encoder pulses.
setting is incorrect. (vector control)
(1) Insufficient torque. (1) -1 Increase the torque limit value.
Torque limit is actuated. (Refer to torque limit of speed control on
Speed does not rise to the Instruction Manual (applied) )
3
speed command. (1)-2 Insufficient capacity
(2) Only P (proportional) control is (2) When the load is heavy, speed deviation will occur
selected. under P (proportional) control. Select PI control.
71
Before operation
Phenomenon Cause Countermeasures

(1) The speed command varies. (1) -1 Check that a correct speed command comes from
the command device. (Take measures against
noises.)
(1) -2 Decrease Pr. 72 PWM frequency selection.
(1) -3 Increase Pr. 822 Speed setting filter 1. (Refer to
Instruction Manual (applied) )
4 Motor speed is unstable. (2) Insufficient torque. (2) Increase the torque limit value.
(Refer to torque limit of speed control on
Instruction Manual (applied) )
(3) The speed control gains do not (3) -1 Perform easy gain tuning. (Refer to page 68 )
match the machine. (machine (3) -2 Adjust Pr. 820, Pr. 821. (Refer to page 70)
resonance) (3) -3 Perform speed feed forward/model adaptive speed
control.
(1) The speed control gain is high. (1) -1 Perform easy gain tuning. (Refer to page 68)
(1) -2 Decrease Pr. 820 and increase Pr. 821.
Motor or machine hunts (1) -3 Perform speed feed foward control and model
5 (vibration/noise is adaptive speed control.
produced). (2) The torque control gain is high. (2) Decrease the Pr. 824 value. (Refer to Instruction
Manual (applied) )
(3) The motor wiring is wrong. (3) Check the wiring
(1) Insufficient torque. (1) -1 Increase the torque limit value.
Acceleration/deceleration (Refer to torque limit of speed control on

6 time does not match the Instruction Manual (applied) )
setting. (1) -2 Perform speed feed foward control.
(2) Large load inertia. (2) Set the acceleration/deceleration time that meets the
load.
(1) The speed control gains do not (1) -1 Perform easy gain tuning. (Refer to page 68)
match the machine. (1) -2 Adjust Pr. 820, Pr. 821. (Refer to page 70)
(1) -3 Perform speed feed foward control and model
Machine operation is
7 adaptive speed control.
unstable
(2) Slow response because of (2) Change the acceleration/deceleration time to an
improper acceleration/ optimum value.
deceleration time of the inverter.
(1) Adverse effect of high carrier (1) Decrease Pr. 72 PWM frequency selection.
Speed fluctuates at low
8 frequency.
speed.
(2) Low speed control gain. (2) Increase Pr. 820 Speed control P gain 1.
72
Start/stop from the operation panel (PU
operation mode)
3.4 Start/stop from the operation panel (PU operation mode)

[Connection diagram]
POINT Inverter
Three-phase R/L1 U
From where is the frequency command given? AC power supply S/L2 V Motor
· Operation at the frequency set in the frequency setting mode T/L3 W
of the operation panel →Refer to 3.4.1 (Refer to page 73)
· Operation using the setting dial as the volume FR-DU07
→Refer to 3.4.2 (Refer to page 74)
· Change of frequency with ON/OFF switches connected to
terminals →Refer to 3.4.3 (Refer to page 75)
· Frequency setting with a voltage output device
→Refer to 3.4.4 (Refer to page 76) ,
· Frequency setting with a current output device
→Refer to 3.4.5 (Refer to page 77) ,
3.4.1 Set the set frequency to operate (example: performing operation at 30Hz)
Operation Display

operation mode.
3.Turn to show the frequency

you want to set. Flickers for
The frequency flickers for about 5s. about 5s
4.While the value is flickering,

press to set the frequency.
If you do not press , the value flickers for about 5s Flicker ··· Frequency setting complete!!
and the display then returns to 0.00 (display) Hz.
At this time, return to "Step 3" and set the frequency again.
3s later
5.After the value flickered for about 3s,
the display returns to 0.00 (monitor display).
Press (or ) to start operation. ( )
6.To change the set frequency, perform the

operation in above steps 3 and 4.
(Starts from the previously set frequency.)
7.Press to stop.
Operation cannot be performed at the set frequency ... Why?

Did you carry out step 4 within 5s after step 3? (Did you press within 5s after turning ?)
The frequency does not change by turning ... Why?
Check to see if the operation mode selected is the external operation mode. (Press to change to 3
the PU operation mode.)
Operation does not change to the PU operation mode ... Why?
DRIVE THE MOTOR
Check that "0" (initial value) is set in Pr. 79 Operation mode selection.
Check that the start command is not on.
Change acceleration time Pr. 7 (Refer to page 53)
Change deceleration time Pr. 8 (Refer to page 53)
For example, limit the motor speed to 60Hz maximum. Set "60Hz" in Pr. 1. (Refer to page 52)
REMARKS
· Press to show the set frequency.
· can also be used like a potentiometer to perform operation. (Refer to page 74)
73
operation mode)
3.4.2 Use the setting dial like a potentiometer to perform operation.
POINT
Set "1" (setting dial potentiometer mode) in Pr. 161 Frequency setting/key lock operation selection.
Operation example Change the frequency from 0Hz to 60Hz during operation
Operation Display
1. Screen at powering on
PU indication is lit.
2. Press to choose the PU operation
mode.
3. Change Pr. 161 to the setting value " ".

(Refer to page 43 for change of the setting.)
4.Press (or ) to start the inverter.
5.Turn until "60.00" appears.

The flickering frequency is the set frequency.
You need not press .
The frequency flickers for about 5s.
REMARKS
· If flickering "60.00" turns to "0.0", the Pr. 161 Frequency setting/key lock operation selection setting may not be "1".
· Independently of whether the inverter is running or at a stop, the frequency can be set by merely turning .
74
operation mode)
3.4.3 Use switches to give a start command and a frequency command (multi-speed
setting)
POINT
· Use / to give a start command.

· Pr. 79 Operation mode selection must be set to "4" (external/PU combined operation mode 2)
· The initial values of the terminals RH, RM, RL are 60Hz, 30Hz, and 10Hz. (Refer to page 79 to change frequencies
using Pr. 4, Pr. 5 and Pr. 6.)
· Operation at 7-speed can be performed by turning on two (or three) terminals simultaneously.
Inverter Speed 1
Output frequency (Hz)

(High speed)
Three-phase R/L1 U Speed 5
AC power supply S/L2 V Motor Speed 2 Speed 6
(Middle speed)
T/L3 W Speed 3 Speed 4
(Low speed)
High speed RH Speed 7
Middle speed RM
Time
Low speed RL RH ON ON ON ON
SD RM ON ON ON ON
FR-DU07 ON ON ON
RL
Operation Display
2. Change the Pr. 79 setting to " ".

3. Press the start switch (or ).

FWD (or REV) flickers.
When the frequency command is not
Flickering
given, it flickers.
Low speed
4. Turn on the low speed switch (RL).
The output frequency increases to 10Hz
according to Pr. 7 Acceleration time.
Low speed
5.Turn off the low speed switch (RL).
The output frequency decreases to 0Hz
according to Pr. 8 Deceleration time.
Flickering 3
6.Turn off the start switch .
FWD (or REV) turns off.
DRIVE THE MOTOR
60Hz for the RH, 30Hz for the RM and 10Hz for the RL are not output when they are turned on ... Why?
Check for the setting of Pr. 4, Pr. 5, and Pr. 6 once again.
Check for the setting of Pr. 1 Maximum frequency and Pr. 2 Minimum frequency once again.
(Refer to page 52.)
Check that Pr. 180 RL terminal function selection = "0", Pr. 181 RM terminal function selection = "1", Pr.
182 RH terminal function selection = "2" and Pr. 59 Remote function selection = "0". (all are initial values)
[FWD (or REV)] lamp is not lit ... Why?
Check that wiring is correct. Check the wiring once again.
Check for the Pr. 79 setting once again. (Pr. 79 must be set to "4".)
(Refer to page 54.)
Change the frequency of the terminal RL, RM, and RH. ... How?
Refer to page 79 to change the running frequency at each terminal in Pr. 4 Multi-speed setting (high
speed), Pr. 5 Multi-speed setting (middle speed), and Pr. 6 Multi-speed setting (low speed).
75
operation mode)
3.4.4 Perform frequency setting by analog (voltage input)

POINT

(The inverter supplies 5V of power to the frequency setting potentiometer.(Terminal 10))
Inverter
Three-phase R/L1 U
AC power supply S/L2 V Motor
T/L3 W
10
Frequency setting
2
potentiometer
5 FR-DU07
Operation Display

3. Start
Press the start switch (or ).
Operation status indication of FWD (or REV)
flickers. ( )
Flickering
CAUTION
When both the forward switch and reverse
switch turn on, the inverter will not start.
Also, if both switch turn on while running,
the inverter stops.
4. Acceleration → constant speed

Turn the volume (frequency setting
potentiometer) clockwise slowly to full.
The frequency value on the indication increases
according to Pr. 7 Acceleration time until 60Hz is
displayed.
5. Deceleration
Turn the volume (frequency setting potentiometer)
counterclockwise slowly to full.
The frequency value on the indication decreases Flickering
Stop
according to Pr. 8 Deceleration time unitl 0.00Hz is
displayed and operation status indication of FWD
or REV flickers.
The motor stops.
6. Stop
Press .
Operation status indication of FWD (or REV)
turns off.
Change the frequency (60Hz) of the maximum value of potentiometer (at 5V, initial value)
Adjust the frequency in Pr. 125 Terminal 2 frequency setting gain frequency. (Refer to page 82.)
Change the frequency (0Hz) of the minimum value of potentiometer (at 0V, initial value)
Adjust the frequency in calibration parameter C2 Terminal 2 frequency setting bias frequency. (Refer to
76
operation mode)
3.4.5 Perform frequency setting by analog (current input)

POINT

· Turn the AU signal on.
Inverter
Three-phase R/L1 U
T/L3 W
AU signal AU
SD
Output of the 4(+)
adjustment meter
5(-) FR-DU07
(4 to 20mADC)
Operation Display
3. Start
Check that the terminal 4 input selection signal (AU) is on.
Press the start switch (or ).
FWD or REV of operation status indication flickers. ( )
Flickering
CAUTION
When both the forward switch and reverse switch
turn on, the inverter will not start.
Also, if both switch turn on while running, the
inverter stops.
4. Acceleration → constant speed

Perform 20mA input. Output of the
The frequency value on the indication increases adjustment meter
according to Pr. 7 Acceleration time until 60.00Hz is (4 to 20mADC)
displayed.
5. Deceleration Output of the

Perform 4mA input.
adjustment meter
The frequency value on the indication decreases (4 to 20mADC) 3
according to Pr. 8 Deceleration time until 0.00Hz is Flickering
displayed and the operation status indication of FWD or Stop
DRIVE THE MOTOR
REV flickers.
The motor stops.
6. Stop
Press .
FWD or REV of the operation status indication turns off.
REMARKS
Pr. 184 AU terminal function selection must be set to "4" (AU signal) (initial value). (Refer to Instruction Manual (applied).)
Change the frequency (60Hz) at the maximum value of potentiometer (at 20mA, initial value)
Adjust the frequency in Pr. 126 Terminal 4 frequency setting gain frequency. (Refer to page 84.)
Change the frequency (0Hz) at the minimum value of potentiometer (at 4mA, initial value)
77
Make a start and stop with terminals
(external operation)
3.5 Make a start and stop with terminals (external operation)

POINT
From where is the frequency command given?
· Operation at the frequency set in the frequency setting mode of the operation panel → Refer to 3.5.1(Refer to page 78)
· Give a frequency command by switch (multi-speed setting) → Refer to 3.5.2 (Refer to page 79)
· Perform frequency setting by a voltage output device → Refer to 3.5.3 (Refer to page 81)
· Perform frequency setting by a current output device → Refer to 3.5.5 (Refer to page 83)
3.5.1 Use the set frequency set by the operation panel (Pr. 79 = 3)
POINT [Connection diagram]
· Switch terminal STF(STR)-SD on to give a start Inverter
command. Three-phase R/L1 U
· Set "3" in Pr. 79 (External/PU combined AC power supply S/L2 V Motor
operation mode 1). T/L3 W
· Refer to page 73 for the set frequency by the Forward rotation STF
operation panel. start
Reverse rotation STR
start
SD
FR-DU07
Operation Display
2.Change the Pr. 79 setting to " ".
Forward
3.Turn the start switch (STF or STR) on. rotation Reverse
•The motor runs at the frequency set in the set ON
rotation
frequency mode of the operation panel.
4.Turn to change running frequency.

Display the frequency you want to set. Flickers for about 5s
The frequency flickers for about 5s.
5.While the value is flickering, press to set the
frequency.
If you do not press ,the value flickers for about Flicker ··· Frequency setting complete!!
5s and the display then returns to 0.00 (display) Hz.
At this time, return to "Step 3" and set the frequency again.
Forward
rotation
6.Turn the start switch (STF or STR) off. Reverse
rotation
The motor decelerates according to Pr. 8 Deceleration
time to stop. OFF Stop
REMARKS
· Pr. 178 STF terminal function selection must be set to "60" (or Pr. 179 STR terminal function selection must be set to "61").
(all are initial values)
· When Pr. 79 Operation mode selection is set to "3", multi-speed operation (refer to page 79) is also made valid.
When the inverter is stopped by of the operation panel (FR-DU07), and are
Flickering
displayed alternately.
1. Turn the start switch (STF or STR) off.
2. The display can be reset by .
78
3.5.2 Use switches to give a start command and a frequency command

(multi-speed setting) (Pr. 4 to Pr. 6)
POINT
· Start command by terminal STF (STR)-SD
· Frequency command by terminal RH, RM, RL and STR-SD
· [EXT] must be lit. (When [PU] is lit, switch it to [EXT] with .)

· The initial values of the terminals RH, RM, RL are 60Hz, 30Hz, and 10Hz. (Use Pr. 4, Pr. 5 and Pr. 6 to change.)
· Operation at 7-speed can be performed by turning two (or three) terminals simultaneously. (Refer to
Inverter
Three-phase R/L1 U
AC power supply S/L2 V Motor Speed 1
Output frequency (Hz)

(High speed)
T/L3 W Speed 5
Speed 2 Speed 6
Forward (Middle speed)
STF
rotation start Speed 3 Speed 4
(Low speed)
Reverse STR
Speed 7
rotation start
Time
High speed RH ON ON ON ON
RH
Middle speed RM RM ON ON ON ON
RL ON ON ON
Low speed RL
SD
Changing example Set "50Hz" in Pr. 4 Multi-speed setting (high speed) and turn on terminal RH and STF (STR)-SD to
operate.
Operation Display
ON
1. Power on → operation mode check
For the initial setting, the inverter operates in
the external operation mode [EXT] when
powering on. Check that the operation
command indication is [EXT].
If not displayed, press to change to the
external [EXT] operation mode. If the operation
mode still does not change, set Pr. 79 to change to
the external operation mode.

3
High speed
3. Turn on the high speed switch (RH). ON Middle speed
DRIVE THE MOTOR
Low speed
Forward rotation
4. Turn the start switch (STF or STR) on. Reverse rotation
50Hz appears. ON
• 30Hz appears when RM is on and 10Hz
appears when RL is on.
Forward
5. Stop rotation Reverse
Turn the start switch (STF or STR) off. rotation
The motor stops according to Pr. 8
Deceleration time. OFF Stop
79
[EXT] is not lit even when is pressed ... Why?
Switchover of the operation mode with is valid when Pr. 79 = "0" (initial value).
50Hz, 30Hz and 10Hz are not output from RH, RM and RL respectively when they are turned on. ... Why?
Check for the setting of Pr. 4, Pr. 5, and Pr. 6 once again.
Check for the setting of Pr. 1 Maximum frequency and Pr. 2 Minimum frequency once again. (Refer to
page 52)
Check for the Pr. 79 setting once again. (Pr. 79 must be set to "0" or "2".) (Refer to page 54)
Check that Pr. 180 RL terminal function selection = "0", Pr. 181 RM terminal function selection = "1",
Pr. 182 RH terminal function selection = "2" and Pr. 59 Remote function selection = "0". (all are initial
values)
[FWD (or REV)] is not lit. ... Why?
Check that wiring is correct. Check it again.
Check that "60" is set in Pr. 178 STF terminal function selection (or "61" is set in Pr. 179 STR terminal
function selection)?
How is the frequency setting from 4 to 7 speed ?
The setting differs according to Pr. 24 to Pr. 27 (multi-speed setting). Refer to Instruction Manual
(applied).
Perform multi-speed operation higher than 8 speed. ... How?
Use the REX signal to perform the operation. Refer to Instruction Manual (applied).
REMARKS
· External operation is fixed by setting "2" (external operation mode) in Pr. 79 Operation mode selection when you do not want to take
time pressing or when you want to use the current start command and frequency command. (Refer to page 54)
80
3.5.3 Perform frequency setting by analog (voltage input)

(The inverter supplies 5V of power to frequency setting potentiometer. (Terminal 10))
Inverter
Three-phase R/L1 U
T/L3 W
Forward rotation STF
start
Reverse rotation STR
start
SD
10
Frequency setting 2
potentiometer
5
Operation Display
ON
1.Power on → operation mode check
For the initial setting, the inverter operates
in the external operation mode [EXT] when
command indication is [EXT]. If not displayed,
press to change to the external [EXT]
operation mode. If the operation mode still
does not change, set Pr. 79 to change to the
external operation mode. (Refer to page 54.)
2.Start Forward
rotation Reverse
Turn the start switch (STF or STR) on. rotation
Operation status indication of FWD (or REV) ON
flickers.
CAUTION Flickering
switch are on, the inverter will not start.
Also, if both switches turn on while running,
the inverter decelerates to stop.
3.Acceleration → constant speed

potentiometer) clockwise slowly to full.
The frequency value on the indication
increases according to Pr. 7
Acceleration time until 60Hz is displayed.
4.Deceleration
potentiometer) counterclockwise slowly to full.
The frequency value of the indication Flickering 3
decreases according to Pr. 8 Deceleration
time until 0.00Hz is displayed.
Stop
DRIVE THE MOTOR
The motor stops.

Forward
5.Stop rotation Reverse
OFF
When you want to operate in the external operation mode always at powering on or when you want to
save the trouble of input, set "2" (external operation mode) in Pr. 79 Operation mode selection to
choose external operation mode always.
REMARKS
Pr. 178 STF terminal function selection must be set to "60" (or Pr. 179 STR terminal function selection must be set to "61").
81
The motor will not rotate ... Why?

Check that [EXT] is lit.
[EXT] is valid when Pr. 79 = "0" (initial value) or "2".
Use to lit [EXT].
Check that wiring is correct. Check once again.
Change the frequency (0Hz) of the minimum value of potentiometer (at 0V, initial value)
When you want to compensate frequency setting, use terminal 1.
For details, refer to Instruction Manual (applied).

(at 5V, initial value)
<How to change the maximum frequency?>
Changing example When you want to use the 0 to 5VDC input frequency setting potentiometer to change the 5V-
time frequency from 60Hz (initial value) to 50Hz
Adjust to output 50Hz at 5V voltage input.
Set "50Hz" in Pr. 125.
Operation Display
2.Press to show the currently set value. (60.00Hz)
3.Turn to change the set value

to "50.00". (50.00Hz)
4.Press to set.
Flicker ··· 50Hz output at 5V input complete!!
5.Mode/monitor check
Press twice to choose the monitor/frequency monitor.
6.Turn the start switch (STF or STR) on and turn the volume
(frequency setting potentiometer) clockwise to full slowly.
(Refer to 3.5.3 steps 2 to 5)
The frequency meter (indicator) connected to across terminals FM-SD does not indicate just 50Hz ... Why?
The meter can be adjusted by calibration parameter C0 FM terminal calibration. (Refer to
Set frequency at 0V using calibration Initial value
parameter C2 and adjust the indicator using
Output frequency
60Hz
calibration parameter C0.
(Hz)
Gain Pr.125
Bias
C2
(Pr.902) 0 100%
0 Frequency setting signal 5V
0 10V
C3 (Pr.902) C4 (Pr.903)
REMARKS
As other adjustment methods of frequency setting voltage gain, there are methods to adjust with a voltage applied to across
terminals 2-5 and adjust at any point without a voltage applied.
(Refer to Instruction Manual (applied) for the setting method of calibration parameter C4.)
82
3.5.5 Perform frequency setting by analog (current input)
POINT
· Switch terminal STF(STR)-SD on to give a start command.
· Turn the AU signal on.
· Set "2" (external operation mode) in Pr. 79 Operation mode selection
Inverter
Three-phase R/L1 U
T/L3 W
Forward rotation start STF
Reverse rotation start STR
AU signal AU
SD
Output of the 4(+)
adjustment meter
(4 to 20mADC) 5(-)
Operation Display
ON
1.Power on → operation mode check
For the initial setting, the inverter operates in
the external operation mode [EXT] when
command indication is [EXT]. If not displayed,
press to change to the external [EXT]
operation mode. If the operation mode still does
not change, set Pr. 79 to change to the external
operation mode. (Refer to page 54.)
2.Start
Turn the start switch (STF or STR) on. Forward
rotation Reverse
FWD or REV of operation indication flickers. rotation
CAUTION ON
switch are on, the inverter will not start. Flickering
Also, if both switches turn on while running,
the inverter decelerates to stop.
3.Acceleration → constant speed Output of the

Perform 20mA input. adjustment meter
The frequency value on the indication (4 to 20mADC)
increases according to Pr. 7
Acceleration time until 60.00Hz is displayed. 3
4.Deceleration
Perform 4mA input. Output of the
DRIVE THE MOTOR
The frequency value on the indication adjustment meter

decreases according to Pr. 8 (4 to 20mADC)
Deceleration time until 0.00Hz is displayed Flickering
and FWD or REV of the operation status

indication flickers.
The motor stops. Stop
Forward
5.Stop rotation Reverse
OFF
REMARKS
Pr. 184 AU terminal function selection must be set to "4" (AU signal) (initial value). (Refer to Instruction Manual (applied).)
83
The motor will not rotate ... Why?

Check that [EXT] is lit.
[EXT] is valid when Pr. 79 = "0" (initial value) or "2".
PU
Use EXT to lit [EXT].
Check that the AU signal is on.
Turn the AU signal on.
Check that wiring is orrect. Check it again.
Change the frequency (0Hz) of the minimum value of potentiometer (at 4mA, initial value)
Adjust the frequency in calibration parameter C5 Terminal 4 frequency setting bias frequency.

(at 20mA, initial value)
<How to change the maximum frequency?>
Changing example When you want to use the 4 to 20mA input frequency setting potentiometer to change the 20mA-
time frequency from 60Hz (initial value) to 50Hz
Adjust to output 50Hz at 20mA current input.
Set "50Hz" in Pr. 126.
Operation Display
2.Press to show the currently set value.

(60.00Hz)
3.Turn to change the set value to " ".

(50.00Hz)
4.Press to set the value.

Flicker ··· 50Hz output at 20mA input complete!!
5.Mode/monitor check
Press twice to choose the
monitor/frequency monitor.
6.Turn the start switch (STF or STR) on to allow

20mA current to flow. (Refer to 3.5.5 steps 2 to 5)
The frequency meter (indicator) connected to across terminals FM-SD does not indicate just 50Hz ... Why?
The meter can be adjusted by calibration parameter C0 FM terminal calibration.
Set frequency at 4mA using calibration Initial value
parameter C5 and adjust the indicator using
Output frequency
60Hz
calibration parameter C0.
(Hz)
Gain Pr.126
Bias
C5
(Pr.904)
0 20 100%
0 4 Frequency setting signal 20mA
C6 (Pr.904) C7 (Pr.905)
REMARKS
As other adjustment methods of frequency setting voltage gain, there are methods to adjust with a voltage applied to across
terminals 4-5 and adjust at any point without a voltage applied.
(Refer to Instruction Manual (applied) for the setting method of calibration parameter C7.)
84
Parameter List
3.6 Parameter List

3.6.1 List of parameters classified by purpose of use
Set the parameters according to the operating conditions. The following list indicates purpose of use and
corresponding parameters.
Purpose of Use Parameter Number
Control mode Change the control method Pr. 80, Pr. 81, Pr. 451, Pr. 800
Pr. 22, Pr. 803, Pr. 810 to Pr. 817,
Torque limit level setting for speed control
Pr. 858, Pr. 868, Pr. 874
To perform high accuracy/fast response operation (gain
Pr. 818 to Pr. 821, Pr. 830, Pr. 831,
adjustment of real sensorless vector control and vector
Speed control by real Pr. 880
control)
sensorless vector control and
vector control Speed feed forward control, model adaptive speed control Pr. 828, Pr. 877 to Pr. 881
Torque bias function Pr. 840 to Pr. 848
Prevent the motor from overrunning Pr. 285, Pr. 853, Pr. 873
Notch filter Pr. 862, Pr. 863
Torque control by real Torque command Pr. 803 to Pr. 806

sensorless vector control and Speed limit Pr. 807 to Pr.809
vector control Gain adjustment for torque control Pr. 824, Pr. 825, Pr. 834, Pr. 835
Conditional position feed function by contact input Pr. 419, Pr. 464 to Pr. 494
Position control by pulse train input of the inverter Pr. 419, Pr. 428 to Pr. 430
Position control by vector
Setting the electronic gear Pr. 420, Pr. 421, Pr. 424
control
Setting of positioning adjustment parameter Pr. 426, Pr. 427
Gain adjustment of position control Pr. 422, Pr. 423, Pr. 425
Manual torque boost Pr. 0, Pr. 46, Pr. 112
Pr. 80, Pr. 81, Pr. 89, Pr. 453, Pr. 454,
Advanced magnetic flux vector control
Pr. 569
Real sensorless vector control Pr. 80, Pr. 81, Pr. 451, Pr. 800
Slip compensation Pr. 245 to Pr. 247
Adjust the output torque of
the motor (current) Pr. 22, Pr. 23, Pr. 48, Pr. 49, Pr. 66,
Pr. 114, Pr. 115, Pr. 148, Pr. 149,
Stall prevention operation
Pr. 154, Pr. 156, Pr. 157, Pr. 858,
Pr. 868
Pr. 22, Pr. 803, Pr. 810, Pr. 812 to
Torque limit
Pr. 817, Pr. 858, Pr. 868, Pr. 874
Maximum/minimum frequency Pr. 1, Pr. 2, Pr. 18
Limit the output frequency Avoid mechanical resonance points (frequency jump) Pr. 31 to Pr. 36
Speed limit Pr. 807 to Pr. 809
Base frequency, voltage Pr. 3, Pr. 19, Pr. 47, Pr. 113
Set V/F pattern V/F pattern matching applications Pr. 14 3
Adjustable 5 points V/F Pr. 71, Pr. 100 to Pr. 109
Pr. 4 to Pr. 6, Pr. 24 to Pr. 27,
Multi-speed setting operation
DRIVE THE MOTOR
Pr. 232 to Pr. 239

Frequency setting with Jog operation Pr. 15, Pr. 16
terminals (contact input)
Input compensation of multi-speed and remote setting Pr. 28
Remote setting function Pr. 59
85
Parameter List

Pr. 7, Pr. 8, Pr. 20, Pr. 21, Pr. 44,
Acceleration/deceleration time setting
Pr. 45, Pr. 110, Pr. 111
Starting frequency Pr. 13, Pr. 571
Pr. 29, Pr. 140 to Pr. 143, Pr.380 to
Acceleration/deceleration Acceleration/deceleration pattern and backlash measures
Pr. 383, Pr. 516 to Pr. 519
time/pattern adjustment
Set a shortest and optimum acceleration/deceleration time
automatically. Pr. 61 to Pr. 64, Pr. 292, Pr. 293
(Automatic acceleration/deceleration)
Regeneration avoidance functions at deceleration Pr. 882 to Pr. 886, Pr. 665
Motor protection from overheat (electronic thermal relay
Pr. 9, Pr. 51
function)
Use the constant torque motor (applied motor) Pr. 71, Pr. 450
Selection and protection of a Pr. 82 to Pr. 84, Pr. 90 to Pr. 94,
motor Offline auto tuning Pr. 96, Pr. 455 to Pr. 463, Pr. 684,
Pr. 859, Pr. 860
Online auto tuning Pr. 95, Pr. 574
Easy gain tuning Pr. 818, Pr. 819
DC injection brake Pr. 10 to Pr. 12, Pr. 850
Selection of regeneration unit and DC current feeding Pr. 30, Pr. 70
Motor brake and stop Selection of motor stopping method Pr. 250
operation Decelerate the motor to a stop at instantaneous power failure Pr. 261 to Pr. 266, Pr. 294
Stop-on-contact control Pr. 6, Pr. 270, Pr. 275, Pr. 276
Brake sequence function Pr. 278 to Pr. 285, Pr. 292
Function assignment of input terminal Pr. 178 to Pr. 189
Start signal selection Pr. 250
Logic selection of output stop signal (MRS) Pr. 17
Selection of action conditions of the second (third) function signal
Pr. 155
(RT(X9))
Function assignment of
external terminal and control Terminal assignment of output terminal Pr. 190 to Pr. 196
Detection of output frequency (SU, FU, FU2, FU3, FB, Pr. 41 to Pr. 43, Pr. 50, Pr. 116,
FB2, FB3, LS signal) Pr. 865
Detection of output current (Y12 signal)
Pr. 150 to Pr. 153, Pr. 166, Pr. 167
Detection of zero current (Y13 signal)
Remote output function (REM signal) Pr. 495 to Pr. 497
Speed display and speed setting Pr. 37, Pr. 144
Change of DU/PU monitor descriptions Pr. 52, Pr. 170, Pr. 171, Pr. 563,
Cumulative monitor clear Pr. 564, Pr. 891
Monitor display and monitor
Pr. 54 to Pr. 56, Pr. 158, Pr. 866,
output signal Change of the monitor output from terminal FM and AM
Pr. 867
Adjustment of terminal FM and AM (calibration) C0 (Pr. 900), C1 (Pr. 901)
Energy saving monitor Pr. 891 to Pr. 899
Detection of output frequency (SU, FU, FU2, FU3, FB, Pr. 41 to Pr. 43, Pr. 50, Pr. 116,
Detection of output FB2, FB3, LS signal) Pr. 865
frequency, current and Detection of output current (Y12 signal)
Pr. 150 to Pr. 153, Pr. 166, Pr. 167
torque Detection of zero current (Y13 signal)
Torque detection (TU signal) Pr. 864
Operation selection at power Restart operation after instantaneous power failure/Flying Pr. 57, Pr. 58, Pr. 162 to Pr. 165,
failure and instantaneous start Pr. 299, Pr. 611
power failure Decelerate the motor to a stop at instantaneous power failure Pr. 261 to Pr. 266, Pr. 294
Retry function at alarm occurrence Pr. 65, Pr. 67 to Pr. 69
Output function of alarm code Pr. 76
Operation setting at alarm
Input/output phase failure protection selection Pr. 251, Pr. 872
occurrence
Fault definition Pr. 875
Regeneration avoidance function Pr. 882 to Pr. 886, Pr. 665
86
Parameter List

Energy saving control selection Pr. 60
Energy saving operation
How much energy can be saved (energy saving monitor) Pr. 891 to Pr. 899
Reduction of the motor noise Carrier frequency and SoftPWM selection Pr. 72, Pr. 240
Measures against noise and Pr. 74, Pr. 822, Pr. 826, Pr. 832,
leakage currents Noise elimination at the analog input
Pr. 836, Pr. 849
Analog input selection Pr. 73, Pr. 267
Override function Pr. 73, Pr. 252, Pr. 253
Pr. 74, Pr. 822, Pr. 826, Pr. 832,
Noise elimination at the analog input
Frequency setting by analog Pr. 836, Pr. 849
input Change of analog input frequency,
Pr. 125, Pr. 126, Pr. 241,
adjustment of voltage, current input and frequency
C2 to C7 (Pr. 902 to Pr. 905)
(calibration)
Compensation at the analog input Pr. 242, Pr. 243
Reset selection, disconnected PU detection Pr. 75
Prevention of parameter rewrite Pr. 77
Misoperation prevention and
Prevention of reverse rotation of the motor Pr. 78
parameter setting restriction
Display necessary parameters only. (user group) Pr. 160, Pr. 172 to Pr. 174
Control of parameter write by communication Pr. 342
Operation mode selection Pr. 79
Operation mode when power is on Pr. 79, Pr. 340
Selection of operation mode Operation command source and speed command source
Pr. 338, Pr. 339
and operation location during communication operation
Selection of the NET mode operation control source Pr. 550
Selection of the PU mode operation control source Pr. 551
Pr. 117 to Pr. 124, Pr. 331 to Pr. 337,
RS-485 communication initial setting
Pr. 341
Control of parameter write by communication Pr. 342
ModbusRTU communication specifications Pr. 343
Communication operation
Operation command source and speed command source
and setting Pr. 338, Pr. 339
during communication operation
Use setup software (USB communication) Pr. 547, Pr. 548
Selection of the NET mode operation control source Pr. 550
ModbusRTU protocol (communication protocol selection) Pr. 549
PID control Pr. 127 to Pr. 134, Pr. 575 to Pr. 577
Switch between the inverter operation and commercial
Pr. 135 to Pr. 139, Pr. 159
power-supply operation to use
Special operation and
Operate at a high speed when a load is light.
frequency control Pr. 4, Pr. 5, Pr. 270 to Pr. 274
(load torque high speed frequency control)
Droop control Pr. 286 to Pr. 288
Frequency control by pulse train input Pr. 291, Pr. 384 to Pr. 386 3
Free parameter Pr. 888, Pr. 889
Increase cooling fan life Pr. 244
DRIVE THE MOTOR
Useful functions
To determine the maintenance time of parts. Pr. 255 to Pr. 259, Pr. 503, Pr. 504
How much energy can be saved (energy saving monitor) Pr. 60, Pr. 891 to Pr. 899
Parameter unit language switchover Pr. 145
Setting from the parameter Operation selection of the operation panel Pr. 161
unit and operation panel Buzzer control of the operation panel Pr. 990
Contrast adjustment of the parameter unit Pr. 991
87
Parameter List
3.6.2 Parameter list

· indicates simple mode parameters.
· The abbreviations in the explanations below indicate:
V/F ...V/F control
Magnetic flux ...advanced magnetic flux vector control
Sensorless ...real sensorless vector control
Vector ...vector control.
(Parameters without any indication are valid for all control)
· "{" indicates enabled and "×" indicates disabled of "parameter copy", "parameter clear", and "all parameter clear".
Parameter Param Param
All
Function
param
eter eter
Incre Initial eter
parameters
copy clear
Name Range Description
Related
clear
ments Value {: enabled
× : disabled
Set the output voltage at 0Hz as %.
* The initial value differs according to the
6/4/3/2/
0 Torque boost 0.1% 0 to 30% inverter capacity. (0.4K, 0.75K / 1.5K to { { {
Manual torque boost
1% * 3.7K / 5.5K, 7.5K / 11K to 55K / 75K or

more )
V/F
Set the torque boost when the RT signal is

Second torque 0 to 30%
46 0.1% 9999 on. { { {
boost
9999 Without second torque boost
Set the torque boost when the X9 signal is
0 to 30%
112 Third torque boost 0.1% 9999 on. { { {
9999 Without third torque boost
Set the upper limit of the output frequency.
Maximum 120/

Maximum/minimum
1 0.01Hz 0 to 120Hz * The initial value differs according to the { { {

frequency 60Hz*
inverter capacity. (55K or less/75K or more)
frequency
2 Minimum frequency 0.01Hz

V/F
0Hz 0 to 120Hz Set the lower limit of the output frequency. { { {

High speed Set when performing the operation at
120/ 120Hz or more.
18 maximum 0.01Hz 120 to 400Hz { { {
60Hz* * The initial value differs according to the
frequency inverter capacity. (55K or less/75k or more)
Set the frequency when the motor rated
3 Base frequency 0.01Hz 60Hz 0 to 400Hz
torque is generated. (50Hz/60Hz)
{ { {
Base frequency, voltage
0 to 1000V Set the base voltage.

Base frequency
19 0.1V 9999 8888 95% of power supply voltage { { {
voltage
9999 Same as power supply voltage
Set the base frequency when the RT signal
Second V/F (base 0 to 400Hz
47 0.01Hz 9999 is on. { { {
frequency)
9999 Second V/F is invalid
Set the base frequency when the X9 signal
Third V/F (base 0 to 400Hz
113 0.01Hz 9999 is ON. { { {
frequency)
9999 Third V/F is invalid
Multi-speed setting
4 (high speed)
0.01Hz 60Hz 0 to 400Hz Set frequency when the RH signal is on. { { {
Multi-speed setting operation
Multi-speed setting
5 (middle speed)
0.01Hz 30Hz 0 to 400Hz Set frequency when the RM signal is on. { { {
Multi-speed setting
6 (low speed)
0.01Hz 10Hz 0 to 400Hz Set frequency when the RL signal is on. { { {
24 Multi-speed setting
0 to 400Hz,
to (4 speed to 7 0.01Hz 9999 Frequency from 4 speed to 15 speed can { { {
9999
27 speed) be set according to the combination of the
232 Multi-speed setting RH, RM, RL and REX signals.
0 to 400Hz, 9999: not selected
to (8 speed to 15 0.01Hz 9999 { { {
9999
239 speed)
88
Parameter List

All
Function
param
eter eter
Incre Initial eter
parameters
copy clear
Related
clear
Parameter List
× : disabled
Set the motor acceleration time.
0.1/ 0 to 3600/ * The initial value differs according to the
7 Acceleration time
0.01s
5/15s *
360s inverter capacity. (7.5K or less/11K or
{ { {
more)
Set the motor deceleration time.
0.1/ 0 to 3600/ * The initial value differs according to the
8 Deceleration time
0.01s
10/30s *
360s inverter capacity. (7.5K or less/11K or
{ { {
more)
Set the frequency referenced as
Acceleration/
acceleration/deceleration time. Set the
Acceleration/deceleration time setting
20 deceleration 0.01Hz 60Hz 1 to 400Hz { { {

frequency change time from stop to Pr. 20
reference frequency for acceleration/deceleration time.
The increments
Increments: 0.1s
0 and setting range
Acceleration/ Range: 0 to 3600s
of acceleration/
21 deceleration time 1 0 { { {
deceleration time
increments 1
Increments: 0.01s
setting can be
Range: 0 to 360s
changed.
Second
0.1/ 0 to 3600/ Set the acceleration/deceleration time
44 acceleration/ 5s { { {
0.01s 360s when the RT signal is on.
deceleration time
0 to 3600/ Set the deceleration time when the RT signal
Second 0.1/
45 9999 360s is on. { { {
deceleration time 0.01s
9999 Acceleration time = deceleration time
0 to 3600/ Set the acceleration/deceleration time
Third acceleration/ 0.1/
110 9999 360s when the X9 signal is on. { { {
deceleration time 0.01Hz
9999 Function invalid
0 to 3600/ Set the deceleration time when the X9
Third deceleration 0.1/ 360s signal is on.
111 9999 { { {
time 0.01Hz
9999 Acceleration time = deceleration time
Rated Set the rated motor current.
Electronic thermal 0.01/ inverter 0 to 500/ * The increments and setting range differ
9 { { {
(electronic thermal
O/L relay 0.1A * output 0 to 3600A * according to the inverter capacity. (55K or
Motor protection
relay function)
from overheat
current less/75k or more)

Made valid when the RT signal is on.
Set the rated motor current.
0 to 500/
Second electronic 0.01/ * The increments and setting range differ
51 9999 0 to 3600A * { { {
thermal O/L relay 0.1A * according to the inverter capacity. (55K or
less/75k or more)
9999 Second electronic thermal O/L relay invalid
Set the operation frequency of the DC
injection brake.
0 to 120Hz * The initial value changes from 3Hz to
DC injection brake 0.5Hz when a control mode other than
10 0.01Hz 3/0.5Hz*
vector is changed to vector control.
{ { {
operation frequency
Operate when the output frequency
9999 becomes less than or equal to Pr. 13
Starting frequency.
3
0 DC injection brake disabled
DC injection brake
DC injection brake Set the operation time of the DC injection

11 0.1s 0.5s 0.1 to 10s { { {
DRIVE THE MOTOR
operation time brake.

8888 Operated while the X13 signal is on.
0 DC injection brake disabled
DC injection brake Set the DC injection brake voltage (torque).
12 0.1% 4/2/1% * * The initial value differs according to the { { {
operation voltage 0.1 to 30%
inverter capacity. (7.5K or less/11K to 55K/
75K or more)
Pre-excitation 0 Zero speed control Setting can be made
802 1 0 { { {
selection 1 Servo lock under vector control.
0 DC injection brake
Brake operation
850 1 0 Zero speed control (under real sensorless { { {
selection 1
vector control)
89
Parameter List

All
Function
param
eter eter
parameters Incre Initial eter
copy clear
Related
clear
× : disabled
13 Starting frequency 0.01Hz 0.5Hz 0 to 60Hz Starting frequency can be set. { { {
Starting frequency
Set the holding time of Pr. 13 Starting

0.0 to 10.0s
frequency.
Holding time at a
571 0.1s 9999 { { {
start
9999 Holding function at a start is invalid
0 For constant torque load

1 For variable-torque load
Boost for reverse
2
For constant torque rotation 0%
lift Boost for forword
V/F pattern matching
3
rotation 0%
applications
RT signal ON ....For constant-torque load

Load pattern
V/F
(Same as in setting 0)
14 1 0 { { {
selection 4 RT signal OFF ...For constant-torque lift
Boost for reverse rotation 0%
RT signal ON ....For constant-torque load
5 RT signal OFF ...For constant-torque lift
Boost for forward rotation 0%
15 Jog frequency 0.01Hz 5Hz 0 to 400Hz Set the frequency for jog operation. { { {
Set the acceleration/deceleration time for
Jog operation
jog operation. Set the time taken to reach

the frequency set in Pr. 20 Acceleration/
Jog acceleration/ 0.1/ 0 to 3600/ deceleration reference frequency for
16 0.5s { { {
deceleration time 0.01s 360s acceleration/deceleration time. (Initial
value is 60Hz)
In addition, acceleration/deceleration time
can not be set separately.
Logic selection
of output stop
signal (MRS)
0 Open input always
17 MRS input selection 1 0 { { {

Normally closed input (NC contact input
2
specifications)
18 Refer to Pr. 1 and Pr. 2.

— 19 Refer to Pr. 3.
20, 21 Refer to Pr. 7 and Pr. 8.
90
Parameter List

All
Function
param
eter eter
Incre Initial eter
parameters
copy clear
Related
clear
Parameter List
× : disabled
Stall prevention operation selection
0
becomes invalid.
Function as stall prevention operation
Stall prevention under V/F control and advanced magnetic
22 0.1% 150% { { {
operation level flux vector control.
0.1 to 400%
Set the current value at which stall
prevention operation is started.
Refer to page 92 for torque limit level.
Stall prevention The stall operation level can be reduced
operation level 0 to 200% when operating at a high speed above the
23 compensation 0.1% 9999 rated frequency. { { {
factor at double 9999 Constant according to Pr. 22
speed
Second stall 0 Second stall prevention operation invalid
48 prevention 0.1% 150% The stall prevention operation level can be { { {
0.1 to 220%
operation current set.
0 Second stall prevention operation invalid
Second stall
0.01 to Set the frequency at which stall prevention
49 prevention 0.01Hz 0Hz { { {
400Hz operation of Pr. 48 is started.
operation frequency
9999 Pr.48 is valid when the RT signal is on.
Stall prevention
Magnetic flux
Stall prevention operation
Set the frequency at which the stall

66 operation reduction 0.01Hz 60Hz 0 to 400Hz { { {
operation level is started to reduce.
starting frequency
Third stall 0 Third stall prevention operation invalid
114 prevention 0.1% 150% 0.1 to The stall prevention operation level can be { { {
operation current 220% set.
V/F
Thrid stall 0 Third stall prevention operation invalid

115 prevention 0.01Hz 0 0.01 to Set the frequency at which stall prevention { { {
operation frequency 400Hz operation of Pr. 114 is started.
Stall prevention When "4" is set in Pr. 868 (Pr. 858), stall
148 0.1% 150% 0 to 220% { { {
level at 0V input prevention operation level can be changed
Stall prevention by the analog signal input to terminal 1
149 0.1% 200% 0 to 220% (terminal 4). { { {
level at 10V input
With voltage You can select
Voltage reduction 0
reduction whether to use
selection during output voltage
154 1 1 { { {
stall prevention Without voltage reduction during
1
operation reduction stall prevention
operation or not.
Pr. 156 allows you to select whether to use
Stall prevention 0 to 31,
156 1 0 stall prevention or not according to the { { {
operation selection 100, 101
acceleration/deceleration status.
Set the output start time of the OL signal
OL signal output 0 to 25s
157 0.1s 0s output when stall prevention is activated. { { {
timer
9999 Without the OL signal output 3
Terminal 4 function
858
assignment
Refer to page 125.
DRIVE THE MOTOR
Terminal 1 function
868
assignment
91
Parameter List

All
Function
param
eter eter
copy clear
Related
clear
× : disabled
This functions as torque limit level under
real sensorless vector control.
* For the 3.7K or less, the initial value changes
150/ from 150% to 200% when V/F control or
22 Torque limit level 0.1%
200% *
0 to 400%
advanced magnetic flux vector is changed to
{ { {
real sensorless vector control or vector control.
Refer to page 91 for stall prevention
operation level.
Constant power 0
Constant output limit (torque current limit
range torque and control)
803 1 0 { { {
characteristic Constant torque limit (torque limit and
1
selection control)
Internal torque limit
0 Parameter-set torque limit operation is
Torque limit input performed.
810 1 0 { { {
method selection External torque limit
1 Torque limit based on the analog input
from terminal 1 and 4.
Running speed Torque limit
increments increments
Set resolution 0 1r/min
811 1 0 0.1% increments { { {
Vector
switchover 1 0.1r/min
Torque limit level
10 1r/min
0.01% increments
11 0.1r/min
Set the torque limit level for forward
Sensorless
Torque limit level 0 to 400%

812 0.1% 9999 rotation regeneration. { { {
(regeneration)
9999 Pr. 22 value is used for limit.
Set the torque limit level for reverse
813 0.1% 9999 rotation driving. { { {
(3rd quadrant)
Set the torque limit level for reverse
814 0.1% 9999 rotation regeneration. { { {
(4th quadrant)
When the torque limit selection (TL) signal
0 to 400% is on, the Pr. 815 value is a torque limit
815 Torque limit level 2 0.1% 9999 { { {
value regardless of Pr. 810.
9999 Depending on Pr. 22 setting
Set the torque limit value during
816 0.1% 9999 acceleration. { { {
during acceleration
9999 Same torque limit as at constant speed
Set the torque limit value during
817 0.1% 9999 deceleration. { { {
during deceleration
9999 Same torque limit as at constant speed
This function can make an alarm stop if the
torque limit is activated to stall the motor.
874 OLT level setting 0.1% 150% 0 to 200% { { {
Set the output torque at which an alarm
stop is made in Pr. 874 .
— 24 to 27 Refer to Pr. 4 to Pr. 6.
0 Without compensation
Input compensation
of multi-speed and
remote setting
Multi-speed input
28 compensation 1 0 { { {
1 With compensation
selection
92
Parameter List

All
Function
param
eter eter
Incre Initial eter
parameters
copy clear
Related
clear
Parameter List
× : disabled
0 Linear acceleration/ deceleration
1 S-pattern acceleration/deceleration A
29 Acceleration/ 2 S-pattern acceleration/deceleration B
deceleration pattern 1 0 3 Backlash measures { { {
selection 4 S-pattern acceleration/deceleration C
5 S-pattern acceleration/deceleration D
Backlash
140 acceleration 0.01Hz 1Hz 0 to 400Hz { { {
stopping frequency
Backlash
141 acceleration 0.1s 0.5s 0 to 360s { { {
Set the stopping frequency and time for
stopping time
backlash measures.
Backlash Valid when Pr. 29 = "3"
142 deceleration 0.01Hz 1Hz 0 to 400Hz { { {
pattern and backlash measures
stopping frequency
Acceleration/deceleration
Backlash
143 deceleration 0.1s 0.5s 0 to 360s { { {
stopping time
Acceleration S- Valid when S-pattern acceleration/
380 1% 0% 0 to 50%
deceleration C (Pr. 29 = 4) is set.
{ { {
pattern 1
Deceleration S- Set the time taken for S-pattern from
381 1% 0% 0 to 50% starting of acceleration/deceleration to { { {
pattern 1
linear acceleration as % to the
Acceleration S- acceleration/deceleration time (Pr. 7, Pr. 8,
382 1% 0% 0 to 50% { { {
pattern 2 etc.)
Deceleration S- An acceleration/deceleration pattern can
383 1% 0% 0 to 50% { { {
pattern 2 be changed with the X20 signal.
S-pattern time at a
516 0.1s 0.1s 0.1 to 2.5s { { {
start of acceleration
S-pattern time at a
517 completion of 0.1s 0.1s 0.1 to 2.5s Valid when S-pattern acceleration/ { { {
deceleration D (Pr. 29 = 5) is set.
acceleration
Set the time taken for S-pattern
S-pattern time at a
518 0.1s 0.1s 0.1 to 2.5s acceleration/deceleration (S-pattern { { {
start of deceleraiton operation).
S-pattern time at a
519 completion of 0.1s 0.1s 0.1 to 2.5s { { {
deceleraiton
0 Built-in brake, brake unit (FR-BU, BU)
High-duty brake resistor (FR-ABR),
1 Brake unit (MT-BU5),
Power regeneration converter (MT-RC)
High power factor converter (FR-HC, MT-
HC),
2
Power regeneration common converter
(FR-CV) 3
Selection of regeneration unit
Built-in brake unit,

Regenerative 10 brake unit (FR-BU,
30 1 0 DC feeding mode 1 { { {
DRIVE THE MOTOR
function selection BU)

(operated by DC
High-duty brake
feeding only)
11 resistor (FR-ABR),
brake unit (MT-BU5)
Built-in brake unit,
20 brake unit (FR-BU, DC feeding mode 2
BU) (operated by
High-duty brake switching between
21 resistor (FR-ABR), AC and DC)
brake unit (MT-BU5)
You can set the brake duty when a brake
unit or power regeneration converter is
Special regenerative 0 to 30/
70 0.1% 0% used. { { {
brake duty 0 to 10%*
* Range differ according to the inverter
capacity. (55K or less/75K or more)
93
Parameter List

All
Function
param
eter eter
copy clear
Related
clear
× : disabled
0 to 400Hz,
31 Frequency jump 1A 0.01Hz 9999
9999
{ { {
0 to 400Hz,
32 Frequency jump 1B 0.01Hz 9999
9999
{ { {
Avoid mechanical
resonance points
(frequency jump)
0 to 400Hz,
9999
1A to 1B, 2A to 2B, 3A to 3B is frequency { { {
jumps
0 to 400Hz,
9999
9999: Function invalid { { {
0 to 400Hz,
9999
{ { {
0 to 400Hz,
9999
{ { {
0 Frequency display, setting
37 Speed display 1 0 Set the machine speed for Pr.505 Set { { {
1 to 9998
frequency.
0, 2, 4, 6,
Speed setting 8, 10, 102, Set the number of motor poles when
144 1 4 { { {
Speed display and
switchover 104, 106, displaying the motor speed.

speed setting
108, 110
Speed setting Set the frequency that will be the basis of
505 0.01Hz 60Hz 1 to 120Hz { { {
reference machine speed display.
Running speed Torque limit
increments increments
Easy gain tuning
0 1r/min
811 response level 1 0 0.1% increments { { {
1 0.1r/min
setting
10 1r/min
0.01% increments
11 0.1r/min
Up-to-frequency
Detection of output fequecny and motor speed
(SU, FU, FU2, FU3, FB, FB2, FB3, LS signal)
41 0.1% 10% 0 to 100% Set the level where the SU signal turns on. { { {
sensitivity
Output frequency Set the frequency where the FU (FB)
42 0.01Hz 6Hz 0 to 400Hz
signal turns on.
{ { {
detection
Output frequency 0 to 400Hz
Set the frequency where the FU (FB)
43 detection for 0.01Hz 9999 signal turns on in reverse rotation. { { {
reverse rotation 9999 Same as Pr. 42 setting
Second output Set the frequency where the FU2 (FB2)
50 0.01Hz 30Hz 0 to 400Hz
signal turns on.
{ { {
frequency detection
Third output Set the frequency where the FU3 (FB3)
116 0.01Hz 60Hz 0 to 400Hz
signal turns on.
{ { {
frequency detection
Low speed Set the frequency where the LS signal
865 0.01Hz 1.5Hz 0 to 400Hz
turns on.
{ { {
detection

46 Refer to Pr. 0.
47 Refer to Pr. 3.
—
50 Refer to Pr. 41 to Pr. 43.
51 Refer to Pr. 9.
94
Parameter List

All
Function
param
eter eter
Incre Initial eter
parameters
copy clear
Related
clear
Parameter List
× : disabled
0, 5 to 14, Select monitor to be displayed on the
17 to 20, operation panel and parameter unit and
DU/PU main display monitor to be output to the terminal FM and
52 1 0 22 to 25, { { {
data selection 32 to 35,
AM.
0 : Output frequency (Pr. 52)
50 to 57,100 1 : Output frequency (Pr. 54, Pr. 158)
1 to 3, 5 to 2 : Output current (Pr. 54, Pr. 158)
14, 17, 18, 3 : Output voltage (Pr. 54, Pr. 158)
FM terminal 5 : Frequency setting
54 1 1 21, 24, { { {
function selection 32 to 34,
6 : Running speed
7 : Motor torque
50, 52, 53 8 : Converter output voltage
9 : Regenerative brake duty
10 : Electronic thermal relay function load
factor
11 : Output current peak value
12 : Converter output voltage peak value
13 : Input power
14 : Output power
17 : Load meter
18 : Motor excitation current
19 : Position pulse* (Pr. 52)
20 : Cumulative energization time (Pr. 52)
21 : Reference voltage output (Pr. 54, Pr. 158)
22 : Orientation status* (Pr. 52)
23 : Actual operation time (Pr. 52)
1 to 3, 5 to 24 : Motor load factor
14, 17, 18, 25 : Cumulative power (Pr. 52)
AM terminal
158 1 1 21, 24, 32 to 32 : Torque command { { {
Change of DU/PU monitor descriptions
function selection 34, 50, 52, 33 : Torque current command

53 34 : Motor output
35 : Feedback pulse* (Pr. 52)
Cumulative monitor clear
50 : Power saving effect

51 : Cumulative saving power (Pr. 52)
52 : PID set point
53 : PID measured value
54 : PID deviation (Pr. 52)
55 : Input/output terminal status (Pr. 52)
56 : Option input terminal status (Pr. 52)
57 : Option output terminal status (Pr. 52)
100 : Set frequency is displayed during a
stop and output frequency is displayed
during operation (Pr. 52)
* Available only when the FR-A7AP is
mounted.
0 Set "0" to clear the watt-hour meter monitor.
Watt-hour meter Set the maximum value when monitoring
10
170 1 9999 from communication to 0 to 9999kWh. { × {
clear
Set the maximum value when monitoring
9999
from communication to 0 to 65535kWh.
Operation hour Set "0" in the parameter to clear the watt-
171 1 9999 0, 9999 hour monitor. × × ×
meter clear Setting "9999" has no effect.
0 Displays the monitor as integral value.
Monitor decimal
268
digits selection
1 9999 1 Displays the monitor in increments of 0.1. { { { 3
9999 No fixed decimal position
Energization time (0 to The numbers of cumulative energization time
563 1 0 monitor exceeded 65535h is displayed. × × ×
carrying-over times 65535)
DRIVE THE MOTOR
Reading only
Operating time (0 to The numbers of operation time monitor
564 1 0 exceeded 65535h is displayed. × × ×
carrying-over times 65535) Reading only
867 AM output filter 0.01s 0.01s 0 to 5s Set the output filter of terminal AM. { { {
Set the number of times to shift the
Cumulative power 0 to 4 cumulative power monitor digit.
Clamp the monitor value at maximum.
891 monitor digit shifted 1 9999 { { {
No shift
times 9999 Clear the monitor value when it exceeds
the maximum value.
95
Parameter List

All
Function
param
eter eter
copy clear
Related
clear
× : disabled
Frequency Set the full-scale value to output the output
55 { { {
Change of the monitor
0.01Hz 60Hz 0 to 400Hz frequency monitor value to terminal FM

output from terminal
monitoring reference and AM.

FM and AM
Set the full-scale value to output the output

Rated
Current monitoring current monitor value to terminal FM and AM.
0.01/ inverter 0 to 500/
56 output
* The increments and setting range differ { { {
reference 0.1A * 0 to 3600A * according to the inverter capacity. (55K or
current
less/75k or more)
Torque monitoring Set the full-scale value to output the torque
866 0.1% 150% 0 to 400% { { {
reference monitor value to terminal FM and AM.
The coasting time is as follows:
1.5K or less ................................... 0.5s,
0 2.2K to 7.5K .................................. 1.0s,
11K to 55K .................................... 3.0s,
Restart coasting 75K or more .................................. 5.0s
57 0.1s 9999 { { {
time Set the waiting time for inverter-triggered
0.1 to 5s/ restart after an instantaneous power failure.
0.1 to 30s * * The setting range differs according to the
inverter capacity (55K or less/75k or more)
9999 No restart
58 Restart cushion time 0.1s 1s 0 to 60s Set a voltage starting time at restart. { { {
0 With frequency search
Without frequency search (Reduced
Automatic restart 1
voltage system)
after instantaneous 2 Encoder detection frequency
162 1 0 { { {
power failure 10 Frequency search at every start
selection
after instantaneous
11 Reduced voltage system at every start

Restart operation
power failure
12 Encoder detection frequency at every start

First cushion time
163 0.1s 0s 0 to 20s Set a voltage starting time at restart. { { {
for restart
Consider according to the magnitude of
First cushion load (inertia moment/torque).
164 0.1% 0% 0 to 100% { { {
voltage for restart
Stall prevention Consider the rated inverter current as
165 operation level for 0.1% 150% 0 to 220% 100% and set the stall prevention { { {
restart operation level during restart operation.
0 Without rotation direction detection
Rotation direction 1 With rotation direction detection
299 detection selection 1 0 When Pr. 78 = "0", the rotation direction is { { {
at restarting detected.
9999
When Pr. 78 = "1", "2", the rotation direction
is not detected.
Set the acceleration
0 to 3600s time to reach the set * The initial value
frequency at a restart. differs according
Acceleration time at
611 0.1s 5/15s * Acceleration time for to the inverter { { {
a restart restart is the normal capacity. (55K or
9999
acceleration time less/75k or more)
(e.g. Pr. 7 ).
RH, RM, RL signal Frequency setting
Remote setting function
function storage function

0 Multi-speed setting 
Remote function 1 Remote setting Yes
59 1 0 2 Remote setting No { { {
selection
No (Turning STF/STR
3 Remote setting off clears remotely-
set frequency.)
Magnetic flux
0 Normal operation mode

control selection
Energy saving
Energy saving
60 1 0 { { {
control selection
V/F
4 Energy saving operation mode
96
Parameter List

All
Function
param
eter eter
Incre Initial eter
parameters
copy clear
Related
clear
Parameter List
× : disabled
Setting value (rated motor current) is referenced
0 to 500/ * The increments and setting range differ
0.01/
61 Reference current
0.1A*
9999 0 to 3600A* according to the inverter capacity. (55K or { { {
less/75k or more)
9999 Rated inverter current is referenced
Setting value is a limit Shortest acceleration/
value deceleration mode
0 to 220% Optimum
Setting value is an
acceleration/
optimum value
Reference value at deceleration mode
62 0.1% 9999 { { {
acceleration Shortest acceleration/
150% is a limit value
deceleration mode
9999 Optimum
100% is an optimum
acceleration/
value
deceleration mode
Setting value is a limit Shortest acceleration/
value deceleration mode
Automatic acceleration/deceleration
0 to 220% Optimum
Setting value is an
acceleration/
optimum value
Reference value at deceleration mode
63 0.1% 9999 { { {
deceleration Shortest acceleration/
150% is a limit value
deceleration mode
9999 Optimum
100% is an optimum
acceleration/
value
deceleration mode
Starting frequency 0 to 10Hz 0 to 10Hz are starting frequency
64 0.01Hz 9999 { { {
for elevator mode 9999 2Hz is starting frequency
0 Normal mode
1 Shortest acceleration/ Without brake
11 deceleration mode With brake
Automatic
3 Optimum acceleration/deceleration mode
292 acceleration/ 1 0 { { {
5 Elevator mode 1
deceleration
6 Elevator mode 2
7 Brake sequence mode 1
8 Brake sequence mode 2
Calculate acceleration/deceleration time of
both acceleration and deceleration for the
0
shortest and optimum acceleration/
deceleration mode.
Acceleration/
Calculate only acceleration time for the
293 deceleration 1 0 { { {
1 shortest and optimum acceleration/
separate selection deceleration mode
Calculate only deceleration time for the
2 shortest and optimum acceleration/
deceleration mode
65 Retry selection 1 0 0 to 5 An alarm for retry can be selected. { { {
3
Retry function at alarm occurrence
0 No retry function
Set the number of retries at alarm
1 to 10 occurrence. An alarm output is not provided
DRIVE THE MOTOR
Number of retries at during retry operation.

67 1 0 { { {
alarm occurrence Set the number of retries at alarm
occurrence. (The setting value minus 100 is
101 to 110
the number of retries.) An alarm output is
provided during retry operation.
Set the waiting time from when an inverter
68 Retry waiting time 0.1s 1s 0 to 10s { { {
alarm occurs until a retry is made.
Retry count display Clear the number of restarts succeeded by
69 1 0 0 { { {
erase retry.
— 67 to 69 Refer to Pr. 65.
70 Refer to Pr. 30.
97
Parameter List

All
Function
param
eter eter
copy clear
Related
clear
× : disabled
0 Thermal characteristics of a standard motor
Thermal characteristics of the Mitsubishi
1
constant-torque motor
Thermal characteristic of standard motor
2
Adjustable 5 points V/F
Mitsubishi standard motor (SF-JR 4P
20
1.5kW or less)
Thermal characteristics of the Mitsubishi
30
vector motor SF-V5RU
Thermal characteristic of Mitsubishi high
40
efficiency motor (SF-HR)
Thermal characteristic of Mitsubishi
50
constant-torque motor (SF-HRCA)
3 Standard motor
13 Constant-torque motor
Mitsubishi standard
23 motor (SF-JR 4P
1.5kW or less)
Mitsubishi vector motor
33 Select "offline auto
(SF-V5RU/SF-THY)
tuning setting"
Mitsubishi high
43 efficiency motor (SF-
HR)
53 torque motor (SF-
HRCA)
4 Standard motor
71 Applied motor 1 0 Mitsubishi standard { { {
24 motor (SF-JR 4P 1.5kW
Motor selection
(applied motor)
or less)
Mitsubishi vector motor Auto tuning data
34
(SF-V5RU/SF-THY) can be read,
Mitsubishi high changed, and set.
44 efficiency motor (SF-
HR)
54 torque motor (SF-
HRCA)
5 Standard motor Star connection
Direct input of
15 Constant-torque motor motor constants is
enabled
6 Standard motor Delta connection
Direct input of
16 Constant-torque motor motor constants is
enabled
7 Standard motor Star connection
Motor constants
direct input
+
Offline auto tuning
8 Standard motor Delta connection
Motor constants
direct input
+
Offline auto tuning
0 to 8,
13 to 18,
20, 23, 24, Set when using the second motor.
Second applied
450 1 9999 30, 33, 34, (same specifications as Pr. 71) { { {
motor 40, 43, 44,
50, 53, 54
9999 Second motor is invalid
98
Parameter List

All
Function
param
eter eter
Incre Initial eter
parameters
copy clear
Related
clear
Parameter List
× : disabled
PWM carrier frequency can be changed.
The setting displayed is in [kHz].
Note that 0 indicates 0.7kHz, 15 indicates
14.5kHz, 25 indicates 2.5. (25 is
exclusively for a sine wave filter.)
Carrier frequency
PWM frequency 0 to 15/ The following settings are for real

and SoftPWM
72 1 2 { { {
selection 0 to 6, 25 *
selection
sensorless vector control and vector

control.
0 to 5: 2kHz, 6 to 9: 6kHz,
10 to 13: 10kHz, 14 to 15: 14kHz
* The setting range differs according to the
inverter capacity. (55K or less/75k or more)
0 Soft-PWM invalid
Soft-PWM
240 1 1 When Pr. 72 = "0 to 5" ("0 to 4" for the 75K { { {
operation selection 1
or more), Soft-PWM is valid.
You can select the input specifications of
terminal 2 (0 to 5V, 0 to 10V, 4 to 20mA)
and input specifications of terminal 1 (0 to
±5V, 0 to ±10V). For the 5.5K or more, the
Analog input 0 to 7, input specifications can be selected when
73 1 1 { × {
selection 10 to 17 the voltage/current input switch is off.
Terminal 2 is always used for current input
when the switch is on, the parameter
needs to be set to current input. Override
and reversible operation can be selected.
Terminal 1 added
Analog input selection
Set the ratio of added compensation

242 compensation 0.1% 100% 0 to 100% { { {
amount when terminal 2 is the main speed.
amount (terminal 2)
Terminal 1 added
Set the ratio of added compensation
243 compensation 0.1% 75% 0 to 100% { { {
amount when terminal 4 is the main speed.
amount (terminal 4)
Set the bias side compensation value of
252 Override bias 0.1% 50% 0 to 200% { { {
override function.
Set the gain side compensation value of
253 Override gain 0.1% 150% 0 to 200% { { {
override function.
Terminal 4 input For the 5.5K or
0
4 to 20mA more, the input
Terminal 4 input specifications can
1
Terminal 4 input 0 to 5V be selected when
267 1 0 { × {
selection the voltage/current
Terminal 4 input input switch is off.
2
0 to 10V Set "0" when the
switch is ON.
The primary delay filter time constant for
Input filter time
74 1 1 0 to 8 the analog input can be set. { { {
constant A larger setting results in a larger filter.
Set the time constant of the primary delay 3
Response level of analog input
0 to 5s,
822 Speed setting filter 1 0.001s 9999 filter relative to the external speed { { {
9999
and noise elimination
command (analog input command).

Set the time constant of the primary delay
DRIVE THE MOTOR
0 to 5s,
826 Torque setting filter 1 0.001s 9999 filter relative to the external torque { { {
9999
command (analog input command).
0 to 5s, Second function of Pr. 822 (valid when the
832 Speed setting filter 2 0.001s 9999 { { {
9999 RT terminal is on)
0 to 5s, Second function of Pr. 826 (valid when the
836 Torque setting filter 2 0.001s 9999 { { {
9999 RT terminal is on)
This function provides speed command by
Analog input offset analog input (terminal 2) with offset and
849 0.1% 100% 0 to 200% { { {
adjustment avoids frequency command to be given
due to noise under 0 speed command.
99
Parameter List

All
Function
param
eter eter
copy clear
Related
clear
× : disabled
You can select the reset input acceptance,
disconnected PU
Reset selection,
Reset selection/ disconnected PU (FR-DU07/FR-PU07/FR-

detection
PU04) connector detection function and PU

disconnected PU 0 to 3,
75 1 14 stop function. { × ×
detection/PU stop 14 to 17
For the initial value, reset always enabled,
selection without disconnected PU detection, and
with PU stop function are set.
0 Without alarm code output
Output function
of alarm code
1 With alarm code output

Alarm code output
76 1 0 { { {
selection Alarm code output at alarm occurrence
2
only
0 Write is enabled only during a stop

Prevention of Prevention of
parameter
1 Parameter write is disabled.

rewrite
Parameter write
77 1 0 Parameter write is enabled in any { { {
selection
2 operation mode regardless of operation
status.
0 Both forward and reverse rotations allowed
reverse rotation
of the motor
1 Reverse rotation disallowed

Reverse rotation
78 1 0 { { {
prevention selection
2 Forward rotation disallowed
0 External/PU switchover mode

1 Fixed to PU operation mode
2 Fixed to External operation mode
Operation mode 3 External/PU combined operation mode 1
79 selection
1 0
4 External/PU combined operation mode 2
{ { {
6 Switchover mode
External operation mode (PU operation
Operation mode selection
7
interlock)
0 As set in Pr. 79.
Started in the network operation mode.
When the setting is "2", it will resume the
1, 2 pre-instantaneous power failure operation
mode after an instantaneous power failure
occurs.
Communication
Started in the network operation mode.
340 startup mode 1 0 { { {
Operation mode can be changed between
selection
the PU operation mode and network
operation mode from the operation panel.
10, 12
When the setting is "12", it will resume the
pre-instantaneous power failure operation
mode after an instantaneous power failure
occurs.
100
Parameter List

All
Function
param
eter eter
Incre Initial eter
parameters
copy clear
Related
clear
Parameter List
× : disabled
0.4 to 55/ * The increments and setting range differ
0.01/
80 Motor capacity
0.1kW *
9999 0 to 3600kW * according to the inverter capacity. (55K or { { {
less/75k or more)
9999 V/F control is performed
2, 4, 6, 8, 10Set the number of motor poles.
Number of motor 12, 14, 16, X18 signal-ON:V/F Set 10 + number of
81 1 9999 { { {
poles 18, 20 control motor poles.
Motor speed fluctuation due to load
Speed control gain fluctuation is adjusted during advanced
0 to 200%
89 (magnetic flux 0.1% 9999 magnetic flux vector control. { × {
vector) 100% is a referenced value.
9999 Gain matching with the motor set in Pr.71.
Select the method of controlling the
Second motor 10, 11, 12
second motor. (same as Pr.800)
451 control method 1 9999 { { {
V/F Control (advanced magnetic flux
selection 20, 9999
vector control)
Set the capacity of the second motor.
0.4 to 55/ * The increments and setting range differ
Second motor 0.01/
453 9999 0 to 3600kW * according to the inverter capacity. (55K or { { {
Vector
capacity 0.1kW *
less/75k or more)
Selection of control method

Set the number of poles of the second
Number of second 2, 4, 6, 8, 10
454 1 9999 motor. { { {
Sensorless
motor poles
Second motor speed fluctuation due to
load fluctuation is adjusted during
Second motor 0 to 200%
569 0.1% 9999 advanced magnetic flux vector control. { × {
speed control gain
Magnetic flux
100% is a referenced value.

9999 Gain matching with the motor set in Pr.450.
0 Speed control
1 Torque control
MC signal-ON:torque
2
MC signal-OFF:speed
Vector control
3 Position control (FR-A7AP)
MC signal-ON:position
4
MC signal-OFF:speed
MC signal-ON:torque
5
MC signal-OFF:position
Control method Vector control test operation
800 1 20 { { {
selection 9 Test operation of vector control (speed control)
can be performed without connecting a motor.
10 Speed control
11 Torque control
MC signal-ON : Real sensorless 3
Torque vector control
12
MC signal-OFF :
Speed
DRIVE THE MOTOR
V/F Control (advanced magnetic flux

20
vector control)
101
Parameter List

All
Function
param
eter eter
copy clear
Related
clear
× : disabled
Tuning data
(The value measured by offline auto tuning
0 to 500/ is automatically set.)
Motor excitation 0.01/ 0 to 3600A * * The increments and setting range differ
82 9999 according to the inverter capacity. (55K or { × {
current 0.1A *
less/75k or more)
Use the Mitsubishi motor (SF-JR, SF-
9999
HRCA) constants
200/ Set the rated motor voltage(V).
83 Motor rated voltage 0.1V
400V *
0 to 1000V * The initial values differ according to the { { {
84 Rated motor frequency 0.01Hz 60Hz 10 to 120Hz Set the rated motor frequency (Hz). { { {
Tuning data
0 to 50Ω/ is automatically set.)
0.001Ω/ 0 to 400mΩ * * The increments and setting range differ
90 Motor constant (R1) 9999 according to the inverter capacity. (55K or { × {
0.01mΩ *
less/75k or more)
9999
HRCA) constants
Tuning data
0.001Ω/ 0 to 400mΩ * * The increments and setting range differ
91 Motor constant (R2) 9999 according to the inverter capacity. (55K or { × {
0.01mΩ *
less/75k or more)
9999
HRCA) constants
Tuning data
Vector
0 to 50Ω (0 to (The value measured by offline auto tuning

0.001Ω 1000mH)/ is automatically set.)
(0.1mH) 0 to 3600mΩ * The increments and setting range differ
Offline auto tuning
92 Motor constant (L1) 9999 according to the inverter capacity. (55K or { × {

/0.01mΩ (0 to 400mH) *
(0.01mH) * less/75k or more)

9999
HRCA) constants
Tuning data
0.001Ω 1000mH)/ is automatically set.)
(0.1mH) 0 to 3600mΩ * The increments and setting range differ
93 Motor constant (L2) 9999 according to the inverter capacity. (55K or { × {
/0.01mΩ (0 to 400mH) *
9999
HRCA) constants
Tuning data
0 to 500Ω (The value measured by offline auto tuning
0.01Ω (0 to 100%)/ is automatically set.)
(0.1%)/ 0 to 100Ω * The increments and setting range differ
94 Motor constant (X) 9999 according to the inverter capacity. (55K or { × {
0.01Ω (0 to 100%) *
(0.01%) * less/75k or more)
9999
HRCA) constants
0 Auto tuning is not performed
Auto tuning setting/
96 1 0 1 Tuning performed without motor running { × {
status
101 Tuning performed with motor running
Tuning data of the second motor
Second motor 0.01/ 0 to 3600A * * The increments and setting range differ
455 9999 according to the inverter capacity. (55K or { × {
excitation current 0.1A *
less/75k or more)
9999
HRCA) constants
Set the rated voltage (V) of the second
Rated second 200/ motor.
456 0.1V 0 to 1000V
* The initial values differ according to the
{ { {
motor voltage 400V *
Rated second Set the rated frequency (Hz) of the second
457 0.01Hz 60Hz 10 to 120Hz
motor.
{ { {
motor frequency
102
Parameter List

All
Function
param
eter eter
Incre Initial eter
parameters
copy clear
Related
clear
Parameter List
× : disabled
Second motor 0.001Ω/
458 9999 0 to 400mΩ * * The increments and setting range differ { × {
constant (R1) 0.01mΩ * according to the inverter capacity. (55K or
less/75k or more)
9999 Use the Mitsubishi motor (SF-JR, SF-HRCA) constants
Second motor 0.001Ω/
459 9999 0 to 400mΩ * * The increments and setting range differ { × {
constant (R2) 0.01mΩ * according to the inverter capacity. (55K or
less/75k or more)
0.001Ω
1000mH)/ is automatically set.)
Second motor (0.1mH)/
460 9999 0 to 3600mΩ * The increments and setting range differ { × {
constant (L1) 0.01mΩ
(0 to 400mH) * according to the inverter capacity. (55K or
Vector

0.001Ω
1000mH)/ is automatically set.)
Second motor
Offline auto tuning
(0.1mH)
461 9999 0 to 3600mΩ * The increments and setting range differ { × {
constant (L2) /0.01mΩ
(0 to 400mH) * according to the inverter capacity. (55K or

0 to 500Ω (The value measured by offline auto tuning
0.01Ω
(0 to 100%)/ is automatically set.)
Second motor (0.1%)/
462 9999 0 to 100Ω * The increments and setting range differ { × {
constant (X) 0.01mΩ
(0 to 100%) * according to the inverter capacity. (55K or
(0.01%) * less/75k or more)
Second motor auto Set the tuning mode of the second motor.
463 1 0 0, 1, 101 { × {
tuning setting/status (same as Pr. 96)
Tuning data unit 0 Internal data converter value
684 1 0 { { {
switchover 1 Displayed in "A, Ω, mH, %".
Tuning data
0.01/
859 Torque current 9999 0 to 3600A * * The increments and setting range differ { × {
0.1A * according to the inverter capacity. (55K or
less/75k or more)
Second motor 0.01/
860 9999 0 to 3600A * * The increments and setting range differ { × {
torque current 0.1A * according to the inverter capacity. (55K or
less/75k or more) 3
89 Refer to Pr. 81.
—
DRIVE THE MOTOR
90 to 94 Refer to Pr. 82 to Pr. 84.

0 Online auto tuning is not performed
Online auto tuning
Vector
95 1 0 1 Start-time tuning (at start-up) { { {

selection
2 Magnetic flux observer (normal)
Online auto tuning
Second motor Select the second motor online auto

574 1 0 0, 1 { { {
online auto tuning tuning. (same as Pr. 95)
103
Parameter List

All
Function
param
eter eter
copy clear
Related
clear
× : disabled
— 96 Refer to Pr. 82 to Pr. 84.
0 to 400Hz,
100 V/F1(first frequency) 0.01Hz 9999
9999
{ { {
V/F1(first frequency
101 0.1V 0V 0 to 1000V { { {
voltage)
V/F2(second 0 to 400Hz,
102 0.01Hz 9999 { { {
frequency) 9999
V/F2(second
103 0.1V 0V 0 to 1000V { { {
frequency voltage)
Adjustable 5 points V/F
V/F3(third 0 to 400Hz,
104 0.01Hz 9999 Set each points (frequency, voltage) of V/F { { {
frequency) 9999
pattern.
V/F
V/F3(third
105 0.1V 0V 0 to 1000V 9999: No V/F setting { { {
frequency voltage)
V/F4(fourth 0 to 400Hz,
106 0.01Hz 9999 { { {
frequency) 9999
V/F4(fourth
107 0.1V 0V 0 to 1000V { { {
frequency voltage)
0 to 400Hz,
108 V/F5(fifth frequency) 0.01Hz 9999
9999
{ { {
V/F5(fifth frequency
109 0.1V 0V 0 to 1000V { { {
voltage)
71 Refer to page 98.
110, 111 Refer to Pr. 7.
112 Refer to Pr. 0.
114, 115 Refer to Pr. 22.
116 Refer to Pr. 41.
Specify the inverter station number.
PU communication Set the inverter station numbers when two
117 1 0 0 to 31
or more inverters are connected to one { { {
station number
personal computer.
Set the communication speed.
PU communication 48, 96, 192, The setting value × 100 equals the
118 1 192 communication speed. { { {
speed 384 For example, the communication speed is
19200bps when the setting value is "192".
0 Stop bit length: 1bit data length: 8bit
PU communication 1 Stop bit length: 2bit data length: 8bit
119 1 1 { { {
stop bit length 10 Stop bit length: 1bit data length: 7bit
RS-485 communication
11 Stop bit length: 2bit data length: 7bit

0 Without parity check
PU communication
initial setting
120 1 2 1 With odd parity check { { {

parity check
2 With even parity check
Set the permissible number of retries at
occurrence of a data receive error.
Number of PU 0 to 10 If the number of consecutive errors
121 communication 1 1 exceeds the permissible value, the inverter { { {
will come to an alarm stop.
retries
If a communication error occurs, the
9999 inverter will not come to an alarm stop.
0 No PU connector communication
Set the communication check time interval.
PU communication
122 0.1s 9999 0.1 to 999.8s If a no-communication state persists for { { {
check time interval longer than the permissible time, the
inverter will come to an alarm stop.
9999 No communication check
Set the waiting time between data
PU communication 0 to 150ms
123 1 9999 transmission to the inverter and response. { { {
waiting time setting 9999 Set with communication data.
104
Parameter List

All
Function
param
eter eter
Incre Initial eter
parameters
copy clear
Related
clear
Parameter List
× : disabled
PU communication 0 Without CR/LF
124 CR/LF presence/ 1 1 1 With CR { { {
absence selection 2 With CR/LF
Set the inverter station number.
RS-485 (same specifications as Pr. 117 ) When "1"
0 to 31
331 communication 1 0 (Modbus-RTU protocol) is set in Pr. 551, { { {
(0 to 247) the setting range within parenthesis is
station number
applied.
RS-485 3, 6, 12, 24,
Used to select the communication speed.
332 communication 1 96 48, 96, 192, { { {
(same specifications as Pr. 118)
speed 384
RS-485
333 communication stop 1 1 0, 1, 10, 11 Select stop bit length and data length. { { {
(same specifications as Pr. 119)
bit length
RS-485
communication Select the parity check specifications.
334 1 2 0, 1, 2
(same specifications as Pr. 120) { { {
parity check
selection
RS-485 Set the permissible number of retries at
0 to 10,
335 communication 1 1 occurrence of a data receive error. (same { { {
RS-485 communication
9999 specifications as Pr. 121)

retry count
initial setting
RS-485 communication can be made, but

0 the inverter will come to an alarm stop in
RS-485 the NET operation mode.
336 communication 0.1s 0s 0.1 to Set the communication check time interval. { { {
check time interval 999.8s (same specifications as Pr. 122)
RS-485
0 to 150ms, Set the waiting time between data
337 communication 1 9999 transmission to the inverter and response. { { {
9999 (same specifications as Pr. 123)
waiting time setting
RS-485 communication Select presence/absence of CR/LF. (same
341 1 1 0, 1, 2
specifications as Pr. 124) { { {
CR/LF selection
Parameter values written by
Communication 0 communication are written to the EEPROM
342 EEPROM write 1 0 and RAM. { { {
selection 1 Parameter values written by
communication are written to the RAM.
Display the number of communication errors
Communication during Modbus-RTU communication.
343 1 0 — Read only. × × ×
error count Displayed only when Modbus-RTU
protocol is selected.
Mitsubishi inverter After setting
0 (computer link) change, reset
protocol (switch power off,
then on) the
549 Protocol selection 1 0 { { {
inverter.
Modbus-RTU The setting change
1
protocol is reflected after a 3
reset.
DRIVE THE MOTOR
105
Parameter List

All
Function
param
eter eter
copy clear
Related
clear
× : disabled
Terminal 2
Set the frequency of terminal 2 input gain
125 frequency setting 0.01Hz 60Hz 0 to 400Hz
(maximum).
{ × {
gain frequency
Terminal 4 Set the frequency of terminal 4 input gain
adjustment of voltage, current input and frequency (calibration)
126 frequency setting 0.01Hz 60Hz 0 to 400Hz (maximum). { × {

gain frequency (Valid when Pr. 858 = 0 (initial value))
Analog input display 0 Displayed in % Select the unit for
241 1 0 { { {
unit switchover 1 Displayed in V/mA analog input display.
Change of analog input frequency,
Terminal 2
C2 Set the frequency on the bias side of
frequency setting 0.01Hz 0Hz 0 to 400Hz { × {
(902) terminal 2 input.
bias frequency
Terminal 2
C3 Set the converted % of the bias side
frequency setting 0.1% 0% 0 to 300% { × {
(902) voltage (current) of terminal 2 input.
bias
Terminal 2
C4 Set the converted % of the gain side
frequency setting 0.1% 100% 0 to 300% { × {
(903) voltage of terminal 2 input.
gain
Terminal 4 Set the frequency on the bias side of
C5
frequency setting 0.01Hz 0Hz 0 to 400Hz terminal 4 input. { × {
(904)
bias frequency (Valid when Pr. 858 = 0 (initial value))
Terminal 4 Set the converted % of the bias side
C6
frequency setting 0.1% 20% 0 to 300% current (voltage) of terminal 4 input. { × {
(904)
bias (Valid when Pr. 858 = 0 (initial value))
Terminal 4 Set the converted % of the gain side
C7
frequency setting 0.1% 100% 0 to 300% current (voltage) of terminal 4 input. { × {
(905)
gain (Valid when Pr. 858 = 0 (initial value))
The parameter number in parentheses is the one for use with the parameter unit (FR-PU04/FR-PU07).
106
Parameter List

All
Function
param
eter eter
Incre Initial eter
parameters
copy clear
Related
clear
Parameter List
× : disabled
PID control 0 to 400Hz
Set the frequency at which the control is
automatic automatically changed to PID control.
127 0.01Hz 9999 { { {
switchover
9999 Without PID automatic switchover function
frequency
10 PID reverse action Deviation value
11 PID forward action signal (terminal 1)
20 PID reverse action Measured value
input (terminal 4)
21 PID forward action Set value (terminal
2 or Pr. 133)
128 PID action selection 1 10 50 PID reverse action Deviation value { { {
signal input
51 PID forward action (LONWORKS, CC-Link
communication)
60 PID reverse action Measured value,
set value input
61 PID forward action (LONWORKS, CC-Link
communication)
If the proportional band is narrow (parameter
setting is small), the manipulated variable
varies greatly with a slight change of the
measured value. Hence, as the proportional
PID proportional 0.1 to 1000%
129 0.1% 100% band narrows, the response sensitivity (gain) { { {
band improves but the stability deteriorates, e.g.
hunting occurs.
Gain K = 1/proportional band
9999 No proportional control
Time required for only the integral (I) action to
provide the same manipulated variable as that
0.1 to 3600s for the proportional (P) action. As the integral
PID control
130 PID integral time 0.1s 1s

time decreases, the set point is reached
{ { {
earlier but hunting occurs more easily.
9999 No integral control.
Set the upper limit value.
If the feedback value exceeds the setting, the
0 to 100% FUP signal is output. The maximum input
131 PID upper limit 0.1% 9999
(20mA/5V/10V) of the measured value
{ { {
(terminal 4) is equivalent to 100%.
9999 No function
Set the lower limit value.
If the measured value falls below the setting range,
0 to 100% the FDN signal is output.
132 PID lower limit 0.1% 9999
The maximum input (20mA/5V/10V) of the
{ { {
measured value (terminal 4) is equivalent to 100%.
9999 No function
0 to 100% Used to set the set point for PID control.
133 PID action set point 0.01% 9999 { { {
9999 Terminal 2 input voltage is the set point. 3
Time required for only the differential (D)
action to provide the same manipulated
0.01 to
variable as that for the proportional (P) action.
134
DRIVE THE MOTOR
PID differential time 0.01s 9999 10.00s

As the differential time increases, greater
{ { {
response is made to a deviation change.
9999 No differential control.
If the output frequency after PID operation
remains lower than the Pr. 576 setting for
Output interruption 0 to 3600s
575 0.1s 1s longer than the time set in Pr. 575, the { { {
detection time inverter stops operation.
9999 Without output interruption function
Output interruption Set the frequency at which the output
576 0.01Hz 0Hz 0 to 400Hz { { {
detection level interruption processing is performed.
Output interruption Set the level (Pr. 577 minus 1000%) to
577 0.1% 1000% 900 to 1100% { { {
cancel level release the PID output interruption function.
107
Parameter List

All
Function
param
eter eter
copy clear
Related
clear
× : disabled
Commercial power- 0
With commercial power-supply switchover
supply switchover sequence
135 1 0 { { {
sequence output Without commercial power-supply
1
terminal selection switchover sequence
MC switchover Set the operation interlock time of MC2
136 0.1s 1s 0 to 100s { { {
interlock time and MC3.
Set the time slightly longer (0.3 to 0.5s or
137 Start waiting time 0.1s 0.5s 0 to 100s so) than the time from when the ON signal { { {
enters MC3 until it actually turns on.
Commercial power- Inverter output is stopped (motor coast) at
0
inverter fault.
supply operation
Operation is automatically switched to the
138 switchover 1 0 { { {
commercial power-supply operation at
selection at an 1
inverter fault (Not switched when an
commercial power-supply operation to use
Switch between the inverter operation and
alarm external thermal error occurs)

Automatic Set the frequency to switch the inverter
switchover 0 to 60Hz operation to the commercial power-supply
frequency between operation.
139 0.01Hz 9999 { { {
inverter and
commercial power- 9999 Without automatic switchover
supply operation
Valid during automatic switchover
operation (Pr. 139 ≠ 9999)
When the frequency command decreases
below (Pr. 139 - Pr. 159) after operation is
switched from inverter operation to
commercial power-supply operation, the
0 to 10Hz
inverter automatically switches operation
Automatic to the inverter operation and operates at
the frequency of frequency command.
switchover ON
When the inverter start command (STF/
range between
159 0.01Hz 9999 STR) is turned off, operation is switched to { { {
commercial power- the inverter operation also.
supply and inverter Valid during automatic switchover
operation operation (Pr. 139 ≠ 9999)
When the inverter start command (STF/
STR) is turned off after operation is
9999 switched from the inverter operation to
commercial power-supply inverter
operation, operation is switched to the
inverter operation and the motor
decelerates to stop.
140 to 143 Refer to Pr. 29.
—
0 Japanese
language switchover
1 English
Parameter unit
2 Germany
PU display 3 French
145 1 0 { × ×
language selection 4 Spanish
5 Italian
6 Swedish
7 Finnish
— 148,149 Refer to Pr. 22.
108
Parameter List

All
Function
param
eter eter
Incre Initial eter
parameters
copy clear
Related
clear
Parameter List
× : disabled
Output current Set the output current detection level.
150 0.1% 150% 0 to 220% { { {
detection level 100% is the rated inverter current.
Set the output current detection period.
Output current
Set the time from when the output current
Detection of output current (Y12 signal)
151 detection signal 0.1s 0s 0 to 10s { { {

Detection of zero current (Y13 signal)
has risen above the setting until the output

delay time current detection signal (Y12) is output.
Zero current Set the zero current detection level.
152 0.1% 5% 0 to 220% { { {
detection level Suppose that the rated inverter current is 100%.
Set this parameter to define the period
Zero current from when the output current drops below
153 0.01s 0.5s 0 to 1s { { {
detection time the Pr. 152 value until the zero current
detection signal (Y13) is output.
Set the retention time when the Y12 signal
Output current 0 to 10s
is on.
166 detection signal 0.1s 0.1s { { {
The Y12 signal on status is retained.
retention time 9999
The signal is turned off at the next start.
Operation continues when the Y12 signal
Output current 0
is on
167 detection operation 1 0 { { {
The inverter is brought to an alarm stop
selection 1
when the Y12 signal is on. (E.CDO)
Second (third) function is immediately
function validity by the second
0
(RT) and third function(X9)
made valid with on of the RT (X9) signal.

function selection signal
Condition selection of
RT signal function
Second (third) function is valid only during
155 validity condition 1 0 { { {
the RT (X9) signal is on and constant
selection 10
speed operation.
(invalid during acceleration/deceleration)
156, 157 Refer to Pr. 22 .

— 158 Refer to Pr. 54 .
159 Refer to Pr. 135 .
0 All parameters can be displayed.
Only the parameters registered in the user
User group read 1
160 selection
1 0 group can be displayed. { { {
Only the simple mode parameters can be
9999
User group function
displayed.
User group (0 to 16)
Displays the number of cases registered
172 registered display/ 1 0 as a user group (reading only). { × ×
batch clear 9999 Batch clear the user group registration
Set the parameter numbers to be
User group 0 to 999,
× × ×
173
registration
1 9999
9999
registered to the user group.
Read value is always "9999".
3
Set the parameter numbers to be cleared
0 to 999,
174 User group clear 1 9999 from the user group. × × ×
9999
DRIVE THE MOTOR
Read value is always "9999".

Setting dial frequency
of the operation panel
0
Operation selection
setting mode Key lock mode

Setting dial invalid
Frequency setting/ 1
potentiometer mode
161 key lock operation 1 0 { × {
Setting dial frequency
selection 10
setting mode Key lock mode
Setting dial valid
11
potentiometer mode
166, 167 Refer to Pr. 150.
— 168, 169 Parameter for manufacturer setting. Do not set.
170, 171 Refer to Pr. 52.
172 to 174 Refer to Pr. 160.
109
Parameter List

All
Function
param
eter eter
copy clear
Related
clear
× : disabled
0 to 20, 0:Low-speed operation command
22 to 28, 1:Middle-speed operation command
STF terminal
178 1 60 42 to 44, 60, 2:High-speed operation command { × {
function selection 62, 64 to 71, 3:Second function selection
9999 4:Terminal 4 input selection
0 to 20, 5:Jog operation selection
22 to 28, 6:Selection of automatic restart after
STR terminal
179 1 61 42 to 44, 61, instantaneous power failure, flying start { × {
function selection 62, 64 to 71, 7: External thermal relay input
9999 8: Fifteen speed selection
RL terminal function 9: Third function
180 1 0 10: Inverter operation enable signal (FR-HC/ { × {
selection
0 to 20, MT-HC, FR-CV connection)
RM terminal
181 1 1 22 to 28, 11: FR-HC/MT-HC connection, { × {
function selection instantaneous power failure detection
42 to 44, 62,
RH terminal 12: PU operation external interlock
182 1 2 64 to 71, { × {
function selection 9999 13: External DC injection brake start
RT terminal function 14: PID control valid terminal
183 1 3
15: Brake opening completion signal { × {
selection
0 to 20, 16: PU-external operation switchover
Function assignment of input terminal
22 to 28, 17: Load pattern selection forward/reverse

AU terminal rotation boost
184 1 4 42 to 44, { × {
function selection 62 to 71, 18: V/F switch over
9999 19: Load torque high-speed frequency
20: S-pattern acceleration/deceleration C
JOG terminal
185 1 5 switching terminal { × {
function selection
22: Orientation command
CS terminal 23: Pre-excitation
186 1 6 { × {
function selection 24: Output stop
MRS terminal 25: Start self-holding selection
187 1 24 { × {
function selection 26: Control mode changing
STOP terminal 27: Torque limit selection
188 1 25 28: Start time tuning { × {
function selection
42: Torque bias selection 1*
43: Torque bias selection 2*
44: P/PI control switchover
0 to 20, 60: Forward rotation command (assigned to
22 to 28, STF terminal (Pr. 178) only)
42 to 44, 62, 61: Reverse rotation command (assigned to
64 to 71, STR terminal (Pr. 179) only)
9999 62: Inverter reset
63: PTC thermistor input (assigned to AU
RES terminal terminal (Pr. 184) only)
189 1 62 64: PID forward/reverse action switchover { × {
function selection
65: PU-NET operation switchover
66: External-NET operation switchover
67: Command source switchover
68: Conditional position pulse train sign*
69: Conditional position droop pulse clear*
70: DC feeding operation permission
71: DC feeding cancel
9999:No function
* Available only when used with the FR-A7AP.
110
Parameter List

All
Function
param
eter eter
Incre Initial eter
parameters
copy clear
Related
clear
Parameter List
× : disabled
0, 100: Inverter running
RUN terminal 1, 101: Up to frequency
190 1 0 0 to 8, 2, 102: Instantaneous power failure/ { × {
function selection 10 to 20, undervoltage
25 to 28, 3, 103: Overload alarm
30 to 36, 39, 4, 104: Output frequency detection
SU terminal 41 to 47, 5, 105: Second output frequency detection
191 1 1 64, 70, 84, 6, 106: Third output frequency detection
{ × {
function selection
85, 90 to 99, 7, 107: Regenerative brake pre-alarm
100 to 108, 8, 108: Electronic thermal relay function
110 to 116, pre-alarm
IPF terminal 10, 110:PU operation mode
192 1 2 120, { × {
function selection 125 to 128, 11, 111: Inverter operation ready
130 to 136, 12, 112:Output current detection
139, 13, 113:Zero current detection
OL terminal function 141 to 147, 14, 114:PID lower limit
193 1 3
164, 170, 15, 115:PID upper limit { × {
selection 16, 116:PID forward/reverse rotation
190 to 199,
output
9999
FU terminal function 17, —: Commercial power-supply
194 1 4 { × {
selection switchover MC1
18, —: Commercial power-supply
switchover MC2
19, —: Commercial power-supply
switchover MC3
20, 120:Brake opening request
ABC1 terminal 25, 125:Fan fault output
195 1 99 { × {
Terminal assignment of output terminal
function selection 26, 126:Heatsink overheat pre-alarm

27, 127:Orientation in-position *
28, 128:Orientation error *
30, 130:Forward rotation output *
31, 131:Reverse rotation output *
32, 132:Regenerative status output *
33, 133:Operation ready 2
34, 134:Low speed output
0 to 8, 35, 135:Torque detection
10 to 20, 36, 136:In-position *
25 to 28, 39, 139:Start time tuning completion
30 to 36, 39, 41, 141:Speed detection
41 to 47, 64, 42, 142:Second speed detection
70, 84, 85, 43, 143:Third speed detection
90, 91, 44, 144:Inverter running 2
94 to 99, 45, 145:Inverter running and start command
100 to 108, is on
110 to 116, 46, 146:During deceleration at occurrence
120, of power failure (retained until
125 to 128, release)
130 to 136, 47, 147:During PID control activated
139, 64, 164:During retry
ABC2 terminal 141 to 147, 70, 170:PID output interruption
196
function selection
1 9999
164, 170,
84, 184:PreparatDC current feedingion { × { 3
ready signal *
190, 191,
85, 185:DC current feeding
194 to 199,
90, 190:Life alarm
9999
DRIVE THE MOTOR
91, 191:Alarm output 3 (power-off signal)

92, 192:Energy saving average value
updated timing
93, 193:Current average monitor signal
94, 194:Alarm output 2
95, 195:Maintenance timer signal
96, 196:Remote output
97, 197:Minor fault output 2
98, 198:Minor fault output
99, 199:Alarm output
9999: No function
0 to 99: Positive logic
100 to 199: Negative logic
* Available only when used with the FR-A7AP.
111
Parameter List

All
Function
param
eter eter
copy clear
Related
clear
× : disabled
232 to 239 Refer to Pr. 4 to Pr. 6.
—
242, 243 Refer to Pr. 73.
Operates at power on
0 Cooling fan on/off control invalid (The
Increase cooling
cooling fan is always on at power on)

fan life
Cooling fan Cooling fan on/off control valid

244 1 1 { { {
operation selection The fan is normally on during inverter
1 operation. The fan switches on/off
according to the temperature during a stop
of the inverter whose status is monitored.
0 to 50% Used to set the rated motor slip.
245 Rated slip 0.01% 9999 { { {
9999 No slip compensation
Used to set the response time of slip
compensation. When the value is made
Slip compensation
Slip compensation smaller, response will be faster. However,

246 0.01s 0.5s 0.01 to 10s { { {
time constant as load inertia is greater, a regenerative
V/F
overvoltage (E.OV) error is more liable to

occur.
Slip compensation is not made in the
Constant-power
0 constant output range (frequency range
region slip
247 1 9999 above the frequency set in Pr. 3) { { {
compensation
Slip compensation is made in the constant
selection 9999
output range.
STF signal:
The motor is coasted
Forward rotation
to a stop when the
start
0 to 100s preset time elapses
STR signal:
after the start signal is
Reverse rotation
turned off.
start
STF signal: Start
The motor is coasted
signal
1000 to to a stop (Pr. 250 -
Selection of motor
STR signal:
stopping method
1100s 1000)s after the start

Forward/reverse
signal is turned off.
signal
250 Stop selection 0.1s 9999 { { {
STF signal:
Forward rotation
start
9999
STR signal:
When the start signal
Reverse rotation
is turned off, the
start
motor decelerates to
STF signal: Start
stop.
signal
8888 STR signal:
Forward/reverse
signal
Output phase 0 Without output phase failure protection
Input/output phase
failure protection
251 failure protection 1 1 { { {

1 With output phase failure protection
selection
selection
0 Without input phase failure protection
Input phase failure
872 1 0 { { {
protection selection 1 With input phase failure protection
— 252, 253 Refer to Pr. 73.
112
Parameter List

All
Function
param
eter eter
Incre Initial eter
parameters
copy clear
Related
clear
Parameter List
× : disabled
Display whether the control circuit
capacitor, main circuit capacitor, cooling
Life alarm status
255 1 0 (0 to 15) fan, and each parts of the inrush current × × ×
display limit circuit has reached the life alarm
Display of the life of the inverter parts
output level or not. Reading only

Inrush current limit Display the deterioration degree of the
256 1% 100% (0 to 100%) × × ×
circuit life display inrush current limit circuit. Reading only
Control circuit
Display the deterioration degree of the
257 capacitor life 1% 100% (0 to 100%)
control circuit capacitor. Reading only
× × ×
display
Main circuit Display the deterioration degree of the
258 capacitor life 1% 100% (0 to 100%) main circuit capacitor. Reading only × × ×
display The value measured by Pr. 259 is displayed.
Setting "1" and turning the power supply off
starts the measurement of the main circuit
Main circuit
capacitor life.
259 capacitor life 1 0 0, 1
When the Pr.259 value is "3" after powering
{ { {
measuring on again, the measuring is completed.
Read the deterioration degree in Pr.258.
Coasting to stop
0 When undervoltage or power failure
occurs, the inverter output is shut off.
1 Without UV avoidance When undervoltage
or a power failure
occurs, the inverter
11 With UV avoidance
can be decelerated
Power failure stop to a stop.
261 1 0 2 Without UV avoidance When undervoltage { { {
selection
or a power failure
occurs, the inverter
can be decelerated
to a stop.
12 With UV avoidance
If power is restored
during a power
failure, the inverter
Operation at instantaneous power failure
accelerates again.
Normally operation can be performed with
Subtracted the initial value unchanged. But adjust the
262 frequency at 0.01Hz 3Hz 0 to 20Hz frequency according to the magnitude of { { {
deceleration start the load specifications (moment of inertia,
torque).
When output frequency ≥ Pr. 263
Decelerate from the speed obtained
0 to 120Hz from output frequency minus Pr. 262.
Subtraction starting
263 0.01Hz 60Hz When output frequency < Pr. 263 { { {
frequency Decelerate from output frequency
Decelerate from the speed obtained from
9999
output frequency minus Pr. 262. 3
Power-failure 0.1/ 0 to 3600/ Set a deceleration slope down to the
264 5s { { {
deceleration time 1 0.01s 360s frequency set in Pr. 266.
DRIVE THE MOTOR
0 to 3600/ Set a deceleration slope below the

Power-failure 0.1/
265 9999 360s frequency set in Pr. 266. { { {
deceleration time 2 0.01s
9999 Same slope as in Pr. 264
Power failure
Set the frequency at which the
deceleration time
266 0.01Hz 60Hz 0 to 400Hz deceleration slope is switched from the Pr. { { {
switchover 264 setting to the Pr. 265 setting.
frequency
Adjust response level at UV avoidance
operation. A larger setting will improve
UV avoidance responsiveness to the bus voltage change.
294 0.1% 100% 0 to 200% { { {
voltage gain Since the regeneration amount is large
when the inertia is large, decrease the
setting value.
113
Parameter List

All
Function
param
eter eter
copy clear
Related
clear
× : disabled
269 Parameter for manufacturer setting. Do not set.
Without stop-on contact control and load
0
Stop-on contact/ torque high-speed frequency control
load torque high- 1 Stop-on contact control
270 1 0 { { {
speed frequency 2 Load torque high speed frequency control
Load torque high speed frequency control
control selection 3
Stop-on contact + load torque high speed
frequency control
High-speed setting
271 0.1% 50% 0 to 220% { { {
maximum current
Set the upper and lower limits of the
Middle-speed current at high and middle speeds.
272 setting minimum 0.1% 100% 0 to 220% { { {
current
Average current during acceleration from
0 to 400Hz (Pr. 273 × 1/2)Hz to (Pr. 273 )Hz can be
Current averaging
273 0.01Hz 9999 achieved. { { {
range Average current during acceleration from
9999
(Pr. 5 × 1/2)Hz to (Pr. 5 )Hz is achieved.
Set the time constant of the primary delay
filter relative to the output current.
Current averaging (The time constant [ms] is 0.75 × Pr. 274
274 1 16 1 to 4000
and the initial value is 12ms.)
{ { {
filter time constant
A larger setting provides higher stability but
poorer response.
Without stop-on contact control and load
0
Stop-on contact/ torque high-speed frequency control
load torque high- 1 Stop-on contact control
270 1 0 { { {
speed frequency 2 Load torque high speed frequency control
control selection Stop-on contact + load torque high speed
Sensorless
3
Stop-on contact control
frequency control
Stop-on contact Usually set a value between 130% and
180%.
excitation current 0 to 1000%
275 0.1% 9999 Set the force (holding torque) for stop-on- { { {
low-speed contact control.
Magnetic flux
multiplying factor 9999 No compensation.

Set a PWM carrier frequency for stop-on-
contact control.
PWM carrier 0 to 9/ (Valid at the output frequency of 3Hz or
276 frequency at stop- 1 9999 0 to 4 * less.) { { {
on contact * The setting range differs according to the
9999 As set in Pr. 72 PWM frequency selection.
114
Parameter List

All
Function
param
eter eter
Incre Initial eter
parameters
copy clear
Related
clear
Parameter List
× : disabled
Set to the rated slip frequency of the motor
Brake opening + about 1.0Hz.
278 0.01Hz 3Hz 0 to 30Hz
This parameter may be only set if Pr. 278 ≤
{ { {
frequency
Pr. 282.
Generally, set this parameter to about 50 to
Brake opening 90%. If the setting is too low, the load is
279 0.1% 130% 0 to 220% liable to drop due to gravity at start. { { {
current Suppose that the rated inverter current is
100%.
Brake opening
Generally, set this parameter to about 0.1
280 current detection 0.1s 0.3s 0 to 2s
to 0.3s.
{ { {
time
Pr. 292 = 7: Set the mechanical delay time
Brake operation until the brake is loosened.
281 0.1s 0.3s 0 to 5s Pr. 292 = 8: Set the mechanical delay time { { {
time at start until the brake is loosened + about 0.1 to
0.2s.
Vector
At this frequency, the brake opening

Brake sequence function
request signal (BOF) is switched off.

Brake operation Generally, set this parameter to the Pr. 278
282 0.01Hz 6Hz 0 to 30Hz
setting + 3 to 4Hz.
{ { {
frequency
Setting is enabled only when Pr. 282 ≥ Pr.

278.
Pr. 292 = 7: Set the mechanical delay time
Brake operation until the brake is closed + 0.1s.
283 0.1s 0.3s 0 to 5s Pr. 292 = 8: Set the mechanical delay time { { {
time at stop until the brake is closed + about 0.2 to
0.3s.
0 Deceleration is not detected.
Deceleration If deceleration is not normal during
284 detection function 1 0 deceleration operation, the inverter alarm { { {
1 (E.MB2) is provided to shut off the output
selection and turn off the brake opening request
signal (BOF).
When brake sequence function is made
valid under encoder feedback control
Excessive speed If (detected frequency) - (output frequency)
0 to 30Hz > Pr. 285 under encoder feedback control,
285 deviation detection 0.01Hz 9999 the inverter alarm (E.MB1) is provided to { { {
frequency shut off the output and turn off the brake
opening request signal (BOF).
9999 Overspeed is not detected.
Automatic
0, 1, 3, 5 to Brake sequence function is made valid when a setting is "7 or
292 acceleration/ 1 0
8, 11 8".
deceleration
Speed deviation 9999 Without speed deviation excessive
Speed deviation excess detection
285 excess detection 0.01Hz 9999 { { {

0 to 30Hz
frequency If the difference (absolute value) between
the speed command value and actual
speed exceeds the Pr. 285 Speed deviation 3
Vector
excess detection frequency setting for longer

than the time set in Pr. 853 Speed deviation
Speed deviation time during speed control under vector
DRIVE THE MOTOR
853 0.1s 1s 0 to 100s { { {

time control, speed deviation excessive occurs
and error "E. OSD" appears, resulting in a
stop.
115
Parameter List

All
Function
param
eter eter
copy clear
Related
clear
× : disabled
0 Droop control is invalid
286 Droop gain 0.1% 0% Set the drooping amount at the rated { { {
0.1 to
torque as a percentage with respect to the
100%
rated frequency.
Droop filter time Set the time constant of the primary delay
287 0.01s 0.3s 0 to 1s
filter applied to the torque current.
{ { {
constant
Real sensor less Advanced
vector /vector magnetic flux
control vector control
Vector
Droop control is not

exercised during
acceleration/
deceleration.
Droop control
Sensorless
0, 10 (When Pr.288 = 10,

droop compensation
amount is determined Droop control is not
using the motor exercised during
speed as reference.) acceleration/
Droop function deceleration.
Magnetic flux
288 1 0 Droop control is { { {

activation selection always exercised
Droop
compensation
during operation.
amount is
(with 0 limit)
determined using
1, 11 (When Pr.288 = 11,
the rated motor
droop compensation
frequency as
amount is determined
reference.
using the motor
speed as reference.)
Droop control is
always exercised
2
during operation.
(without 0 limit)
Input Output
0 JOG terminal FM output
1 Pulse train input FM output
10 JOG terminal Pulse train open
collector output
11 Pulse train input (50% duty)
20 JOG terminal Pulse train open
Pulse train I/O collector output
291 1 0 { × {
selection 21 (ON width is always
same)
Pulse train open
Pulse train I/O
Pulse train input collector output

(ON width is always
100
same
(independently of
Pr. 54))
Indicates division scaling factor to the input
Input pulse division pulse and the frequency resolution to the
384 1 0 0 to 250 { { {
scaling factor input pulse changes according to the
value.
Frequency for zero Set the frequency when the input pulse is 0
385 0.01Hz 0 0 to 400Hz { { {
input pulse (bias).
Frequency for
Set the frequency when the input pulse is
386 maximum input 0.01Hz 60Hz 0 to 400Hz { { {
maximum (gain).
pulse
— 292, 293 Refer to Pr. 61.
— 294 Refer to Pr. 261.
—
331 to 337 Refer to Pr. 117.
116
Parameter List

All
Function
param
eter eter
Incre Initial eter
parameters
copy clear
Related
clear
Parameter List
× : disabled
Communication 0
Operation command source
338 operation command 1 0 communication { { {
source 1 Operation command source external
0 Speed command source communication
Speed command source external
(Frequency setting from communication is
Communication 1
invalid, terminal 2 and 1 setting from
Operation command source and
speed command source during
339 speed command 1 0 external is valid) { { {

communication operation
source Speed command source external

(Frequency setting from communication is
2
valid, terminal 2 and 1 setting from external
is invalid)
0 Communication option valid
1 Inverter RS-485 terminal valid
NET mode Automatic recognition of the
550 operation command 1 9999 communication option { { {
source selection 9999 Normally, the RS-485 terminals are valid.
Communication option is valid when the
communication option is mounted.
Select the RS-485 terminals as the PU
1
operation mode control source.
PU mode operation
Select the PU connector as the PU
551 command source 1 2 2 { { {
selection Select the USB connector as the PU
3
—
341 to 343 Refer to Pr. 117.
0 Internal stop position command (Pr.356)
Stop position com- External stop position command (FR-A7AX
350 1 9999 1 { { {
mand selection 16-bit data)
9999 Orientation control invalid
Decrease the motor speed to the set value
351 Orientation speed 0.01Hz 2Hz 0 to 30Hz
when the orientation command (X22) is given.
{ { {
352 Creep speed 0.01Hz 0.5Hz 0 to 10Hz As soon as the current position pulse { { {
reaches the creep switchover position set
Creep switchover in Pr.353 after the speed has reached the
353 1 511 0 to 16383 orientation speed, the speed decelerates { { {
position
down to the creep speed set in Pr.352.
As soon as the current position pulse
Position loop
354 1 96 0 to 8191 reaches the set position loop switchover { { {
Vector
switchover position position, control is changed to position loop.

After changed to position loop, DC injection
DC injection brake brake is applied and the motor stops as
Orientation control
355 1 5 0 to 255 { { {
start position soon as the current position pulse reaches
Magnetic flux
the set DC injection brake start position.

When "0" is set in Pr. 350, the internal posi-
Internal stop posi-
356 1 0 0 to 16383 tion command is activated and the setting { { {
tion command value of Pr. 356 becomes a stop position. 3
Set the in-position zone at a stop of the
357 In-position zone 1 5 0 to 255
orientation.
{ { {
V/F
DRIVE THE MOTOR
Servo torque selec- Functions at orientation completion can be

358 1 1 0 to 13 { { {
tion selected.
CW
A
0
Encoder
359 1 1 { { {
direction
CW
A
1
Encoder
117
Parameter List

All
Function
param
eter eter
copy clear
Related
clear
× : disabled
0 Speed command When 1 is set in
Position command Pr.350 and the
16 bit data is used as option FR-A7AX is
1
external position com- mounted, set a stop
mand as is. position using 16-
360 16 bit data selection 1 0
bit data.
{ { {
Set the stop position
Stop position com-
dividing up to 128
2 to 127 mand is input as
stop positions at reg-
binary regardless of
ular intervals.
the Pr.304 setting.
Shift the origin using a compensation value
without changing the origin of the encoder.
361 Position shift 1 0 0 to 16383 The stop position is a position obtained by { { {
adding the setting value of Pr. 361 to the
position command.
When servo torque function is selected
using Pr.358, output frequency for
generating servo torque increases to the
Orientation position
362 0.1 1 0.1 to 10 creep speed of Pr.352 gradually according { { {
loop gain to the slope set in Pr.362. Although the
operation becomes faster when the value
is increased, a machine may hunt, etc.
The orientation complete signal (ORA) is
output delaying the set time after in-posi-
Completion signal
363 0.1s 0.5s 0 to 5s tion zone is entered. Also, the signal turns { { {
output delay time off delaying the set time after in-position
zone is out.
Orientation fault signal (ORM) is output
Vector
when the encoder remains stopped for the

set time without orientation completion in
Encoder stop check
Orientation control
the state where no orientation complete

364 0.1s 0.5s 0 to 5s { { {
Magnetic flux
time signal (ORA) is output. ORM signal is out-

put when orientation is not completed
again in the set time in the state where
ORA signal is output.
Measure the time taken after passing the
creep switchover position and output the
0 to 60s
V/F
365 Orientation limit 1s 9999 orientation fault signal (ORM) if orientation { { {

is not completed within the set time.
9999 Set to 120s.
Turning off the start signal with orientation
command (X22) on after stopping the motor
by orientation control, the present position
0 to 5s
366 Recheck time 0.1s 9999 is checked again after the set time elapses { { {
and the orientation complete signal (ORA)
or orientation fault signal (ORM) is output.
9999 Not checked.
Number of encoder
369 1 1024 0 to 4096 Set the number of pulses before multiplied { { {
pulses by four.
Orientation is executed from the current
0
rotation direction.
Orientation selec- Orientation is executed from the forward
393 1 0 1 { { {
tion rotation direction.
Orientation is executed from the reverse
2
rotation direction.
Orientation speed
396 1 60 0 to 1000 Servo rigidity is (response level during { { {
gain (P term)
position control loop) at orientation stop
Orientation speed can be adjusted.
397 0.001s 0.333s 0 to 20.0s { { {
integral time
Orientation speed Lag/advance compensation gain can be
398 0.1% 1% 0 to 100.0% { { {
gain (D term) adjusted.
Make adjustment when the motor runs
Orientation deceler-
399 1 20 0 to 1000 back at orientation stop or the orientation { { {
ation ratio time is long.
118
Parameter List

All
Function
param
eter eter
Incre Initial eter
parameters
copy clear
Related
clear
Parameter List
× : disabled
CW
A
0
Encoder
Magnetic flux
Encoder feedback control
359 1 1 { { {
direction
CW
A
1
Encoder
V/F
Speed feedback 0 to 400Hz Set the region of speed feedback control.

367 0.01Hz 9999 { { {
range 9999 Encoder feedback control is invalid
Set when the rotation is unstable or
368 Feedback gain 0.1 1 0 to 100
response is slow.
{ { {
Number of encoder
369 1 1024 0 to 4096 Set the number of pulses before multiplied { { {
pulses by four.
When the motor speed reaches or exceeds
Overspeed
detection
the speed set in Pr.374 during encoder feed-

Overspeed detec-
374 0.01Hz 140Hz 0 to 400Hz back control, real sensorless vector control, { { {
tion level or vector control, over speed (E.OS) occurs
and stops the inverter output.
Encoder signal cable breakage detection
Vector
0 Signal loss detection is invalid

Magnetic flux
Open cable detec-

376 tion enable/disable 1 0 { { {
selection
Signal loss detection is valid
When the cable of the encoder signal is
broken during encoder feedback control,
1
V/F
orientation control, or vector control, signal

loss detection (E.ECT) is activated to stop
the inverter output.

—
384 to 386 Refer to Pr. 291.
Conditional position control function by
0
Position command contact input
419 1 0 { { {
source selection Conditional position pulse train command
2
by pulse train input from the JOG terminal
3
Command pulse
420 scaling factor 1 1 0 to 32767 { { {
Set the electronic gear.
numerator
DRIVE THE MOTOR
Pr. 420 is a numerator and Pr. 421 is a

Command pulse denominator.
Position control
421 scaling factor 1 1 0 to 32767 { { {

denominator
Vector
422 Position loop gain 1s-1 25s-1 0 to 150s-1 Set the gain of the position loop. { { {
Position feed for- Function to cancel a delay caused by the
423 1% 0% 0 to 100% { { {
ward gain droop pulses of the deviation counter.
Position command
Used when rotation has become unsmooth
acceleration/decel-
424 0.001s 0s 0 to 50s at a large electronic gear ratio (about 10 { { {
eration time con- times or more) and low speed.
stant
Position feed for-
Enters the primary delay filter in response
425 ward command fil- 0.001s 0s 0 to 5s
to the feed forward command.
{ { {
ter
119
Parameter List

All
Function
param
eter eter
copy clear
Related
clear
× : disabled
100 0 to 32767 The in-position signal (Y36) turns on when the
426 In-position width 1 pulse
pulse pulse droop pulses become less than the setting.
{ { {
A position error excessive (E.OD) occurs
Excessive level 0 to 400
427 1 40 when the droop pulses exceed the setting. { { {
error
9999 Function invalid
Command pulse 0 to 2 Pulse train + sign Negative logic
428 1 0 { { {
selection 3 to 5 Pulse train + sign Positive logic
Deviation counter is cleared at trailing
Clear signal selec- 0 edge (at the moment when H level is
429 1 1
changed to L level)
{ { {
tion
1 eviation counter is cleared at L level
Position control
FR-DU07(FR-PU04)
Description
Vector
display
0 The cumulative com- Lower 4(5) digits
mand pulse value is
1 Upper 4(5) digits
displayed.
Pulse monitor
430 1 9999 2 The cumulative feed- Lower 4(5) digits { { {
selection back pulse value is
3 Upper 4(5) digits
displayed.
4 The droop pulses are Lower 4(5) digits
5 monitored. Upper 4(5) digits
9999 Frequency monitor is displayed.
Set the time until the inverter stops when
Digital position con-
the forward rotation (reverse rotation) com-
464 trol sudden stop 0.1s 0 0 to 360.0s { { {
mand is turned off with the position feed for-
deceleration time ward function.
—
453, 454 Refer to Pr. 80.
Position Feed
Selection Method
Speed
First position feed
465 1 0 0 to 9999 { { {
amount lower 4 digits High speed
RH
First position feed (Pr.4)
466 1 0 0 to 9999 { { {
amount upper 4 digits
Second position feed
467 1 0 0 to 9999 { { {
amount lower 4 digits Middle speed
RM
Second position feed (Pr.5)
468 1 0 0 to 9999 { { {
Conditional position feed function
Third position feed

469 1 0 0 to 9999 { { {
amount lower 4 digits Low speed
RL
Third position feed (Pr.6)
470 1 0 0 to 9999 { { {
Fourth position feed
Vector
471 1 0 0 to 9999 { { {
amount lower 4 digits
RM, RL Speed 4 (Pr.24)
Fourth position feed
472 1 0 0 to 9999 { { {
Fifth position feed
473 1 0 0 to 9999 { { {
RH, RL Speed 5 (Pr.25)
Fifth position feed
474 1 0 0 to 9999 { { {
Sixth position feed
475 1 0 0 to 9999 { { {
RH, RM Speed 6 (Pr.26)
Sixth position feed
476 1 0 0 to 9999 { { {
Seventh position feed
477 1 0 0 to 9999 { { {
RH, RM, RL Speed 7 (Pr.27)
Seventh position feed
478 1 0 0 to 9999 { { {
120
Parameter List

All
Function
param
eter eter
Incre Initial eter
parameters
copy clear
Related
clear
Parameter List
× : disabled
Eighth position feed
479 amount lower 4 digits
1 0 0 to 9999 { { {
REX Speed 8 (Pr.232)
Eighth position feed
480 amount upper 4 digits
1 0 0 to 9999 { { {
Ninth position feed

1 0 0 to 9999 { { {
REX, RL Speed 9 (Pr.233)
Ninth position feed
1 0 0 to 9999 { { {
Tenth position feed
1 0 0 to 9999 { { {
REX, RM Speed 10 (Pr.234)
Tenth position feed
484 1 0 0 to 9999 { { {
Conditional position feed function

Eleventh position feed
1 0 0 to 9999 { { {
REX, RM, RL Speed 11 (Pr.235)
Eleventh position feed
1 0 0 to 9999 { { {
Vector
Twelfth position feed

1 0 0 to 9999 { { {
REX, RH Speed 12 (Pr.236)
Twelfth position feed
1 0 0 to 9999 { { {
Thirteenth position feed
1 0 0 to 9999 { { {
REX, RH, RL Speed 13 (Pr.237)
Thirteenth position feed
1 0 0 to 9999 { { {
Fourteenth position feed
1 0 0 to 9999 { { {
REX, RH, RM Speed 14 (Pr.238)
Fourteenth position feed
1 0 0 to 9999 { { {
Fifteenth position feed
1 0 0 to 9999 { { {
REX, RH, RM, RL Speed 15 (Pr.239)
Fifteenth position feed
1 0 0 to 9999 { { {
0 Remote output data clear at powering off
Remote output
Remote output
(REM signal)
495 selection
1 0 Remote output data retention even at { { {
function
1
powering off
496 Remote output data 1 1 0 0 to 4095 Output terminal can be switched on and × × ×
497 Remote output data 2 1 0 0 to 4095 off. × × ×
Display the cumulative energization time of
Maintenance of parts
the inverter in 100h increments.

503 Maintenance timer 1 0 0 (1 to 9998) Reading only × × ×
Writing the setting of "0" clears the
cumulative energization time.
Set the time taken until when the
Maintenance timer 0 to 9998 maintenance timer alarm output signal
504 alarm output set time
1 9999
(Y95) is output.
{ × { 3
9999 No function
DRIVE THE MOTOR
— 516 to 519 Refer to Pr. 29.

USB communication
547 station number
1 0 0 to 31 Specify the inverter station number. { { {
USB communication
Inverter setup using
USB communication is enabled. However,

the inverter will come to an alarm stop (E.
0
USB) if operation is changed to PU
USB communication
548 check time interval
0.1s 9999 operation mode. { { {
0.1 to Set the interval of communication check
999.8s time.
—
550, 551 Refer to Pr. 338 and Pr. 339.
121
Parameter List

All
Function
param
eter eter
copy clear
Related
clear
× : disabled
Current average Set the time taken to average the current
555 0.1s 1s 0.1 to 1.0s { { {
Current average value
time during start bit output (1s).

monitor signal
Data output mask Set the time for not obtaining (mask)
556 0.1s 0s 0.0 to 20.0s
transient state data.
{ { {
time
Current average Set the reference (100%) for outputting the
Rated signal of the current average value.
value monitor signal 0.01/ 0 to 500/
557 inverter * The increments and setting range differ { { {
output reference 0.1A *
current
0 to 3600A *
according to the inverter capacity. (55K or
current less/75k or more)
563, 564 Refer to Pr. 52.
— 575 to 577 Refer to Pr. 127.
Torque command by terminal 1 analog
0
input
Torque command source selection
Torque command by parameter

1
Pr.805 or Pr.806 setting (-400% to 400%)
Torque command
804 1 0 Torque command by using CC-Link (FR- { { {
Vector
source selection 3
A7NC)
4 Digital input from the option (FR-A7AX)
5 Torque command by using CC-Link (FR-
Sensorless
6 A7NC)
Torque command 600 to Digital setting of the torque command can
805 1% 1000% be made by setting Pr. 805 or Pr. 806. × { {
value (RAM) 1400%
(Setting from communication option, etc.
Torque command can be made.)
600 to
806 value 1% 1000%
1400% In this case, set the speed limit value to an { { {
(RAM,EEPROM) appropriate value to prevent overspeed.
Use the speed command value during
0
speed control as speed limit.
According to Pr. 808 and Pr. 809, set the
1 speed limit in forward and reverse rotation
directions individually.
The analog voltage of the terminal 1 input
is used to make speed limit. For 0 to 10V
Speed limit input, set the forward rotation speed limit.
807 1 0 { { {
selection (The reverse rotation speed limit is Pr. 1
Vector
Maximum frequency)
Speed limit
2 For -10 to 0V input, set the reverse rotation

speed limit. (The forward rotation speed
limit is Pr. 1 Maximum frequency.) The
Sensorless
maximum frequency of both the forward

and reverse rotations is Pr. 1 Maximum
frequency.
Forward rotation Set the speed limit level during forward
808 0.01Hz 60Hz 0 to 120Hz
rotation. (valid when Pr. 807 = 1)
{ { {
speed limit
Set the speed limit level during reverse
0 to 120Hz
rotation. (valid when Pr. 807 = 1)
Reverse rotation
809 0.01Hz 9999 The setting is the same as that of the { { {
speed limit 9999 torque limit in the forward rotation
direction.
— 811 Refer to Pr. 22 and Pr. 37.
— 812 to 817 Refer to Pr. 22.
122
Parameter List

All
Function
param
eter eter
Incre Initial eter
parameters
copy clear
Related
clear
Parameter List
× : disabled
Easy gain tuning 1 : Slow response
818 response level 1 2 1 to 15 ↓ { { {
Vector
setting 15 : Fast response

tuning selection
Easy gain
0 No tuning
With load estimation
1
(only under vector control) { × {
Sensorless
819 Easy gain tuning 1 0

selection The optimum gain is automatically set from
the torque command and speed during
2
motor operation.
Manual input of load (Pr. 880)
Set the proportional gain for speed control.
Speed loop proportional
Speed control P (Increasing the value improves trackability

Vector
820 1% 60% 0 to 1000% in response to a speed command change { { {

gain 1
gain setting
and reduces speed variation with

disturbance.)
Second function of Pr. 820 (valid when RT
Sensorless
0 to 1000%
Speed control P signal is on)
830 1% 9999 { { {
gain 2 9999 No function
Set the integral time during speed control.

Speed control (Decrease the value to shorten the time
821
integral time setting
0.001s 0.333s 0 to 20s { { {

Vector
integral time 1 taken for returning to the original speed if

Speed control
speed variation with disturbance occurs.)

Second function of Pr. 821 (valid when the
0 to 20s
RT terminal is on)
Sensorless
Speed control
831 0.001s 9999 { { {
integral time 2 9999 No function

Speed detection Set the primary delay filter for the speed
Speed detection
823 0.001s 0.001s 0 to 0.1s { { {

filter function
filter 1 feedback.
Vector
Second function of Pr. 823 (valid when RT

0 to 0.1s { { {
Speed detection signal is on)
833 0.001s 9999
filter 2
9999 No function { { {
Set the proportional gain for the current
proportional gain setting
Torque control P control of the q and d axes. (Increasing the

Vector
824 1% 100% 0 to 200% value improves trackability in response to a { { {

gain 1
Current loop
current command change and reduces

current variation with disturbance.)
Sensorless
0 to 200%
Torque control P RT terminal is on)
834 1% 9999 { { {
gain 2 9999 No function
Set the integral time for the current control

of the q and d axes. (Decreasing the value
Torque control 3
integral time setting
Vector
825 0.1ms 5ms 0 to 500ms shortens the time taken to return to the { { {
Current control
integral time 1 original torque if current variation with

disturbance occurs.)
DRIVE THE MOTOR
Sensorless
0 to 500ms
Torque control RT signal is on)
835 0.1ms 9999 { { {
integral time 2 9999 No function

Torque detection Set the primary delay filter for the current
827 0.001s 0s 0 to 0.1s
feedback.
{ { {
filter 1
Vector
Torque detection

filter function
0 to 0.1s
RT signal is on)
Torque detection
Sensorless
837 0.001s 9999 { { {

filter 2 9999 No function
123
Parameter List

All
Function
param
eter eter
copy clear
Related
clear
× : disabled
Model speed
828 1% 60% 0 to 1000% Set the gain for model speed controller. { { {
control gain
Speed feed forward 0 Normal speed control is exercised
model adaptive speed control
Speed feed forward control,
control/model 1 Speed feed forward control is exercised.

877 1 0 { { {
adaptive speed
Vector
2 Model adaptive speed control is enabled.

control selection
Speed feed forward Set the primary delay filter for the speed
878 0.01s 0s 0 to 1s feed forward result calculated using the { { {
filter
Sensorless
speed command and load inertia ratio.

Speed feed forward Limits the maximum value of the speed
879 0.1% 150% 0 to 400% { { {
torque limit feed forward torque.
0 to 200 Set the load inertia ratio.
880 Load inertia ratio 0.1 7 { × {
times Inertia ratio found by easy gain turning.
Speed feed forward Set the feed forward calculation result as a
881 1% 0% 0 to 1000% { { {
gain gain.
—
Set the contact signal (X42, X43) based-
0
torque bias amount using Pr.841 to Pr.843.
Set the terminal 1-based torque bias amount
1
as desired in C16 to C19. (forward rotation)
Torque bias selec- Set the terminal 1-based torque bias amount
840 1 9999 2
as desired in C16 to C19. (reverse rotation) { { {
tion
The terminal 1-based torque bias amount
3 can be set automatically in C16 to C19,
Pr.846 according to the load.
9999 Without torque bias, rated torque 100%
600 to Negative torque bias amount (-400% to -
Torque bias function
841 Torque bias 1

999% 1%)
1% 9999 1000 to { { {
842 Torque bias 2 Positive torque bias amount (0% to 400%)
Vector
1400%
843 Torque bias 3 9999 Without torque bias setting
0 to 5s Time until torque rises.
844 Torque bias filter 0.001s 9999 { { {
9999 Same operation as when 0s is set.
Time for maintaining torque equivalent to
Torque bias opera- 0 to 5s
845 0.01s 9999 the torque bias amount. { { {
tion time 9999 Same operation as when 0s is set.
Torque bias balance 0 to 10V Set the voltage under balanced load.
846 0.1V 9999 { { {
compensation 9999 Same operation as when 0V is set.
Fall-time torque 0 to 400% Set the bias value of the torque command.
847 1% 9999 { { {
bias terminal 1 bias 9999 Same as at a rise time (C16, C17).
Fall-time torque 0 to 400% Set the gain value of the torque command.
848 1% 9999 { { {
bias terminal 1 gain 9999 Same as at a rise time (C18, C19).
Vector
Excitation ratio
854 Excitation ratio 1% 100% 0 to 100% Set the excitation ratio under no load. { { {
Sensorless
124
Parameter List

All
Function
param
eter eter
Incre Initial eter
parameters
copy clear
Related
clear
Parameter List
× : disabled
0 Frequency/speed command
Terminal 4 function 1 Magnetic flux command
858 1 0 { × {
assignment 4 Stall prevention/torque limit
Function assignment of
analog input terminal
9999 No function
0 Frequency setting auxiliary
1 Magnetic flux command
2 Regenerative torque limit
3 Torque command
Terminal 1 function
868 1 0 Stall prevention/torque limit/torque { × {
assignment 4
command
5 Forward/reverse rotation speed limit
6 Torque bias
9999 No function
— 859 to 860 Refer to Pr. 82.
You can use the machine resonance
Notch filter time speed to make this setting to reduce the
Vector
862 1 0 0 to 60 response level of the machine resonance { { {

constant frequency band, avoiding machine
Notch filter
resonance.
0 Deep (-40dB)
Sensorless
1 ↑ (-14dB)
863 Notch filter depth 1 0 2 ↓ (-8dB) { { {
3 Sharrow (-4dB)
Vector
Torque detection
You can make setting to output a signal if

864 Torque detection 0.1% 150% 0 to 400% the motor torque exceeds the { { {
predetermined value.
Sensorless

—
— 872 Refer to Pr. 251.
Speed limit during
speed control
Frequency is limited at the set frequency +

Vector
873 Speed limit 0.01Hz 20Hz 0 to 120Hz { { {

Pr.873 during vector control.
— 874 Refer to Pr. 22. 3

At occurrence of any alarm, the base
0 circuit is shut off immediately. At this time,
the alarm output also turns on.
DRIVE THE MOTOR
At occurrence of external thermal operation

Fault definition
(OHT), electronic thermal relay function

875 Fault definition 1 0 (THM) or PTC thermistor operation (PTC) { { {
alarm, the motor is decelerated to a stop
1 and the base circuit is shut off.
At occurrence of an alarm other than OHT,
THM and PTC, the base circuit is shut off
immediately. Same operation as when "0" is
set is performed under position control.
— 877 to 881 Refer to Pr. 828.
125
Parameter List

All
Function
param
eter eter
copy clear
Related
clear
× : disabled
0 Regeneration avoidance function invalid
Regeneration Regeneration avoidance function is always
1
882 avoidance 1 0 valid { { {
operation selection 2
Regeneration avoidance function is valid
only at constant speed
Set the bus voltage level at which
regeneration avoidance operates. When
the bus voltage level is set to low,
overvoltage error will be less apt to occur.
Regeneration 380 / However, the actual deceleration time
883 avoidance operation 0.1V 760VDC 300 to 800V increases. { { {
level * The set value must be higher than the
Regeneration avoidance function
power supply voltage × 2

* The initial value differs according to the
voltage level. (200V class / 400V class)
Regeneration avoidance by bus voltage
0
Regeneration change ratio is invalid
avoidance at Set sensitivity to detect the bus voltage
884 deceleration
1 0 { { {
change.
1 to 5
detection sensitivity Setting: 1 → 5
Detection sensitivity: Low → High
Regeneration Set the limit value of frequency which rises
avoidance 0 to 10Hz at activation of regeneration avoidance
885 compensation
0.01Hz 6Hz function. { { {
frequency limit value 9999 Frequency limit invalid
Regeneration Adjust responsiveness at activation of
886 avoidance voltage 0.1% 100% 0 to 200% regeneration avoidance. Setting a larger { { {
value in Pr.886 will improve responsiveness
gain to the bus voltage change. However, the
output frequency could become unstable.
Regeneration When the load inertia of the motor is large,
665 avoidance 0.1% 100% 0 to 200% decrease the Pr. 886 setting. When vibration { { {
frequency gain is not suppressed by decreasing the Pr.886
setting, set a smaller value in Pr.665.
888 Free parameter 1 1 9999 0 to 9999 Parameters you can use for your own { × ×
parameter
purposes.
Free
Used for maintenance, management, etc.

889 Free parameter 2 1 9999 0 to 9999 by setting a unique number to each { × ×
inverter when multiple inverters are used.
126
Parameter List

All
Function
param
eter eter
Incre Initial eter
parameters
copy clear
Related
clear
Parameter List
× : disabled
Set the load factor for commercial power-
supply operation.
892 Load factor 0.1% 100% 30 to 150% This value is used to calculate the power { { {
consumption estimated value during
commercial power supply operation.
Set the motor capacity (pump capacity).
Energy saving Inverter Set when calculating power saving rate
0.01/ 0.1 to 55/ and average power saving rate value.
893 monitor reference
0.1kW *
rated
0 to 3600kW * * The increments and setting range differ
{ { {
(motor capacity) capacity according to the inverter capacity. (55K or
less/75k or more)
0 Discharge damper control (fan)
Control selection
1 Inlet damper control (fan)
during commercial
894 1 0 2 Valve control (pump) { { {
power-supply
Commercial power-supply drive (fixed
operation 3
value)
Energy saving monitor
Consider the value during commercial

0
Power saving rate power-supply operation as 100%
895 1 9999 { { {
reference value 1 Consider the Pr. 893 setting as 100%.
9999 No function
Set the power unit cost. Display the power
0 to 500
896 Power unit cost 0.01 9999 saving rate on the energy saving monitor { { {
9999 No function
Power saving 0 Average for 30 minutes
897 monitor average 1 9999 1 to 1000h Average for the set time { { {
time 9999 No function
0 Cumulative monitor value clear
1 Cumulative monitor value hold
Power saving
Cumulative monitor continue
898 cumulative monitor 1 9999 10 { × {
(communication data upper limit 9999)
clear
Cumulative monitor continue
9999
(communication data upper limit 65535)
Use for calculation of annual power saving
Operation time rate 0 to 100% amount. Set the annual operation ratio
899 0.1% 9999
(consider 365 days × 24hr as 100%).
{ { {
(estimated value)
9999 No function
C0 FM terminal Calibrate the scale of the meter connected
Adjustment of
--- --- --- { × {

terminal FM
(calibration)
(900) calibration to terminal FM. (Only when Pr. 291 = 0, 1)

and AM
C1 AM terminal
--- --- ---
Calibrate the scale of the analog meter
{ × {
(901) calibration connected to terminal AM.
C2(902)
— to Refer to Pr. 125 and Pr. 126.
C7(905)
3
DRIVE THE MOTOR
127
Parameter List

All
Function
param
eter eter
copy clear
Related
clear
× : disabled
C12 Terminal 1 bias Set the frequency on the bias side of
0.01Hz 0Hz 0 to 400Hz { × {
(917) frequency (speed) terminal 1 input. (valid when Pr.868 = 5)
Set the converted % of the bias side
C13 Terminal 1 bias
0.1% 0% 0 to 300% voltage (current) of terminal 1 input. (valid { × {
(917) (speed) when Pr.868 = 5)
C14 Terminal 1 gain Set the frequency of terminal 1 input gain
0.01Hz 60Hz 0 to 400Hz { × {
Adjustment of analog input torque magnetic flux command (calibration)
(918) frequency (speed) (maximum). (valid when Pr.868 = 5)

Set the converted % of the gain side
C15 Terminal 1 gain
0.1% 100% 0 to 300% voltage (current) of terminal 1 input. (valid { × {
(918) (speed) when Pr.868 = 5)
Terminal 1 bias Set the torque/magnetic flux command
C16
command (torque/ 0.1% 0% 0 to 400% value on the bias side of terminal 1 input. { × {
(919) magnetic flux) (valid when Pr. 868 ≠ 0, 5)
Terminal 1 bias Set the converted % of the bias side
C17
(torque/magnetic 0.1% 0% 0 to 300% voltage (current) of terminal 1 input. (valid { × {
(919) flux) when Pr. 868 ≠ 0, 5)
Terminal 1 gain Set the torque/magnetic flux command
C18
command (torque/ 0.1% 150% 0 to 400% value on the gain side of terminal 1 input. { × {
(920) magnetic flux) (valid when Pr. 868 ≠ 0, 5)
Terminal 1 gain Set the converted % of the gain side
C19
(torque/magnetic 0.1% 100% 0 to 300% voltage (current) of terminal 1 input. (valid { × {
(920) flux) when Pr. 868 ≠ 0, 5)
Terminal 4 bias Set the torque/magnetic flux command
C38
(932) magnetic flux) (valid when Pr. 858 = 1, 4)
Terminal 4 bias Set the converted % of the bias side
C39
(torque/magnetic 0.1% 20% 0 to 300% current (voltage) of terminal 4 input. (valid { × {
(932) flux) when Pr. 858 = 1, 4)
Terminal 4 gain Set the torque/magnetic flux command
C40
(933) magnetic flux) (valid when Pr. 858 = 1, 4)
Terminal 4 gain Set the converted % of the gain side
C41
(torque/magnetic 0.1% 100% 0 to 300% current (voltage) of terminal 4 input. (valid { × {
(933) flux) when Pr. 858 = 1, 4)
Parameters for alarm release at parameter
Parameter copy copy
— 989 1 10/100 * 10, 100 { × {
alarm release * The initial value differs according to the
0 Without buzzer
of the operation
Buzzer control
panel
990 PU buzzer control 1 1 { { {

1 With buzzer
PU contrast
Contrast adjustment of the LCD of the

adjustment
PU contrast parameter unit (FR-PU04/FR-PU07) can

991 1 58 0 to 63 { × {
adjustment be performed.
0 (Light) → 63 (Dark)
Setting "1" returns all parameters except calibration
Pr.CL Parameter clear 1 0 0, 1
parameters to the initial values.
Parameter clear,
ALLC All parameter clear 1 0 0, 1 Setting "1" returns all parameters to the initial values.
parameter copy
Er.CL Alarm history clear 1 0 0, 1 Setting "1" will clear eight past alarms.
0 Cancel
1 Read the source parameters to the operation panel.
PCPY Parameter copy 1 0 Write the parameters copied to the operation panel to the
2
destination inverter.
3 Verify parameters in the inverter and operation panel.
The parameter number in parentheses is the one for use with the parameter unit (FR-PU04/FR-PU07).
128
Reset method of protective function
4 TROUBLESHOOTING
When an alarm (major failures) occurs in the inverter, the protective function is activated bringing the inverter to an
alarm stop and the PU display automatically changes to any of the following error (alarm) indications.
If your fault does not correspond to any of the following errors or if you have any other problem, please contact your
sales representative.
• Retention of alarm output signal ......... When the magnetic contactor (MC) provided on the input side of the inverter is
opened at the activation of the protective function, the inverter's control power
will be lost and the alarm output will not be held.
• Alarm display ...................................... When the protective function is activated, the operation panel display
automatically switches to the above indication.
• Resetting method................................ When the protective function is activated, the inverter output is kept stopped.
Unless reset, therefore, the inverter cannot restart. (Refer to page 129.)
• When the protective function is activated, take the corresponding corrective action, then reset the inverter, and
resume operation.
Not doing so may lead to the inverter fault and damage.
Inverter alarm displays are roughly divided as below.

(1) Error Message
A message regarding operational fault and setting fault by the operation panel (FR-DU07) and parameter unit (FR-
PU04 /FR-PU07) is displayed.
The inverter does not shut off output.
(2) Warnings
The inverter does not shut off output even when a warning is displayed. However, failure to take appropriate
measures will lead to a major fault.
(3) Minor fault
The inverter does not shut off output.You can also output a minor fault signal by making parameter setting.
(4) Major fault
When the protective function is activated, the inverter output is shut off and an alarm is output.
4.1 Reset method of protective function

(1) Resetting the inverter
The inverter can be reset by performing any of the following operations. Note that the internal thermal integrated value
of the electronic thermal relay function and the number of retries are cleared (erased) by resetting the inverter.
Recover about 1s after reset is cancelled.
TROUBLESHOOTING
Operation 1: ..... Using the operation panel, press to reset the inverter.
(Enabled only when the inverter protective function is activated (major
fault) (Refer to page 135 for major fault.))
Operation 2: ...... Switch power off once, then switch it on again.

ON
OFF
Operation 3: . .... Turn on the reset signal (RES) for more than 0.1s. (If the RES signal is
4
kept on, "Err." appears (flickers) to indicate that the inverter is in a reset Inverter
status.)
RES
SD
129
List of alarm display
4.2 List of alarm display

Operation Panel Refer Operation Panel Refer
Name Name
Indication to Indication to
Output side earth (ground)
E--- Alarm history 144 E.GF 138
fault overcurrent
HOLD Operation panel lock 131 E.LF Output phase failure 138
Error message
External thermal relay

to
Er1 to 4 Parameter write error 131 E.OHT 138
operation *2
E.PTC* PTC thermistor operation 138
to E.OPT Option alarm 138
rE1 to 4 Copy operation error 132
E.OP3 Communication option alarm 139
Err. Error 132
to E. 1 to
OL Stall prevention (overcurrent) 133 Option alarm 139
E. 3
oL Stall prevention (overvoltage) 133 Parameter storage device
E.PE 139
alarm
RB Regenerative brake prealarm 134
E.PUE PU disconnection 139
Electronic thermal relay
Warnings
TH 134
function prealarm E.RET Retry count excess 140
PS PU stop 133 Parameter storage device
E.PE2* 139
alarm
MT Maintenance signal output 134
CP Parameter copy 134
/ E. 6 /
Speed limit indication

/ E. 7 / CPU error 140
SL 134 E.CPU
(Output during speed limit)
Operation panel power
Minor fault
supply short circuit, RS-485

FN Fan fault 134 E.CTE 140
Major fault
terminal power supply short

circuit
Overcurrent shut-off during 24VDC power output short
E.OC1 135 E.P24 141
acceleration circuit
Overcurrent shut-off during Output current detection
E.OC2 135 E.CDO* 141
constant speed value exceeded
Overcurrent shut-off during Inrush current limit circuit
E.OC3 135 E.IOH* 142
deceleration or stop alarm
Regenerative overvoltage Communication error
E.OV1 135 E.SER* 142
shut-off during acceleration (inverter)
Regenerative overvoltage E.AIE* Analog input error 142
E.OV2 136
shut-off during constant speed
Regenerative overvoltage shut- E.OS Over speed occurence 140
E.OV3 136
off during deceleration or stop
Major fault
Speed deviation excess

E.OSD 140
Inverter overload shut-off detection
E.THT 136
(electronic thermal relay function) E.OSD Open cable detection 141
Motor overload shut-off
E.THM 136
(electronic thermal relay function) E.OD Position error large 141
E.FIN Fin overheat 136 E.MB1
to
to Brake sequence error 140
E.IPF Instantaneous power failure 137 E.MB7
Brake transistor alarm E.EP Encoder phase error 141
E.BE 137
detection
Brake transistor alarm
E.UVT Undervoltage 137 E.BE 137
detection
E.ILF* Input phase failure 137 E.USB* USB communication error 142
E.OLT Stall prevention 137 Opposite rotation
E.11 142
deceleration error
E.13 Internal circuit error 142
* If an error occurs when using the FR-PU04, "Fault 14" is displayed on
the FR-PU04.
130
Causes and corrective actions
4.3 Causes and corrective actions

(1) Error Message
A message regarding operational troubles is displayed. Output is not shut off.
Operation Panel
HOLD
Indication
Name Operation panel lock
Description Operation lock mode is set. Operation other than is made invalid. (Refer to page 41.)
Check point --------------
Corrective action Press for 2s to release lock.
Operation Panel
Er1
Indication
Name Write disable error
1. You attempted to make parameter setting when Pr. 77 Parameter write selection has been set to
disable parameter write.
Description 2. Frequency jump setting range overlapped.
3. Adjustable 5 points V/F settings overlapped
4. The PU and inverter cannot make normal communication
1. Check the setting of Pr. 77 Parameter write selection (Refer to Instruction Manual (applied).)
2. Check the settings of Pr. 31 to 36 (frequency jump). (Refer to Instruction Manual (applied).)
Check point 3. Check the settings of Pr. 100 to Pr. 109 (adjustable 5 points V/F). (Refer to Instruction Manual
(applied).)
4. Check the connection of the PU and inverter.
Operation Panel
Er2
Indication
Name Write error during operation
When parameter write was performed during operation with a value other than "2" (writing is enabled
Description
independently of operation status in any operation mode) is set in Pr. 77 and the STF (STR) is on.
1. Check the Pr. 77 setting. (Refer to Instruction Manual (applied).)
Check point
2. Check that the inverter is not operating.
1. Set "2" in Pr. 77.
Corrective action
2. After stopping operation, make parameter setting.
Operation Panel
Er3
Indication
Name Calibration error
Description Analog input bias and gain calibration values are too close. TROUBLESHOOTING
Check point Check the settings of C3, C4, C6 and C7 (calibration functions). (Refer to Instruction Manual (applied).)
Operation Panel
Er4
Indication
Name Mode designation error
Description You attempted to make parameter setting in the NET operation mode when Pr. 77 is not "2".
1. Check that operation mode is "PU operation mode".
Check point
2. Check the Pr. 77 setting. (Refer to Instruction Manual (applied).)
1. After setting the operation mode to the "PU operation mode", make parameter setting. (Refer to page
Corrective action 54.)
2. After setting "2" in Pr. 77, make parameter setting. 4
131
Operation Panel
rE1
Indication
Name Parameter read error
Description An error occurred in the EEPROM on the operation panel side during parameter copy reading.
Check point --------------
· Make parameter copy again. (Refer to page 45.)
Corrective action
· Check for an operation panel (FR-DU07) failure. Please contact your sales representative.
Operation Panel
rE2
Indication
Name Parameter write error
1. You attempted to perform parameter copy write during operation.
Description
2. An error occurred in the EEPROM on the operation panel side during parameter copy writing.
Check point Is the FWD or REV LED of the operation panel (FR-DU07) lit or flickering?
1. After stopping operation, make parameter copy again. (Refer to page 45.)
Corrective action
2. Check for an operation panel (FR-DU07) failure. Please contact your sales representative.
Operation Panel
rE3
Indication
Name Parameter verification error
1. Data on the operation panel side and inverter side are different.
Description
2. An error occurred in the EEPROM on the operation panel side during parameter verification.
Check point Check for the parameter setting of the source inverter and inverter to be verified.
1. Press to continue verification.

Corrective action
Make parameter verification again. (Refer to page 47.)
2. Check for an operation panel (FR-DU07) failure. Please contact your sales representative.
Operation Panel
rE4
Indication
Name Model error
1. A different model was used for parameter write and verification during parameter copy.
Description
2. When parameter copy write is stopped after parameter copy read is stopped
1. Check that the verified inverter is the same model.
Check point 2. Check that the power is not turned off or an operation panel is not disconnected, etc. during
parameter copy read.
1. Use the same model (FR-A700 series) for parameter copy and verification.
Corrective action
2. Perform parameter copy read again.
Operation Panel
Err.
Indication
1. The RES signal is on
2. The PU and inverter cannot make normal communication (contact fault of the connector)
Description
3. When the control circuit power (R1/L11, S1/L21) and the main circuit power (R/L1, S/L2, T/L3) are
connected to a separate power, it may appear at turning on of the main circuit. It is not a fault.
1. Turn off the RES signal.
Corrective action
2. Check the connection of the PU and inverter.
132
(2) Warnings
When the protective function is activated, the output is not shut off.
Operation Panel FR-PU04
OL OL
Indication FR-PU07
Name Stall prevention (overcurrent)
When the output current (output torque during real sensorless vector control or vector
control) of the inverter exceeds the stall prevention operation level (Pr. 22 Stall prevention
During operation level, etc.), this function stops the increase in frequency until the overload
acceleration current decreases to prevent the inverter from resulting in overcurrent shut-off. When
the overload current has decreased below stall prevention operation level, this function
increases the frequency again.
During control) of the inverter exceeds the stall prevention operation level (Pr. 22 Stall prevention
constant- operation level, etc.), this function reduces frequency until the overload current
Description
speed decreases to prevent the inverter from resulting in overcurrent shut-off. When the
operation overload current has decreased below stall prevention operation level, this function
increases the frequency up to the set value.
control) of the inverter exceeds the stall prevention operation level (Pr. 22 Stall prevention
During operation level, etc.), this function stops the decrease in frequency until the overload
deceleration current decreases to prevent the inverter from resulting in overcurrent shut-off. When
the overload current has decreased below stall prevention operation level, this function
decreases the frequency again.
1. Check that the Pr. 0 Torque boost setting is not too large.
2. Check that the Pr. 7 Acceleration time and Pr. 8 Deceleration time settings are not too small.
3. Check that the load is not too heavy.
Check point 4. Are there any failure in peripheral devices?
5. Check that the Pr. 13 Starting frequency is not too large.
· Check the motor for use under overload.
1. Increase or decrease the Pr. 0 Torque boost value 1% by 1% and check the motor status. (Refer to page 51.)
2. Set a larger value in Pr. 7 Acceleration time and Pr. 8 Deceleration time. (Refer to page 53.)
3. Reduce the load weight.
4. Try advanced magnetic flux vector control or real sensorless vector control or vector control.
Corrective action 5. Change the Pr. 14 Load pattern selection setting.
6. Set stall prevention operation current in Pr. 22 Stall prevention operation level. (The initial value is
150%.) The acceleration/deceleration time may change. Increase the stall prevention operation level
with Pr. 22 Stall prevention operation level, or disable stall prevention with Pr. 156 Stall prevention
operation selection. (Use Pr. 156 to set either operation continued or not at OL operation.)

oL oL
Indication FR-PU07
Name Stall prevention (overvoltage)
· If the regenerative energy of the motor becomes excessive and exceeds the
regenerative energy consumption capability, this function stops the decrease in
frequency to prevent overvoltage shut-off. As soon as the regenerative energy has
TROUBLESHOOTING
During
Description decreased, deceleration resumes.
deceleration · If the regenerative energy of the motor becomes excessive when regeneration
avoidance function is selected (Pr. 882 = 1), this function increases the speed to
prevent overvoltage shut-off. (Refer to Instruction Manual (applied).)
· Check for sudden speed reduction.
Check point · Regeneration avoidance function (Pr. 882 to Pr. 886) is being used? (Refer to Instruction Manual
(applied).)
The deceleration time may change.
Corrective action
Increase the deceleration time using Pr. 8 Deceleration time.

Indication
PS
FR-PU07
PS 4
Name PU stop
Description Stop with of the PU is set in Pr. 75 Reset selection/disconnected PU detection/PU stop selection. (For Pr.
75, refer to Instruction Manual (applied).)
Check point Check for a stop made by pressing of the operation panel.
Corrective action Turn the start signal off and release with .
133

RB RB
Indication FR-PU07
Name Regenerative brake prealarm
Appears if the regenerative brake duty reaches or exceeds 85% of the Pr. 70 Special regenerative brake
duty value. If the regenerative brake duty reaches 100%, a regenerative overvoltage (E. OV_) occurs.
Description The RBP signal can be simultaneously output with the [RB] display. For the terminal used for the RBP
signal output, assign the function by setting "7" (positive logic) or "107" (negative logic) in any of Pr. 190
to Pr. 196 (output terminal function selection). (Refer to Instruction Manual (applied))
• Check that the brake resistor duty is not high.
Check point • Check that the Pr. 30 Regenerative function selection and Pr. 70 Special regenerative brake duty values are
correct.
• Increase the deceleration time.
Corrective action
• Check the Pr. 30 Regenerative function selection and Pr. 70 Special regenerative brake duty values.

TH TH
Indication FR-PU07
Name Electronic thermal relay function prealarm
Appears if the cumulative value of the Pr. 9 Electronic thermal O/L relay reaches or exceeds 85% of the
preset level. If it reaches 100% of the Pr. 9 Electronic thermal O/L relay setting, a motor overload shut-off
(E. THM) occurs.
Description The THP signal can be simultaneously output with the [TH] display. For the terminal used for the THP
signal output, assign the function by setting "8" (positive logic) or "108" (negative logic) in any of Pr. 190
to Pr. 196 (output terminal function selection). (Refer to Instruction Manual (applied))
1. Check for large load or sudden acceleration.
Check point
2. Is the Pr. 9 Electronic thermal O/L relay setting is appropriate? (Refer to page 49.)
1. Reduce the load weight or the number of operation times.
Corrective action
2. Set an appropriate value in Pr. 9 Electronic thermal O/L relay. (Refer to page 49.)
Operation Panel FR-PU04 ————

MT
Indication FR-PU07 MT
Name Maintenance signal output
Description Indicates that the cumulative energization time of the inverter has reached a given time.
The Pr. 503 Maintenance timer setting is larger than the Pr. 504 Maintenance timer alarm output set time
Check point
setting. (Refer to Instruction Manual (applied).)
Corrective action Setting "0" in Pr. 503 Maintenance timer erraces the signal.

CP
Indication FR-PU07 CP
Name Parameter copy
Description Appears when parameters are copied between models with capacities of 55K or less and 75K or more.
Resetting of Pr.9, Pr.30, Pr.51, Pr.52, Pr.54, Pr.56, Pr.57, Pr.61, Pr.70, Pr.72, Pr.80, Pr.82, Pr.90 to Pr.94,
Check point
Pr.158, Pr.455, Pr.458 to Pr.462, Pr.557, Pr.859, Pr.860 and Pr.893 is necessary.
Corrective action Set the initial value in Pr. 989 Parameter copy alarm release.

SL
Indication FR-PU07 SL
Name Speed limit indication (output during speed limit)
Description Output if the speed limit level is exceeded during torque control.
• Check that the torque command is not larger than required.
Check point
• Check that the speed limit level is not low.
• Decrease the torque command.
Corrective action
• Increase the speed limit level.
(3) Minor fault

When the protective function is activated, the output is not shut off. You can also output a minor fault signal by
making parameter setting. (Set "98" in any of Pr. 190 to Pr. 196 (output terminal function selection). (Refer to
Instruction Manual (applied).))
FN FN
Indication FR-PU07
Name Fan fault
Description For the inverter that contains a cooling fan, appears on the operation panel when the cooling fan
stops due to a fault or different operation from the setting of Pr. 244 Cooling fan operation selection.
Check point Check the cooling fan for a fault.
Corrective action Check for fan fault. Please contact your sales representative.
134
(4) Major fault

When the protective function is activated, the inverter output is shut off and an alarm is output.
E.OC1 OC During Accs
Indication FR-PU07
Name Overcurrent shut-off during acceleration
When the inverter output current reaches or exceeds approximately 220% of the rated current during
Description
acceleration, the protective circuit is activated to stop the inverter output.
1. Check for sudden acceleration.
2. Check that the downward acceleration time is not long in vertical lift application.
3. Check for output short circuit.
4. Check that the Pr. 3 Base frequency setting is not 60Hz when the motor rated frequency is 50Hz.
Check point 5. Check that stall prevention operation is correct.
6. Check that the regeneration is not performed frequently. (Check that the output voltage becomes
larger than the V/F reference voltage at regeneration and overcurrent due to increase in motor
current occurs.)
7. Check that the power supply for RS-485 terminal is not shorted. (under vector control)
1. Increase the acceleration time.
(Shorten the downward acceleration time in vertical lift application.)
2. When "E.OC1" is always lit at starting, disconnect the motor once and start the inverter.
If "E.OC1" is still lit, contact your sales representative.
3. Check the wiring to make sure that output short circuit does not occur.
Corrective action 4. Set the Pr. 3 Base frequency to 50Hz. (Refer to page 50.)
5. Perform a correct stall prevention operation. (Refer to Instruction Manual (applied).)
6. Set base voltage (rated voltage of the motor, etc.) in Pr. 19 Base frequency voltage. (Refer to
7. Check RS-485 terminal connection. (under vector control)

E.OC2 Stedy Spd OC
Indication FR-PU07
Name Overcurrent shut-off during constant speed
When the inverter output current reaches or exceeds approximately 220% of the rated current during
Description
constant speed operation, the protective circuit is activated to stop the inverter output.
1. Check for sudden load change.
Check point
3. Check that stall prevention operation is correct
1. Keep load stable.
2. Check the wiring to avoid output short circuit.
Corrective action
3. Check that stall prevention operation setting is correct. (Refer to Instruction Manual (applied).)

E.OC3 OC During Dec
Indication FR-PU07 TROUBLESHOOTING
Name Overcurrent shut-off during deceleration or stop
When the inverter output current reaches or exceeds approximately 220% of the rated inverter current
Description during deceleration (other than acceleration or constant speed), the protective circuit is activated to
stop the inverter output.
1. Check for sudden speed reduction.
Check point 3. Check for too fast operation of the motor's mechanical brake.
4. Check that stall prevention operation setting is correct.
1. Increase the deceleration time.
2. Check the wiring to avoid output short circuit.
Corrective action 3. Check the mechanical brake operation.
4. Check that stall prevention operation setting is correct.(Refer to Instruction Manual (applied).) 4

E.OV1 OV During Acc
Indication FR-PU07
Name Regenerative overvoltage shut-off during acceleration
If regenerative energy causes the inverter's internal main circuit DC voltage to reach or exceed the
Description specified value, the protective circuit is activated to stop the inverter output. The circuit may also be
activated by a surge voltage produced in the power supply system.
Check point Check for too slow acceleration. (e.g. during descending acceleration with lifting load)
· Decrease the acceleration time.
Corrective action
· Use regeneration avoidance function (Pr. 882 to Pr. 886). (Refer to Instruction Manual (applied).)
135

E.OV2 Stedy Spd OV
Indication FR-PU07
Name Regenerative overvoltage shut-off during constant speed
Check point Check for sudden load change.
· Keep load stable.
Corrective action · Use regeneration avoidance function (Pr. 882 to Pr. 886). (Refer to Instruction Manual (applied).)
· Use the brake unit or power regeneration common converter (FR-CV) as required.

E.OV3 OV During Dec
Indication FR-PU07
Name Regenerative overvoltage shut-off during deceleration or stop
Check point Check for sudden speed reduction.
· Increase the deceleration time. (Set the deceleration time which matches the inertia of moment of
the load)
Corrective action · Decrease the braking duty.
· Use regeneration avoidance function (Pr. 882 to Pr. 886). (Refer to Instruction Manual (applied).)
· Use the brake unit or power regeneration common converter (FR-CV) as required.

E.THT Inv. Overload
Indication FR-PU07
Name Inverter overload shut-off (electronic thermal relay function) *1
If a current not less than 150% of the rated output current flows and overcurrent shut-off does not occur
Description (220% or less), inverse-time characteristics cause the electronic thermal relay to be activated to stop
the inverter output in order to protect the output transistors. (overload immunity 150% 60s)
Check point Check the motor for use under overload.
Corrective action Reduce the load weight.

E.THM Motor Overload
Indication FR-PU07
Name Motor overload shut-off (electronic thermal relay function) *1
The electronic thermal relay function in the inverter detects motor overheat due to overload or reduced
cooling capability during constant-speed operation and pre-alarm (TH display) is output when the
temperature reaches 85% of the Pr. 9 Electronic thermal O/L relay setting and the protection circuit is
Description
activated to stop the inverter output when the temperature reaches the specified value. When running
a special motor such as a multi-pole motor or multiple motors, provide a thermal relay on the inverter
output side since such motor(s) cannot be protected by the electronic thermal relay function.
1. Check the motor for use under overload.
2. Check that the setting of Pr. 71 Applied motor for motor selection is correct. (Refer to Instruction
Check point
Manual (applied).)
3. Check that stall prevention operation setting is correct.
1. Reduce the load weight.
Corrective action 2. For a constant-torque motor, set the constant-torque motor in Pr. 71 Applied motor.
3. Check that stall prevention operation setting is correct. (Refer to Instruction Manual (applied).)
*1 Resetting the inverter initializes the internal thermal integrated data of the electronic thermal relay function.

E.FIN H/Sink O/Temp
Indication FR-PU07
Name Fin overheat
If the heatsink overheats, the temperature sensor is actuated to stop the inverter output.
The FIN signal can be output when the temperature becomes approximately 85% of the heatsink
overheat protection operation temperature.
Description For the terminal used for the FIN signal output, assign the function by setting "26" (positive logic) or
"126" (negative logic) in any of Pr. 190 to Pr. 196 (output terminal function selection). (Refer to
Instruction Manual (applied))
1. Check for too high ambient temperature.
Check point 2. Check for heatsink clogging.
3. Check that the cooling fan is stopped. (Check that is displayed on the operation panel.)
1. Set the ambient temperature to within the specifications.
Corrective action 2. Clean the heatsink.
3. Replace the cooling fan.
136

E.IPF Inst. Pwr. Loss
Indication FR-PU07
Name Instantaneous power failure
If a power failure occurs for longer than 15ms (this also applies to inverter input shut-off), the instantaneous
power failure protective function is activated to stop the inverter output in order to prevent the control circuit
from malfunctioning. If a power failure persists for longer than 100ms, the alarm warning output is not provided,
Description and the inverter restarts if the start signal is on upon power restoration. (The inverter continues operating if an
instantaneous power failure is within 15ms.) In some operating status (load magnitude, acceleration/
deceleration time setting, etc.), overcurrent or other protection may be activated upon power restoration.
When instantaneous power failure protection is activated, the IPF signal is output. (Refer to Instruction Manual (applied))
Check point Find the cause of instantaneous power failure occurrence.
· Remedy the instantaneous power failure.
· Prepare a backup power supply for instantaneous power failure.
Corrective action
· Set the function of automatic restart after instantaneous power failure (Pr. 57). (Refer to

E.BE Br. Cct. Fault
Indication FR-PU07
Name Brake transistor alarm detection
This function stops the inverter output if an alarm occurs in the brake circuit, e.g. damaged brake transistors.
Description
In this case, the inverter must be powered off immediately.
· Reduce the load inertia.
Check point
· Check that the frequency of using the brake is proper.
Corrective action Replace the inverter.

E.UVT Under Voltage
Indication FR-PU07
Name Undervoltage
If the power supply voltage of the inverter decreases, the control circuit will not perform normal functions.
In addition, the motor torque wiil be insufficient and/or heat generation will increase. To prevent this, if
the power supply voltage decreases below about 150VAC (300VAC for the 400V class), this function
Description stops the inverter output.
When a jumper is not connected across P/+-P1, the undervoltage protective function is activated.
When undervoltage protection is activated, the IPF signal is output. (Refer to Instruction Manual
(applied))
1. Check for start of large-capacity motor.
Check point
2. Check that a jumper or DC reactor is connected across terminals P/+-P1.
1. Check the power supply system equipment such as the power supply.
Corrective action 2. Connect a jumper or DC reactor across terminals P/+-P1.
If the problem still persists after taking the above measure, please contact your sales representative.
Operation Panel FR-PU04 Fault 14

E.ILF
Indication FR-PU07 Input phase loss
Name
TROUBLESHOOTING
Input phase failure
This alarm is output when function valid setting (=1) is set in Pr. 872 Input phase failure protection selection and
Description
one phase of the three phase power input opens. (Refer to Instruction Manual (applied).)
Check point Check for a break in the cable for the three-phase power supply input.
· Wire the cables properly.
Corrective action · Repair a brake portion in the cable.
· Check the Pr. 872 Input phase failure protection selection setting.
Operation Panel FR-PU04 Still Prev STP ( OL shown during stall

E.OLT
Indication FR-PU07 prevention operation)
Name Stall prevention
If the frequency has fallen to 0.5Hz by stall prevention operation and remains for 3s, an alarm (E.OLT)
appears to shutoff the inverter output. OL appears while stall prevention is being activated.
Description
When speed control is performed by real sensorless vector control or vector control, an alarm (E.OLT) 4
is displayed and the inverter output is stopped if frequency drops to the Pr. 865 Low speed detection
(initial value is 1.5Hz) setting by torque limit operation and the output torque exceeds Pr. 874 OLT level
setting (initial value is 150%) setting and remains for more than 3s.
· Check the motor for use under overload. (Refer to the Instruction Manual (applied).)
Check point · Check that the Pr. 865 Low speed detection and Pr. 874 OLT level setting values are correct. (Check the
Pr. 22 Stall prevention operation level setting if V/F control is exercised.)
· Reduce the load weight.
Corrective action · Change the Pr. 22 Stall prevention operation level, Pr. 865 Low speed detection and Pr. 874 OLT level
setting values. (Check the Pr. 22 Stall prevention operation level setting if V/F control is exercised.)
137

E.GF Ground Fault
Indication FR-PU07
Name Output side earth (ground) fault overcurrent
This function stops the inverter output if an earth (ground) fault overcurrent flows due to an earth
Description
(ground) fault that occurred on the inverter's output (load) side.
Check point Check for an earth (ground) fault in the motor and connection cable.
Corrective action Remedy the earth (ground) fault portion.

Indication
E.LF 
FR-PU07
Name Output phase failure
This function stops the inverter output if one of the three phases (U, V, W) on the inverter's output side
Description
(load side) opens.
· Check the wiring (Check that the motor is normal.)
Check point
· Check that the capacity of the motor used is not smaller than that of the inverter.
· Wire the cables properly.
Corrective action
· Check the Pr. 251 Output phase failure protection selection setting.

E.OHT OH Fault
Indication FR-PU07
Name External thermal relay operation *2
If the external thermal relay provided for motor overheat protection, or the internally mounted
Description
temperature relay in the motor, etc. switches on (contacts open), the inverter output is stopped.
· Check for motor overheating.
Check point
· Check that the value of 7 (OH signal) is set correctly in any of Pr. 178 to Pr. 189 (input terminal function selection).
· Reduce the load and operating duty.
Corrective action
· Even if the relay contacts are reset automatically, the inverter will not restart unless it is reset.
*2 Functions only when any of Pr. 178 to Pr. 189 (input terminal function selection) is set to OH.

E.PTC
Indication FR-PU07 PTC activated
Name PTC thermistor operation
Appears when the motor overheat status is detected for 10s or more by the external PTC thermistor
Description
input connected to the terminal AU.
· Check the connection between the PTC thermistor switch and thermal protector.
· Check the motor for operation under overload.
Check point
· Is valid setting ( = 63) selected in Pr. 184 AU terminal function selection ? (Refer to Instruction
Manual (applied).)
Corrective action Reduce the load weight.

E.OPT Option Fault
Indication FR-PU07
Name Option alarm
Appears when the AC power supply is connected to the terminal R/L1, S/L2, T/L3 accidentally when a
high power factor converter is connected.
Description Appears when torque command by the plug-in option is selected using Pr. 804 Torque command source
selection and no plug-in option is mounted.
Appears when the switch for the manufacturer setting of the plug-in option is changed.
· Check that the AC power supply is not connected to the terminal R/L1, S/L2, T/L3 when a high power
Check point factor converter (FR-HC, MT-HC) or power regeneration common converter (FR-CV) is connected.
· Check that the plug-in option for torque command setting is connected.
· Check the parameter (Pr. 30) setting and wiring.
· The inverter may be damaged if the AC power supply is connected to the terminal R/L1, S/L2, T/L3
when a high power factor converter is connected. Please contact your sales representative.
Corrective action · Check for connection of the plug-in option. Check the Pr. 804 Torque command source selection setting.
· Return the switch for the manufacturer setting of the plug-in option to the initial status. (Refer to
instruction manual of each option)
138

E.OP3 Option slot alarm 3
Indication FR-PU07
Name Communication option alarm
Description Stops the inverter output when a communication line error occurs in the communication option.
· Check for a wrong option function setting and operation.
· Check that the plug-in option is plugged into the connector securely.
Check point · Check for a brake in the communication cable.
· Check that the terminating resistor is fitted properly.
· Check the option function setting, etc.
Corrective action · Connect the plug-in option securely.
· Check the connection of communication cable.
Operation Panel E. 1 to to FR-PU04

Fault 1 to Fault 3
Indication E. 3 FR-PU07
Name Option alarm

Stops the inverter output if a contact faullt or the like of the connector between the inverter and
Description communication option occurs or if a communication option is fitted to the connector 1 or 2.
Appears when the switch for the manufacturer setting of the plug-in option is changed.
1. Check that the plug-in option is plugged into the connector securely.
(1 to 3 indicate the option connector numbers.)
Check point
2. Check for excess electrical noises around the inverter.
3. Check that the communication option is not fitted to the connector 1 or 2.
1. Connect the plug-in option securely.
2. Take measures against noises if there are devices producing excess electrical noises around the inverter.
If the problem still persists after taking the above measure, please contact your sales representative
Corrective action or distributor.
3. Fit the communication option to the connector 3.
4. Return the switch for the manufacturer setting of the plug-in option to the initial status. (Refer to
instruction manual of each option)

E.PE Corrupt Memry
Indication FR-PU07
Name Parameter storage device alarm (control circuit board)
Description A fault occurred in parameters stored (EEPROM failure)
Check point Check for too many number of parameter write times.
Please contact your sales representative.
Corrective action When performing parameter write frequently for communication purposes, set "1" in Pr. 342 to enable
RAM write. Note that powering off returns the inverter to the status before RAM write.

Indication
E.PE2
FR-PU07 PR storage alarm TROUBLESHOOTING
Name Parameter storage device alarm (main circuit board)
Description A fault occurred in parameters stored (EEPROM failure)
Check point ——————
Corrective action Please contact your sales representative.

E.PUE PU Leave Out
Indication FR-PU07
Name PU disconnection
This function stops the inverter output if communication between the inverter and PU is suspended,
e.g. the operation panel and parameter unit is disconnected, when "2", "3", "16" or "17" was set in Pr. 75
Reset selection/disconnected PU detection/PU stop selection. This function stops the inverter output when 4
Description communication errors occurred consecutively for more than permissible number of retries when a
value other than "9999" is set in Pr. 121 Number of PU communication retries during the RS-485
communication with the PU connector. This function also stops the inverter output if communication is
broken for the period of time set in Pr. 122 PU communication check time interval.
· Check that the FR-DU07 or parameter unit (FR-PU04/FR-PU07) is fitted tightly.
Check point
· Check the Pr. 75 setting.
Corrective action Fit the FR-DU07 or parameter unit (FR-PU04/FR-PU07) securely.
139

E.RET Retry No Over
Indication FR-PU07
Name Retry count excess
If operation cannot be resumed properly within the number of retries set, this function stops the inverter
Description
output.
Check point Find the cause of alarm occurrence.
Corrective action Eliminate the cause of the error preceding this error indication.
E. 6 Fault 6
E. 7 Fault 7
Indication FR-PU07
E.CPU CPU Fault
Name CPU error
Description Stops the inverter output if the communication error of the built-in CPU occurs.
Check point Check for devices producing excess electrical noises around the inverter.
· Take measures against noises if there are devices producing excess electrical noises around the
Corrective action inverter.
· Please contact your sales representative.
Operation Panel FR-PU04 

E.CTE
Indication FR-PU07 E.CTE
Name Operation panel power supply short circuit, RS-485 terminal power supply short circuit
When the operation panel power supply (PU connector) is shorted, this function shuts off the power
output. At this time, the operation panel (parameter unit) cannot be used and RS-485 communication
from the PU connector cannot be made. When the power supply for the RS-485 terminals are shorted,
Description
this function shuts off the power output.
At this time, communication from the RS-485 terminals cannot be made.
To reset, enter the RES signal or switch power off, then on again.
1. Check for a short circuit in the PU connector cable.
Check point
2. Check that the RS-485 terminals are connected correctly.
1. Check the PU and cable.
Corrective action
2. Check the connection of the RS-485 terminals
FR-PU04 
Operation Panel
E.MB1 to 7 to
Indication FR-PU07 E.MB1 Fault to E.MB7 Fault
Name Brake sequence error
The inverter output is stopped when a sequence error occurs during use of the brake sequence
Description
function (Pr. 278 to Pr. 285).
Check point Find the cause of alarm occurrence.
Corrective action Check the set parameters and perform wiring properly.

E.OS Overspeed occurrence
Indication FR-PU07
Name Over speed occurence
Appears when the motor speed reaches and exceedes the overspeed setting level under encoder
Description
feedback control or vector control.
· Check that the Pr. 374 Overspeed detection level value is correct.
Check point
· Check that the number of encoder pulses does not differ from the actual number of encoder pulses.
· Set the Pr. 374 Overspeed detection level value correctly.
Corrective action
· Set the correct number of encoder pulses in Pr. 369 Number of encoder pulses.

E.OSD Excessive speed deflection
Indication FR-PU07
Name Speed deviation excess detection
Stops the inverter output if the motor speed is increased or decreased under the influence of the load
Description
etc. during vector control and cannot be controlled in accordance with the speed command value.
· Check that the values of Pr.285 Excessive speed deviation detection frequency and Pr.853 Speed deviation
time are correct.
Check point
· Check for sudden load change.
· Check that the number of encoder pulses does not differ from the actual number of encoder pulses.
· Set Pr.285 Excessive speed deviation detection frequency and Pr.853 Speed deviation time correctly.
Corrective action · Keep load stable.
· Set the correct number of encoder pulses in Pr. 369 Number of encoder pulses.
140

E.ECT No encoder signal
Indication FR-PU07
Name Open cable detection
Stops the inverter output when the encoder signal is shut off under orientation control, encoder
Description
feedback control or vector control.
· Check for the encoder signal loss.
· Check that the encoder specifications are correct.
· Check for a loose connector.
Check point
· Check that the switch setting of the FR-A7AP is correct.
· Check that the power is supplied to the encoder. Or, check that the power is not supplied to the
encoder later than the inverter.
· Remedy the open cable.
· Use an encoder that meets the specifications.
· Make connection securely.
· Make a switch setting of the FR-A7AP correctly. (Refer to page 29)
Corrective action
· Supply the power to the encoder. Or supply the power to the encoder at the same time when the
power is supplied to the inverter.
If the power is supplied to the encoder after the inverter, check that the encoder signal is securely
sent and set "0" in Pr.376.

E.EOD
Indication FR-PU07 Excessive position error
Name Position error large
Indicates that the difference between the position command and position feedback exceeded the
Description
reference under position control.
· Check that the position detecting encoder mounting orientation matches the parameter.
Check point · Check that the load is not large.
· Check that the Pr. 427 Excessive level error and Pr. 369 Number of encoder pulses are correct.
· Check the parameters.
Corrective action · Reduce the load weight.
· Set the Pr. 427 Excessive level error and Pr. 369 Number of encoder pulses correctly.

E.EP
Indication FR-PU07 E.EP
Name Encoder phase error
The rotation command of the inverter differs from the actual motor rotation direction detected from the
Description
encoder during offline auto tuning.
· Check for mis-wiring of the encoder cable.
Check point
· Check for wrong setting of Pr. 359 Encoder rotation direction.
· Perform connection and wiring securely.
Corrective action
· Change the Pr. 359 Encoder rotation direction value.
TROUBLESHOOTING
E.P24 E.P24
Indication FR-PU07
Name 24VDC power output short circuit
When the 24VDC power output from the PC terminal is shorted, this function shuts off the power output.
Description At this time, all external contact inputs switch off. The inverter cannot be reset by entering the RES
signal. To reset it, use the operation panel or switch power off, then on again.
Check point · Check for a short circuit in the PC terminal output.
Corrective action · Remedy the earth (ground) fault portion.

E.CDO
Indication FR-PU07 OC detect level
Name Output current detection value exceeded 4
This function is activated when the output current exceeds the Pr. 150 Output current detection level
Description
setting.
Check the settings of Pr. 150 Output current detection level, Pr. 151 Output current detection signal delay time,
Check point Pr. 166 Output current detection signal retention time, Pr. 167 Output current detection operation selection.
141

E.IOH
Indication FR-PU07 Inrush overheat
Name Inrush current limit circuit alarm
This function is activated when the resistor of the inrush current limit circuit overheats. The inrush
Description
current limit circuit failure
Check point Check that frequent power ON/OFF is not repeated.
Configure a circuit where frequent power ON/OFF is not repeated.
Corrective action
If the problem still persists after taking the above measure, please contact your sales representative.

E.SER
Indication FR-PU07 VFD Comm error
Name Communication error (inverter)
This function stops the inverter output when communication error occurs consecutively for more than
permissible retry count when a value other than "9999" is set in Pr. 335 RS-485 communication retry count
Description
during RS-485 communication from the RS-485 terminals. This function also stops the inverter output if
communication is broken for the period of time set in Pr. 336 RS-485 communication check time interval.
Check point Check the RS-485 terminal wiring.
Corrective action Perform wiring of the RS-485 terminals properly.

E.AIE
Indication FR-PU07 Analog in error
Name Analog input error
Appears when 30mA or more is input or a voltage (7.5V or more) is input with the terminal 2/4 set to
Description
current input.
Check the setting of Pr. 73 Analog input selection and Pr. 267 Terminal 4 input selection. (Refer to
Check point
Either give a frequency command by current input or set Pr. 73 Analog input selection or Pr. 267 Terminal
Corrective action
4 input selection to voltage input.

E.USB
Indication FR-PU07 USB comm error
Name USB communication error
When the time set in Pr. 548 USB communication check time interval has broken, this function stops the
Description
inverter output.
Check point Check the USB communication cable.
· Check the Pr. 548 USB communication check time interval setting.
· Check the USB communication cable.
Corrective action · Increase the Pr. 548 USB communication check time interval setting. Or, change the setting to 9999.
(Refer to Instruction Manual (applied))

E.11 Fault 11
Indication FR-PU07
Name Opposite rotation deceleration error
The speed may not decelerate during low speed operation if the rotation direction of the speed
command and the estimated speed differ when the rotation is changing from forward to reverse (or
Description
from reverse to forward) under real sensorless vector control. At this time, the inverter output is
stopped if the rotation direction will not change, causing overload.
· Check that the Pr. 71 Applied motor setting is appropriate.
Check point
· Check that offline auto tuning and online auto tuning have been performed.
· Check the setting of Pr. 71 Applied motor.
Corrective action · Perform offline auto tuning, then online auto tuning.
· Please contact your sales representative.

E.13 Fault 13
Indication FR-PU07
Name Internal circuit error
Description Appears when an internal circuit error occurred.
Corrective action Please contact your sales representative.
CAUTION
• If protective functions of E.ILF, E.PTC, E.PE2, E.EP, E.OD, E.CDO, E.IOH, E.SER, E.AIE, E.USB are activated when using the
FR-PU04, "Fault 14" appears.
Also when the alarm history is checked on the FR-PU04, the display is "E.14".
• If alarms other than the above appear, contact your sales representative.
142
Correspondences between digital and
actual characters
4.4 Correspondences between digital and actual characters

There are the following correspondences between the actual alphanumeric characters and the digital characters
displayed on the operation panel.
Actual Digital Actual Digital Actual Digital
0 A M
1 B N
2 C O
3 D o
4 E P
5 F S
6 G T
7 H U
8 I V
9 J r
L
-
TROUBLESHOOTING
143
Check and clear of the alarm history
4.5 Check and clear of the alarm history

(1) Check for the alarm (major fault) history
Monitor/frequency setting Parameter setting

[Operation panel is used
[Parameter setting change]
for operation]
Alarm history
[Operation for displaying alarm history]
Eight past alarms can be displayed with the setting dial.
(The latest alarm is ended by ".".)
When no alarm exists, is displayed.
Output frequency Output current
Flickering
Energization time Output voltage
Alarm history number
(The number of past alarms is displayed.)
Press the
setting
dial.
Flickering
Press the
setting
dial.
Flickering
Press the
setting
dial.
144
Check and clear of the alarm history
(2) Clearing procedure
POINT
· The alarm history can be cleared by setting "1" in Er.CL Alarm history clear. (The alarm history is not cleared when
"1" is set in Pr. 77 Parameter write selection)
Operation Display
The parameter
number previously
setting mode. read appears.
3.
appears.

5.Turn to change it to the

setting value " ".
6.Press to set.
Flicker ··· Alarm history clear complete!!

· Press to read another parameter.
TROUBLESHOOTING
145
Check first when you have troubles
4.6 Check first when you have troubles
POINT
If the cause is still unknown after every check, it is recommended to initialize the parameters (initial value) then reset
the required parameter values and check again.
4.6.1 Motor does not rotate as commanded

1) Check the Pr.0 Torque boost setting if V/F control is exercised.
2) Check the main circuit
Check that a proper power supply voltage is applied (operation panel display is provided).
Check that the motor is connected properly.
Check that the jumper across P/+-P1 is connected.
3) Check the input signals
Check that start signal is input.
Check that both the forward and reverse rotation start signals are not input simultaneously.
Check that the frequency setting signal is not zero. (When the frequency command is 0Hz and the
start command is entered, FWD or REV LED on the operation panel flickers.)
Check that the AU signal is on when the frequency setting signal is 4 to 20mA.
Check that the output stop signal (MRS) or reset signal (RES) is not on.
Check that the CS signal is not OFF with automatic restart after instantaneous power failure function
is selected (Pr. 57 ≠ "9999").
Check that the sink or source jumper connector is fitted securely. (Refer to page 23)
4) Check the parameter settings
Check that Pr. 78 Reverse rotation prevention selection is not selected.
Check that the Pr. 79 Operation mode selection setting is correct.
Check that the bias and gain (calibration parameter C2 to C7) settings are correct.
Check that the Pr. 13 Starting frequency setting is not greater than the running frequency.
Check that frequency settings of each running frequency (such as multi-speed operation) are not zero.
Check that especially the Pr. 1 Maximum frequency setting is not zero.
Check that the Pr. 15 Jog frequency setting is not lower than the Pr. 13 Starting frequency setting.
5) Inspection of load
Check that the load is not too heavy.
Check that the shaft is not locked.
4.6.2 Motor generates abnormal noise

No carrier frequency noises (metallic noises) are generated.
Soft-PWM control to change the motor tone into an unoffending complex tone is factory-set to valid
by Pr. 72 PWM frequency selection.
Adjust Pr. 72 PWM frequency selection to change the motor tone.
Check that the gain value under real sensorless vector control or vector control is not too high. Check the
setting of Pr. 820 (Pr. 830) Speed control P gain when speed control is exercised and Pr. 824 (Pr. 834) Torque
control P gain when torque control is exercised.
Check for any mechanical looseness.
Contact the motor manufacturer.
4.6.3 Motor generates heat abnormally

Is the fan for the motor is running? (Check for accumulated dust.)
Check that the load is not too heavy. Lighten the load.
Check that the inverter output voltages (U, V, W) balanced.
Check that the Pr. 0 Torque boost setting is correct.
Was the motor type set? Check the setting of Pr. 71 Applied motor.
When using any other manufacturer's motor, perform offline auto tuning. (Refer to page 63.)
146
4.6.4 Motor rotates in opposite direction

Check that the phase sequence of output terminals U, V and W is correct.
Check that the start signals (forward rotation, reverse rotation) are connected properly. (Refer to page 78)
4.6.5 Speed greatly differs from the setting

Check that the frequency setting signal is correct. (Measure the input signal level.)
Check that the Pr. 1, Pr. 2, Pr. 19, Calibration parameter C2 to C7 settings are correct
Check that the input signal lines are not affected by external noise.
(Use shielded cables)
Check that the Pr. 31 to Pr. 36 (frequency jump) settings are correct.
4.6.6 Acceleration/deceleration is not smooth

Check that the acceleration and deceleration time settings are not too short.
Check that the torque boost (Pr. 0, Pr. 46, Pr. 112) setting is not too large to activate the stall function (torque
limit).
4.6.7 Motor current is large

Check that the Pr. 0 Torque boost setting is correct.
Check that the Pr. 3 Base frequency setting is correct.
Check that the Pr. 14 Load pattern selection setting is appropriate.
Check that the Pr. 19 Base frequency voltage setting is correct.
4.6.8 Speed does not increase

Check that the maximum frequency (Pr. 1) setting is correct. (If you want to run the motor at 120Hz or
more, set Pr. 18 High speed maximum frequency. (Refer to Instruction Manual (applied).))
(In agitators, etc., load may become heavier in winter.)
Check that the torque boost (Pr.0, Pr.46, Pr.112) setting is not too large to activate the stall function under V/F
control.
Check that the brake resistor is not connected to terminals P/+-P1 accidentally.
4.6.9 Speed varies during operation TROUBLESHOOTING

When advanced magnetic flux vector control, real sensorless vector control, vector control or encoder
feedback control is exercised, the output frequency varies with load fluctuation between 0 and 2Hz. This is
a normal operation and is not a fault.
Check that the load is not varying.
2) Check the input signals
Check that the frequency setting signal is not varying.
Check that the frequency setting signal is not affected by noise. Input filter to the analog input
terminal using Pr. 74 Input filter time constant and Pr. 822 Speed setting filter 1.
Check for a malfunction due to undesirable currents when the transistor output unit is connected.
4
(Refer to page 24)
3) Others
Check that the settings of Pr. 80 Motor capacity and Pr. 81 Number of motor poles are correct to the
inverter capacity and motor capacity under advanced magnetic flux vector control, real sensorless
vector control or vector control.
Check that the wiring length is not exceeding 30m when advanced magnetic flux vector, real
sensorless vector control or vector control is exercised. Perform offline auto tuning. (Refer to
Instruction Manual (applied))
Check that the wiring length is not too long for V/F control
147
4.6.10 Operation mode is not changed properly

If the operation mode does not change correctly, check the following:
Check that the STF or STR signal is off.
When it is on, the operation mode cannot be changed.
2) Parameter setting
Check the Pr. 79 setting.
When the Pr. 79 Operation mode selection setting is "0" (initial value), the inverter is placed in the
external operation mode at input power-on. At this time, press on the operation panel (press
when the parameter unit (FR-PU04/FR-PU07) is used) to switch to the PU operation mode.
4.6.11 Operation panel (FR-DU07) display is not operating

Check that the operation panel is connected to the inverter securely.
4.6.12 POWER lamp is not lit

Check that wiring is securely performed and installation is correct.
4.6.13 Parameter write cannot be performed

Make sure that operation is not being performed (signal STF or STR is not ON).
Make sure that you are not attempting to set the parameter in the external operation mode.
Check Pr. 77 Parameter write selection.
Check Pr. 161 Frequency setting/key lock operation selection.
148
Inspection item
5 PRECAUTIONS FOR MAINTENANCE AND INSPECTION
The inverter is a static unit mainly consisting of semiconductor devices. Daily inspection must be performed to prevent
any fault from occurring due to the adverse effects of the operating environment, such as temperature, humidity, dust,
dirt and vibration, changes in the parts with time, service life, and other factors.
• Precautions for maintenance and inspection

For some short time after the power is switched off, a high voltage remains in the smoothing capacitor. When accessing
the inverter for inspection, wait for at least 10 minutes after the power supply has been switched off, and then make
sure that the voltage across the main circuit terminals P/+-N/− of the inverter is not more than 30VDC using a tester,
etc.
5.1 Inspection item

5.1.1 Daily inspection
Basically, check for the following faults during operation.
(1) Motor operation fault
(2) Improper installation environment
(3) Cooling system fault
(4) Unusual vibration and noise
(5) Unusual overheat and discoloration
During operation, check the inverter input voltages using a tester.
PRECAUTIONS FOR MAINTENANCE AND INSPECTION

5.1.2 Periodic inspection
Check the areas inaccessible during operation and requiring periodic inspection.
Consult us for periodic inspection.
1) Check for cooling system fault ................ Clean the air filter, etc.
2) Tightening check and retightening .......... The screws and bolts may become loose due to vibration, temperature
changes, etc.
Tighten them according to the specified tightening torque. (Refer to page 15)
3) Check the conductors and insulating materials for corrosion and damage.
4) Measure insulation resistance.
5) Check and change the cooling fan and relay.
149
Inspection item
5.1.3 Daily and periodic inspection
Interval
Inspection
Customer's
Area of
Check
Periodic
Corrective Action at
Inspection Item Description
Daily
Alarm Occurrence
*2
Surrounding Check the ambient temperature, humidity, dirt,
{ Improve emvironment
environment corrosive gas, oil mist , etc
Check alarm location and
General Overall unit Check for unusual vibration and noise {
retighten
Power supply Check that the main circuit voltages and control
{ Inspect the power supply
voltage voltages are normal *1
(1) Check with megger (across main circuit
{ Contact the manufacturer
terminals and earth (ground) terminal).
General (2) Check for loose screws and bolts. { Retighten
(3) Check for overheat traces on the parts. { Contact the manufacturer
(4) Check for stain { Clean
(1) Check conductors for distortion. { Contact the manufacturer
Conductors, cables (2) Check cable sheaths for breakage and
deterioration (crack, discoloration, etc.) { Contact the manufacturer
Check for unusual odor and abnormal increase in Stop the device and contact
Transformer/reactor {
Main whining sound. the manufacturer.
circuit Stop the device and contact
Terminal block Check for damage. {
the manufacturer.
Smoothing (1) Check for liquid leakage. { Contact the manufacturer
aluminum (2) Check for safety valve projection and bulge. { Contact the manufacturer
electrolytic (3) Visual check and judge by the life check of the
capacitor {
main circuit capacitor (Refer to page 151)
Check that the operation is normal and no chatter
Relay/contactor { Contact the manufacturer
is heard.
(1) Check for crack in resistor insulation. { Contact the manufacturer
Resistor
(2) Check for a break in the cable. { Contact the manufacturer
(1) Check that the output voltages across phases
{ Contact the manufacturer
with the inverter operated alone is balanced
Operation check (2) Check that no fault is found in protective and
display circuits in a sequence protective { Contact the manufacturer
Control operation test.
circuit Stop the device and contact
(1) Check for unusual odor and discoloration. {
protective Overall the manufacturer.
Parts check
circuit (2) Check for serious rust development { Contact the manufacturer
(1) Check for liquid leakage in a capacitor and
Aluminum { Contact the manufacturer
deformation trance
electrolytic
capacitor (2) Visual check and judge by the life check of the
{
control circuit capacitor. (Refer to page 151.)
(1) Check for unusual vibration and noise. Replace the fan
{
Cooling fan (2) Check for loose screws and bolts { Retighten
Cooling
(1) Check for clogging { Clean
system Heatsink
(1) Check for clogging { Clean or replace
Air filter, etc.
(2) Check for stain { Clean or replace
(1) Check that display is normal. { Contact the manufacturer
Indication
Display
Stop the device and contact
Meter Check that reading is normal {
the manufacturer.
Load Check for vibration and abnormal increase in Stop the device and contact
Operation check {
motor operation noise the manufacturer.
*1 It is recommended to install a device to monitor voltage for checking the power supply voltage to the inverter.
*2 One to two years of periodic inspection cycle is recommended. However, it differs according to the installation environment.
Consult us for periodic inspection.
150
Inspection item
5.1.4 Display of the life of the inverter parts

The self-diagnostic alarm is output when the life span of the control circuit capacitor, cooling fan, each parts of the
inrush current limit circuit is near to give an indication of replacement time .
The life alarm output can be used as a guideline for life judgement.
Parts Judgement Level
Main circuit capacitor 85% of the initial capacity
Control circuit capacitor Estimated 10% life remaining
Inrush current limit circuit Estimated 10% life remaining (Power on: 100,000 times left)
Cooling fan Less than 40% of the predetermined speed
For the life check of the main circuit capacitor, the alarm signal (Y90) will not be output if a measuring method of (2) is
not performed. (Refer to page 152.)
(1) Display of the life alarm

· Pr. 255 Life alarm status display can be used to confirm that the control circuit capacitor, main circuit capacitor,
cooling fan, and each parts of the inrush current limit circuit has reached the life alarm output level.
bit 15 7 0
• Pr.255 read • Pr.255 setting read
0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 1 0 0 1
bit0 Control circuit capacitor life
bit1 Main circuit capacitor life Bit image is displayed
bit2 Cooling fan life in decimal
bit3 Inrush current limit circuit life
Pr. 255 Bit Inrush Current Cooling Main Circuit Control Circuit
(decimal) (binary) Limit Circuit Life Fan Life Capacitor Life Capacitor Life
15 1111

14 1110
13 1101
12 1100
11 1011
10 1010
9 1001
8 1000
7 0111
6 0110
5 0101
4 0100
3 0011
2 0010
1 0001
0 0000
: with alarm, : without alarm
POINT
Life check of the main circuit capacitor needs to be done by Pr. 259. (Refer to the following.)
151
Inspection item
(2) Measuring method of life of the main circuit capacitor

· If the value of capacitor capacity measured before shipment is considered as 100%, Pr. 255 bit1 is turned on when
the measured value falls below 85%.
· Measure the capacitor capacity according to the following procedure and check the deterioration level of the
capacitor capacity.
1) Check that the motor is connected and at a stop.
2) Set "1" (measuring start) in Pr. 259
3) Switch power off. The inverter applies DC voltage to the motor to measure the capacitor capacity while the
inverter is off.
4) After confirming that the LED of the operation panel is off, power on again.
5) Check that "3" (measuring completion) is set in Pr. 259, then read Pr .255 and check the life of the main circuit
capacitor.
REMARKS
· The life of the main circuit capacitor can not be measured in the following conditions.
(a) FR-HC, MT-HC, FR-CV, FR-BU, MT-RC, MT-BU5 or BU is connected.
(b) Terminal R1/L11, S1/L21 or DC power supply is connected to the terminals P/+ and N/−.
(c) Switch power on during measuring.
(d) The motor is not connected to the inverter.
(e) The motor is running.(The motor is coasting.)
(f) The motor capacity is two rank smaller as compared to the inverter capacity.
(g) The inverter is at an alarm stop or an alarm occurred while power is off.
(h) The inverter output is shut off with the MRS signal.
(i) The start command is given while measuring.
· Operating environment:Ambient temperature (annual average 40°C (free from corrosive gas, flammable gas, oil mist, dust and
dirt))
Output current (80% of the rated current of Mitsubishi standard 4P motor)
POINT
For the accurate life measuring of the main circuit capacitor, perform after more than 3h passed since the turn off of
the power as it is affected by the capacitor temperature.
5.1.5 Cleaning
Always run the inverter in a clean status.
When cleaning the inverter, gently wipe dirty areas with a soft cloth immersed in neutral detergent or ethanol.
CAUTION
Do not use solvent, such as acetone, benzene, toluene and alcohol, as they will cause the inverter surface paint to peel off.
The display, etc. of the operation panel (FR-DU07) and parameter unit (FR-PU04/FR-PU07) are vulnerable to detergent and
alcohol. Therefore, avoid using them for cleaning.
5.1.6 Replacement of parts

The inverter consists of many electronic parts such as semiconductor devices.
The following parts may deteriorate with age because of their structures or physical characteristics, leading to reduced
performance or fault of the inverter. For preventive maintenance, the parts must be replaced periodically.
Use the life check function as a guidance of parts replacement.
Part Name Standard Replacement Interval *1 Description

Cooling fan 10 years Replace (as required)
Main circuit smoothing capacitor 10 years *2 Replace (as required)
On-board smoothing capacitor 10 years Replace the board (as required)
Relays − as required
Fuse (160K or more) 10 years Replace the fuse (as required)
*1 Replacement years for when the yearly average ambient temperature is 40°C
(without corrosive gas, flammable gas, oil mist, dust and dirt etc)
*2 Output current : equivalent to rating current of the Mitsubishi standard motor (4 poles)
CAUTION
For parts replacement, consult the nearest Mitsubishi FA Center.
152
Inspection item
(1) Cooling fan

The replacement interval of the cooling fan used for cooling the parts generating heat such as the main circuit
semiconductor is greatly affected by the ambient temperature. When unusual noise and/or vibration is noticed during
inspection, the cooling fan must be replaced immediately.
CAUTION
For parts replacement, consult the nearest Mitsubishi FA Center.
Inverter Type Fan Type Units

1.5K to 3.7K MMF-06F24ES-RP1 BKO-CA1638H01 1
5.5K to 11K MMF-08D24ES-RP1 BKO-CA1639H01 2
15K, 18.5K MMF-12D24DS-RP1 BKO-CA1619H01 1
MMF-06F24ES-RP1 BKO-CA1638H01 1
A720 22K
MMF-12D24DS-RP1 BKO-CA1619H01 1
30K MMF-09D24TS-RP1 BKO-CA1640H01 2
37K, 45K MMF-12D24DS-RP1 BKO-CA1619H01 2
55K to 90K MMF-12D24DS-RP1 BKO-CA1619H01 3
2.2K, 3.7K MMF-06F24ES-RP1 BKO-CA1638H01 1
5.5K to 15K MMF-08D24ES-RP1 BKO-CA1639H01 2
18.5K, 22K MMF-12D24DS-RP1 BKO-CA1619H01 1
30K MMF-09D24TS-RP1 BKO-CA1640H01 2
37K to 55K 2
A740 MMF-12D24DS-RP1 BKO-CA1619H01
75K to 132K 3
160K, 185K 3
220K to 280K 9LB1424H5H03 4
315K, 355K 5
400K to 500K 9LB1424S5H03 6
The FR-A720-0.4K, 0.75K, FR-A740-0.4K to 1.5K are not provided with a cooling fan.

• Removal (FR-A720-1.5K to 90K, FR-A740-2.2K to 132K)
1) Push the hooks from above and remove the fan cover.
FR-A720-1.5K to 3.7K FR-A720-5.5K to 22K FR-A720-30K or more

FR-A740-2.2K, 3.7K FR-A740-5.5K to 22K FR-A740-30K to 132K
2) Disconnect the fan connectors.
3) Remove the fan.
Fan cover Fan cover

Fan cover
Fan connection
Fan *
connector Fan *
Fan
Fan connection Fan connection
connector connector

* The number of cooling fans differs according to the inverter capacity. (Refer to the table above)
153
Inspection item
• Reinstallation (FR-A720-1.5K to 90K, FR-A740-2.2K to 132K)

1) After confirming the orientation of the fan, reinstall the fan so that the arrow on the left of "AIR FLOW" faces up.
AIR FLOW
<Fan side face>
CAUTION
Installing the fan in the opposite air flow direction can cause the inverter life to be shorter.
2) Reconnect the fan connectors.
When wiring, use care to avoid the cables being caught by the fan.
FR-A720-5.5K to 11K
FR-A720-1.5K to 3.7K FR-A740-5.5K to 15K
FR-A740-2.2K, 3.7K
FR-A720-15K, 18.5K FR-A720-22K

FR-A740-18.5K, 22K
FR-A720-30K or more
FR-A740-30K to 132K
3) Reinstall the fan cover.
2. Insert hooks until 1. Insert hooks into 1. Insert hooks into
you hear a click 1. Insert hooks into holes. 2. Insert hooks until holes. 2. Insert hooks until
sound. you hear a click you hear a click
holes. sound. sound.

154
Inspection item
• Removal (FR-A740-160K or more)
Fan *
Fan connection
connector
* The number of cooling fans differs according to the inverter capacity. (Refer to page 153)
• Reinstallation (FR-A740-160K or more)

1) After confirming the orientation of the fan, reinstall the fan so that the arrow on the left of "AIR FLOW" faces up.
AIR FLOW

<Fan side face>
CAUTION
Installing the fan in the opposite air flow direction can cause the inverter life to be shorter.
2) Install fans referring to the above figure.
(2) Replacement procedure of the cooling fan when using a heatsink protrusion attachment
(FR-A7CN)
When replacing a cooling fan, remove a top cover of the
heatsink protrusion attachment and perform replacement.
After replacing the cooling fan, replace the top cover in the
original position.
Top cover
155
Inspection item
(3) Smoothing capacitors

A large-capacity aluminum electrolytic capacitor is used for smoothing in the main circuit DC section, and an aluminum
electrolytic capacitor is used for stabilizing the control power in the control circuit. Their characteristics are deteriorated
by the adverse effects of ripple currents, etc.
The replacement intervals greatly vary with the ambient temperature and operating conditions. When the inverter is
operated in air-conditioned, normal environment conditions, replace the capacitors about every 10 years.
The appearance criteria for inspection are as follows:
1) Case: Check the side and bottom faces for expansion
2) Sealing plate: Check for remarkable warp and extreme crack.
3) Check for external crack, discoloration, fluid leakage, etc. Judge that the capacitor has reached its life when the
measured capacitance of the capacitor reduced below 80% of the rating.
Refer to page 152 to perform the life check of the main circuit capacitor.
(4) Relays
To prevent a contact fault, etc., relays must be replaced according to the cumulative number of switching times
(switching life).
5.1.7 Inverter replacement

The inverter can be replaced with the control circuit wiring kept connected. Before replacement, remove the wiring
cover of the inverter.
1) Loosen the two installation screws in both ends of the control circuit terminal block. (These screws cannot be removed.)
Pull down the terminal block from behind the control circuit terminals.
2) Using care not to bend the pins of the inverter's control circuit connector, reinstall the control circuit terminal block
and fix it with the mounting screws.
CAUTION
Before starting inverter replacement, switch power off, wait for at least 10 minutes, and then check the voltage with a tester and
such to ensure safety.
156
Rating
6 SPECIFICATIONS
6.1 Rating
6.1.1 Inverter rating
z200V class
Type FR-A720-K 0.4 0.75 1.5 2.2 3.7 5.5 7.5 11 15 18.5 22 30 37 45 55 75 90
Applicable motor capacity (kW) *1 0.4 0.75 1.5 2.2 3.7 5.5 7.5 11 15 18.5 22 30 3775 9045 55
Rated capacity (kVA) *2 1.1 1.9 3.1 4.2 6.7 9.2 12.6 17.6 23.3 29 34 44 55
110 132 67 82
288 346
Rated current (A) *3 3 5 8 11 17.5 24 33 46 61 76 90 115 145 175 215
(245) (294)
Output
Overload current rating *4 150% 60s, 200% 3s (inverse time characteristics) ambient temperature 50°C
Voltage *5 Three-phase 200 to 240V
Regenerative Maximum value/ 150% torque/ 100% torque/ 100% torque/ 20% torque/ 20% torque/ 10% torque/
braking torque permissible duty 3%ED 3%ED 2%ED continuous *6 continuous continuous
Rated input
Power supply
Three-phase 200 to 220V 50Hz, 200 to 240V 60Hz

AC voltage/frequency
Permissible AC voltage fluctuation 170 to 242V 50Hz,170 to 264V 60Hz
Permissible frequency fluctuation ±5%
Power supply capacity (kVA) *7 1.5 2.5 4.5 5.5 9 12 17 20 28 34 41 52 66 80 100 110 132
Protective structure (JEM 1030) *9 Enclosed type (IP20) *8 Open type (IP00)
Cooling system Self-cooling Forced air cooling
Approx. mass (kg) 1.9 2.3 3.8 3.8 3.8 7.1 7.1 7.5 13 13 14 23 35 35 58 70 70
*1. The applicable motor capacity indicated is the maximum capacity applicable for use of the Mitsubishi 4-pole standard motor.
*2. The rated output capacity indicated assumes that the output voltage is 220V.
*3. When operating the inverter of 75K or more with a value larger than 2kHz set in Pr. 72 PWM frequency selection, the rated output current is the value in
parenthesis.
*4. The % value of the overload current rating indicates the ratio of the overload current to the inverter's rated output current. For repeated duty, allow time for
the inverter and motor to return to or below the temperatures under 100% load.
*5. The maximum output voltage does not exceed the power supply voltage. The maximum output voltage can be changed within the setting range. However,
the pulse voltage value of the inverter output side voltage remains unchanged at about 2 that of the power supply.
*6. For the 11K to 22K capacities, using the dedicated external brake resistor (FR-ABR) will achieve the performance of 100% torque/6%ED.
*7. The power supply capacity varies with the value of the power supply side inverter impedance (including those of the input reactor and cables).
*8. When the hook of the inverter front cover is cut off for installation of the plug-in option, the inverter changes to an open type (IP00).
*9. FR-DU07:IP40 (except for the PU connector)
SPECIFICATIONS
6
157
Rating
z400V class
Type FR-A740-K 0.4 0.75 1.5 2.2 3.7 5.5 7.5 11 15 18.5 22 30 37 45 55
Applicable motor capacity (kW) *1 0.4 0.75 1.5 2.2 3.7 5.5 7.5 11 15 18.5 22 30 37 45 55
Rated capacity (kVA) *2 1.1 1.9 3 4.6 6.9 9.1 13 17.5 23.6 29 32.8 43.4 54 65 84
Rated current (A) 1.5 2.5 4 6 9 12 17 23 31 38 44 57 71 86 110
Output
Voltage *5 Three-phase 380 to 480V
Regenerative Maximum value/
100% torque/2%ED 20% torque/continuous *6 20% torque/continuous
braking torque permissible duty
Rated input
Power supply
Three-phase 380 to 480V 50Hz/60Hz

Permissible AC voltage fluctuation 323 to 528V 50Hz/60Hz
Power supply capacity (kVA) *7 1.5 2.5 4.5 5.5 9 12 17 20 28 34 41 52 66 80 100
Protective structure (JEM 1030) *9 Enclosed type (IP20) *8 Open type (IP00)
Cooling system Self-cooling Forced air cooling
Approx. mass (kg) 3.5 3.5 3.5 3.5 3.5 6.5 6.5 7.5 7.5 13 13 23 35 35 37
Type FR-A740-K 75 90 110 132 160 185 220 250 280 315 355 400 450 500
Applicable motor capacity (kW) *1 75 90 110 132 160 185 220 250 280 315 355 400 450 500
Rated capacity (kVA) *2 110 137 165 198 248 275 329 367 417 465 521 587 660 733
144 180 216 260 325 361 432 481 547 610 683 770 866 962
Rated current (A)*3
(122) (153) (184) (221) (276) (307) (367) (409) (465) (519) (581) (655) (736) (818)
Output
Voltage*5 Three-phase 380 to 480V
Regenerative Maximum value/
10% torque/continuous
braking torque permissible duty
Rated input
Power supply
Three-phase 380 to 480V 50Hz/60Hz

Permissible AC voltage fluctuation 323 to 528V 50Hz/60H
Power supply capacity (kVA) *7 110 137 165 198 248 275 329 367 417 465 521 587 660 733
Protective structure (JEM 1030) *9 Open type (IP00)
Cooling system Forced air cooling
Approx. mass (kg) 50 57 72 72 110 110 175 175 175 260 260 370 370 370
*1. The applicable motor capacity indicated is the maximum capacity applicable for use of the Mitsubishi 4-pole standard motor.
*2. The rated output capacity indicated assumes that the output voltage is 440V.
*3. When operating the inverter of 75K or more with a value larger than 2kHz set in Pr. 72 PWM frequency selection, the rated output current is the value in
parenthesis.
*4. The % value of the overload current rating indicates the ratio of the overload current to the inverter's rated output current. For repeated duty, allow time for
the inverter and motor to return to or below the temperatures under 100% load.
*5. The maximum output voltage does not exceed the power supply voltage. The maximum output voltage can be changed within the setting range. However,
the pulse voltage value of the inverter output side voltage remains unchanged at about 2 that of the power supply.
*6. For the 11K to 22K capacities, using the dedicated external brake resistor (FR-ABR) will achieve the performance of 100% torque/6%ED.
*7. The power supply capacity varies with the value of the power supply side inverter impedance (including those of the input reactor and cables).
*8. When the hook of the inverter front cover is cut off for installation of the plug-in option, the inverter changes to an open type (IP00).
*9. FR-DU07:IP40 (except for the PU connector)
158
Rating
6.1.2 Motor rating

(1) SF-V5RU
z200V class (Mitsubishi dedicated motor [SF-V5RU (1500r/min series)])

Motor type
1 2 3 5 7 11 15 18 22 30 37 45 55
SF-V5RUK
Applicable inverter type
2.2 3.7 5.5 7.5 11 15 18.5 22 30 37 45 55 75
FR-A720-K
Rated output (kW) 1.5 2.2 3.7 5.5 7.5 11 15 18.5 22 30 37 45 55
Rated torque (N·m) 9.55 14.1 23.6 35.0 47.7 70.0 95.5 118 140 191 235 286 350
Maximum torque 150%
14.3 21.1 35.4 52.4 71.6 105 143 176 211 287 353 429 525
60s (N·m)
Rated speed (r/min) 1500
Maximum speed (r/min) 3000 *1 2400
Frame No. 90L 100L 112M 132S 132M 160M 160L 180M 180M 200L 200L 200L 225S
Inertia moment J
67.5 105 175 275 400 750 875 1725 1875 3250 3625 3625 6850
(×10-4kg·m2)
85dB
Noise *4 75dB or less 80dB or less or less
Cooling fan Single-phase 200V/50Hz Three-phase 200V/50Hz
Voltage Single-phase 200V to 230V/60Hz Three-phase 200 to 230V/60Hz
(with thermal
36/55W 22/28W 55/71W 100/156W 85/130W
protector) Input *2
(0.26/0.32A) (0.11/0.13A) (0.39/0.39A) (0.47/0.53A) (0.46/0.52A)
Ambient temperature,
-10 to +40°C (non-freezing), 90%RH or less (non-condensing)
humidity
Structure Totally enclosed forced draft system
(Protective structure) (Motor: IP44, cooling fan: IP23S) *3
Detector Encoder 2048P/R, A phase, B phase, Z phase +12VDC power supply
Equipment Encoder, thermal protector, fan
Heat resistance class F
Vibration rank V10
Approx. mass (kg) 24 33 41 52 62 99 113 138 160 238 255 255 320
z400V class (Mitsubishi dedicated motor [SF-V5RUH (1500r/min series)])

Motor type
1 2 3 5 7 11 15 18 22 30 37 45 55
SF-V5RUHK
Applicable inverter type
2.2 2.2 3.7 7.5 11 15 18.5 22 30 37 45 55 75
FR-A720-K
Rated output (kW) 1.5 2.2 3.7 5.5 7.5 11 15 18.5 22 30 37 45 55
Rated torque (N·m) 9.55 14.1 23.6 35.0 47.7 70.0 95.5 118 140 191 235 286 350
Maximum torque 150% 60s
14.3 21.1 35.4 52.4 71.6 105 143 176 211 287 353 429 525
(N·m)
Maximum speed (r/min) 3000 *1 2400
Frame No. 90L 100L 112M 132S 132M 160M 160L 180M 180M 200L 200L 200L 225S
Inertia moment J
67.5 105 175 275 400 750 875 1725 1875 3250 3625 3625 6850
(×10-4kg·m2)
Noise *4 75dB or less 80dB or less 85dB or

less
Cooling fan Single-phase 200V/50Hz Three-phase 380 to 400V/50Hz
Voltage Single-phase 200V to 230V/60Hz Three-phase 400 to 460V/60Hz
(with thermal
36/55W 22/28W 55/71W 100/156W 85/130W
protector) Input *2
(0.26/0.32A) (0.11/0.13A) (0.19/0.19A) (0.27/0.30A) (0.23/0.26A)
Ambient temperature,
-10 to +40°C (non-freezing), 90%RH or less (non-condensing)
humidity
Structure Totally enclosed forced draft system
(Protective structure) (Motor: IP44, cooling fan: IP23S) *3
Detector Encoder 2048P/R, A phase, B phase, Z phase +12VDC power supply
Equipment Encoder, thermal protector, fan
SPECIFICATIONS
Heat resistance class F

Vibration rank V10
Approx. mass (kg) 24 33 41 52 62 99 113 138 160 238 255 255 320
*1 A dedicated motor of 3.7kW or less can be run at the maximum speed of 3600 r/min. Consult our sales office when using the motor at the maximum speed.
*2 Power (current) at 50Hz/60Hz.
*3 Since a motor with brake has a window for gap check, the protective structure of both the cooling fan section and brake section is IP20. S of IP23S is an
additional code indicating the condition that a cooling fan is not operated.
*4 The value when high carrier frequency is set (Pr.72 = 6, Pr.240 = 0).
6
159
Rating
(2) SF-THY
Motor type SF-THY
Applicable Inverter FR-A720-K 90
Rated output(kW) 75
Rated torque (kgf·m) 48.7
(N·m) 477
Maximum torque (kgf·m) 73.0
(N·m)
200V class
150%60s 715
Maximum speed (r/min) 2400
Frame No. 250MD
Inertia moment J (kg·m2) 1.1
Noise 90dB
Three-phase, 200V/50Hz, 200V/60Hz, 220V/60Hz
Voltage
Cooling fan (400V class cooling fan is available upon order)
Input (W) 750
Motor type SF-THY
Applicable Inverter FR-A740-K 90 110 132 160 185 220 280
Rated output (kW) 75 90 110 132 160 200 250
Rated torque (kgf·m) 48.7 58.4 71.4 85.7 103.9 129.9 162.3
(N·m) 477 572 700 840 1018 1273 1591
Maximum torque (kgf·m) 73.0 87.6 107.1 128.5 155.8 194.8 243.4
150%60s (N·m) 715 858 1050 1260 1527 1909 2386
400V class

Maximum speed (r/min) 2400 1800
Frame No. 250MD 250MD 280MD 280MD 280MD 280L 315H
Inertia moment J (kg·m2) 1.1 1.7 2.3 2.3 4.0 3.8 5.0
Noise 90dB 95dB
Three-phase, 200V/50Hz, 200V/60Hz, 220V/60Hz
Voltage
(400V class cooling fan is available upon order)
Cooling fan
50Hz 400 400 400 400 400 750 750
Input (W)
60Hz 750 750 750 750 750 1500 1500
160
Common specifications
6.2 Common specifications

Soft-PWM control/high carrier frequency PWM control (selectable from among V/F control, advanced magnetic flux vector control and
Control method real sensorless vector control) / vector control (when used with option FR-A7AP)*1
Output frequency range 0.2 to 400Hz
0.015Hz/0 to 60Hz (terminal 2, 4: 0 to 10V/12bit)
Frequency Analog input 0.03Hz/0 to 60Hz (terminal 2, 4: 0 to 5V/11bit, 0 to 20mA/about 11bit, terminal 1: 0 to ±10V/12bit)
setting 0.06Hz/0 to 60Hz (terminal 1: 0 to ±5V/11bit)
Control specifications
resolution
Digital input 0.01Hz
Frequency Analog input Within ±0.2% of the max. output frequency (25°C±10°C)
accuracy Digital input Within 0.01% of the set output frequency
Voltage/frequency characteristics Base frequency can be set from 0 to 400Hz Constant torque/variable torque pattern or adjustable 5 points V/F can be selected
Starting torque 200% 0.3Hz (0.4K to 3.7K), 150% 0.3Hz (5.5K or more) (under real sensorless vector control or vector control)
Torque boost Manual torque boost
Acceleration/deceleration time 0 to 3600s (acceleration and deceleration can be set individually), linear or S-pattern acceleration/deceleration mode, backlash
setting measures acceleration/deceleration can be selected.
DC injection brake Operation frequency (0 to 120Hz), operation time (0 to 10s), operation voltage (0 to 30%) variable
Stall prevention operation level Operation current level can be set (0 to 220% adjustable), whether to use the function or not can be selected
Torque limit level Torque limit value can be set (0 to 400% variable)
Frequency Analog input • Terminal 2, 4: 0 to 10V, 0 to 5V, 4 to 20mA can be selected • Terminal 1: -10 to +10V, -5 to +5V can be selected
setting Input using the setting dial of the operation panel or parameter unit
signal Digital input Four-digit BCD or 16 bit binary (when used with option FR-A7AX)
Start signal Forward and reverse rotation or start signal automatic self-holding input (3-wire input) can be selected.
You can select any twelve signals using Pr. 178 to Pr. 189 (input terminal function selection) from among multi speed selection, remote setting,
stop-on-contact, second function selection, third function selection, terminal 4 input selection, JOG operation selection, selection of
automatic restart after instantaneous power failure, flying start, external thermal relay input, inverter operation enable signal (FR-HC/FR-CV
connection), FR-HC connection (instantaneous power failure detection), PU operation/external inter lock signal , external DC injection brake
operation start, PID control enable terminal, brake opening completion signal, PU operation/external operation switchover, load pattern
Input signals selection forward rotation reverse rotation boost, V/F switching, load torque high-speed frequency, S-pattern acceleration/deceleration C
switchover, pre-excitation, output stop, start self-holding selection, control mode changing, torque limit selection, start-time tuning start
external input, torque bias selection 1, 2 *1, P/PI control switchover, forward rotation command, reverse rotation command, inverter reset,
PTC thermistor input, PID forward reverse operation switchover, PU-NET operation switchover, NET-external operation switchover, and
command source switchover, conditional position pulse train sign *1, conditional position droop pulse clear *1.
Pulse train input 100kpps
Maximum/minimum frequency setting, frequency jump operation, external thermal relay input selection, polarity reversible operation,
Operation specifications
automatic restart after instantaneous power failure operation, commercial power supply-inverter switchover operation, forward/reverse
rotation prevention, remote setting, brake sequence, second function, third function, multi-speed operation, original operation
Operational functions continuation at instantaneous power failure, stop-on-contact control, load torque high speed frequency control, droop control,
regeneration avoidance, slip compensation, operation mode selection, offline auto tuning function, online auto tuning function, PID
control, computer link operation (RS-485), motor end orientation*1, machine end orientation*1, pre-excitation, notch filter, machine
analyzer*1, easy gain tuning, speed feed forward, and torque bias*1
You can select any signals using Pr. 190 to Pr. 196 (output terminal function selection) from among inverter running, up-to-frequency,
instantaneous power failure/undervoltage, overload warning, output frequency (speed) detection, second output frequency (speed)
detection, third output frequency (speed) detection, regenerative brake prealarm, electronic thermal relay function pre-alarm, PU
operation mode, inverter operation ready, output current detection, zero current detection, PID lower limit, PID upper limit, PID forward
rotation reverse rotation output, commercial power supply-inverter switchover MC1, commercial power supply-inverter switchover MC2,
Operating status commercial power supply-inverter switchover MC3, orientation completion*1, brake opening request, fan fault output, heatsink overheat
pre-alarm , inverter running/start command on, deceleration at an instantaneous power failure, PID control activated, during retry, PID
output interruption, life alarm, alarm output 1, 2, 3 (power-off signal), power savings average value update timing, current average
Output signals
monitor, maintenance timer alarm, remote output, forward rotation output*1, reverse rotation output*1, low speed output, torque detection,
regenerative status output *1, start-time tuning completion, in-position completion*1, minor failure output and alarm output. Open collector
output (5 points), relay output (2 points) and alarm code of the inverter can be output (4 bit) from the open collector.
When used with the In addition to the above, you can select any signals using Pr. 313 to Pr. 319 (extension output terminal function selection) from among
FR-A7AY, FR-A7AR control circuit capacitor life, main circuit capacitor life, cooling fan life, inrush current limit circuit life. (only positive logic can be set for
(option) extension terminals of the FR-A7AR)
Pulse train output 50kpps
You can select any signals using Pr. 54 FM terminal function selection (pulse train output) and Pr. 158 AM terminal function selection (analog
output) from among output frequency, motor current (steady or peak value), output voltage, frequency setting, operation speed, motor
Pulse/analog output torque, converter output voltage (steady or peak value), electronic thermal relay function load factor, input power, output power, load
meter, motor excitation current, reference voltage output, motor load factor, power saving effect, regenerative brake duty ,PID set
point, PID measured value, motor output, torque command, torque current command, and torque monitor.
Output frequency, motor current (steady or peak value), output voltage, frequency setting, running speed,motor torque, overload,
converter output voltage (steady or peak value), electronic thermal relay function load factor, input power, output power, load meter,
motor excitation current, cumlative energization time, actual operation time, motor load factor, cumulative power, energy saving effect,
Operating status
Indication
PU cumulative saving power, regenerative brake duty, PID set point, PID measured value, PID deviation, inverter I/O terminal monitor,
(FR-DU07/ input terminal option monitor*2., output terminal option monitor*2., option fitting status*3., terminal assignment status*3., torque
FR-PU07/ command, torque current command, feed back pulse*1,motor output
FR-PU04)
Alarm definition is displayed during the protective function is activated, the output voltage/current/frequency/cumulative energization
Alarm definition time right before the protection function was activated and past 8 alarm definitions are stored.
Interactive guidance Operation guide/trouble shooting with a help function*3.
Overcurrent during acceleration, overcurrent during constant speed, overcurrent during deceleration, overvoltage during acceleration,
overvoltage during constant speed, overvoltage during deceleration, inverter protection thermal operation, motor protection thermal
operation, heatsink overheat, instantaneous power failure occurrence, undervoltage, input phase failure, motor overload, output side
earth (ground) fault overcurrent, output short circuit, main circuit element overheat, output phase failure, external thermal relay operation,
PTC thermistor operation, option alarm, parameter error, PU disconnection, retry count excess, CPU alarm, operation panel power
Protective/warning function supply short circuit, 24VDC power output short circuit, output current detection value excess, inrush current limit circuit alarm,
communication alarm (inverter), USB error, opposite rotation deceleration error, analog input error, fan fault, overcurrent stall prevention,
overvoltage stall prevention, regenerative brake prealarm, electronic thermal relay function prealarm, PU stop, maintenance timer
SPECIFICATIONS
alarm*2., brake transistor alarm, parameter write error, copy operation error, operation panel lock, parameter copy alarm, speed limit
indication, encoder no-signal*1, speed deviation large*1, overspeed*1, position error large*1, encoder phase error*1
Ambient Temperature -10°C to +50°C (non-freezing)
Environment
Ambient humidity 90%RH maximum (non-condensing)

Storage temperature*4. -20°C to +65°C
Atmosphere Indoors (without corrosive gas, flammable gas, oil mist, dust and dirt etc.)
Altitude/vibration Maximum 1000m above sea level, 5.9m/s2 or less *5. (conforms to JIS C 60068-2-6)
*1. Available only when the option (FR-A7AP) is mounted
*2. Can be displayed only on the operation panel (FR-DU07).
*3. Can be displayed only on the parameter unit (FR-PU07/FR-PU04).
*4. Temperature applicable for a short period in transit, etc.
*5. 2.9m/s2 or less for the 160K or more.
6
161
Outline dimension drawings
6.3 Outline dimension drawings

6.3.1 Inverter outline dimension drawings
z FR-A720-0.4K, 0.75K
7.5
2-φ6 hole
245
260
6
95 5
7.5
110 D
Inverter Type D D1
FR-A720-0.4K 110 21
FR-A720-0.75K 125 36
D1
(Unit: mm)
zFR-A720-1.5K, 2.2K, 3.7K

zFR-A740-0.4K, 0.75K, 1.5K, 2.2K, 3.7K
7.5
2-φ6 hole
245
260
6
7.5
125 5
150 140
* The FR-A740-0.4K to
1.5K are not provided
with a cooling fan.
45.5
144
(Unit: mm)
162
zFR-A720-5.5K, 7.5K, 11K

zFR-A740-5.5K, 7.5K, 11K, 15K
7.5
2-φ6 hole
H1
H
7.5
6 10
195 D
220
Inverter Type H H1 D D1
FR-A720-5.5K, 7.5K
260 245 170 84
FR-A740-5.5K, 7.5K
FR-A720-11K
300 285 190 101.5
D1
FR-A740-11K, 15K
211
(Unit: mm)
zFR-A720-15K, 18.5K, 22K

zFR-A740-18.5K, 22K
10
2-φ10 hole
380
400
10
10 10.5
230 190
250
SPECIFICATIONS
101.5
250
(Unit: mm)
6
163
zFR-A720-30K, 37K, 45K, 55K

zFR-A740-30K, 37K, 45K, 55K
H2
2-φd hole
H1
H
10
W2 3.2
W1 D
Inverter Type W W1 W2 H H1 H2 d D
FR-A720-30K
325 270 10 550 530 10 10 195
FR-A740-30K
FR-A720-37K, 45K
435 380 12 550 525 15 12 250
FR-A740-37K, 45K, 55K
FR-A720-55K 465 410 12 700 675 15 12 250
(Unit: mm)
zFR-A740-75K, 90K
zDC reactor supplied

15
2-φ12hole
Rating plate
2-terminal
(for M12 bolt)
P1 P P1, P
H 10
H1
620
595
W1 4-installation hole
W 2 (for M6 screw) Within D
Earth (ground) terminal
(for M6 screw)
DC Reactor Mass
W W1 H H1 D
Type (Kg)
400 3.2 FR-HEL-H75K
10
465 300 140 120 320 295 185 16

(FR-A740-75K)
FR-HEL-H90K
150 130 340 310 190 20
(FR-A740-90K)
(Unit: mm)
164
zFR-A720-75K, 90K
zFR-A740-110K, 132K
15
2-φ12 hole
715
740
400 3.2
10
465 360

Rating plate
2-terminal
(for M12 bolt)
P1 P1
H 10
H1
P
P
W 2 (for S screw) Within D
(for M6 screw)
DC Reactor Type W W1 H H1 D S Mass (kg)

FR-HEL-75K (FR-A720-75K) 150 130 340 310 190 M6 17
FR-HEL-90K (FR-A720-90K) 150 130 340 310 200 M6 19
FR-HEL-H110K (FR-A740-110K) 150 130 340 310 195 M6 22
FR-HEL-H132K (FR-A740-132K) 175 150 405 370 200 M8 26
(Unit: mm)
SPECIFICATIONS
6
165
zFR-A740-160K, 185K
3-φ12 hole
15
Rating plate
2-terminal
(for M12 bolt)
P1 P1
H 10
H1
1010
985
P
P
(for M6 screw)
12 3.2
10
49 200 200 49 380

Mass
498
DC Reactor Type W W1 H H1 D S
450 (kg)
FR-HEL-H160K
175 150 405 370 205 M8 28
(FR-A740-160K)
150.5
FR-HEL-H185K
175 150 405 370 240 M8 29
(FR-A740-185K)
211.5
185
(Unit: mm)
zFR-A740-220K, 250K, 280K
3-φ12 hole

Rating plate
2-S2 eye nut
2-terminal (for bolt)
P1 P1
H1 10
1010
985
H 10
P
P
W1 1 4-installation hole
12 3.2 (for S1 screw)
300 300 380 * Remove the eye nut after installation of the product.
680
DC Reactor Mass
W W1 H H1 D S S1 S2 φ
Type (kg)
P1 U W
R/L1 T/L3 FR-HEL-H220K
175 150 405 370 240 M8 M6 M6 M12 30
148
S/L2 N/-
P/+
V (FR-A740-220K)
FR-HEL-H250K
190 165 440 400 250 M8 M8 M8 M12 35
(FR-A740-250K)
214
FR-HEL-H280K
190 165 440 400 255 M8 M8 M8 M16 38
(FR-A740-280K)
(Unit: mm)
166
zFR-A740-315K, 355K
3-φ12 hole
1300
1330
12
315 315 4.5 4.5
790 440
R/L1 T/L3 P1 U W
194
S/L2 N/- P/+ V

222
185
Rating plate
2-M8 eye nut
2-terminal (for M16 bolt)
P1 P1
450 10
495 10
P
P
185 4-installation hole

210 (for M10 screw) Within 250
(for M8 screw)
* Remove the eye nut after installation of the product.
DC Reactor Type Mass (kg)

FR-HEL-H315K (FR-A740-315K) 42
FR-HEL-H355K (FR-A740-355K) 46
(Unit: mm)
SPECIFICATIONS
6
167
zFR-A740-400K, 450K, 500K
4-φ12 hole
1550
1580
12 4.5 4.5
300 300 300 440
995
950
R/L1 S/L2 T/L3 N/- P1 P/+ U V W

189
227
185
zDC reactor supplied zDC reactor supplied

Rating plate
Rating plate
40
2-terminal 2-M8 eye nut P1

4- 15 hole
P1 2-terminal
4- 15 hole
P1
10
10

P
455
500
(for M12 screw)
E
40
P Within 245 75
P 40 2-M12 eye nut

P P1
75
40
195 4-installation hole

220 (for M10 screw)
Within D
Within H
Within W
(for M8 screw)
150 4-installation hole D1 10

(for M10 screw)
215 D 10
Mass Mass
DC Reactor Type W D DC Reactor Type H D D1
(kg) (kg)
FR-HEL-H400K FR-HEL-H500K
235 250 50 345 455 405 67
(FR-A740-400K) (FR-A740-500K)
FR-HEL-H450K
240 270 57
(FR-A740-450K)
(Unit: mm)
168
z Operation panel (FR-DU07)
<Outline drawing> <Panel cutting dimension drawing>

Panel
FR-DU07 27.8
3.2max
3
21
6
44
44
50 Air-
22
bleeding
hole
20
3
2-M3 screw Cable

3 72 3 16 72 Operation panel connection connector
78 25 (FR-ADP)
81
(Unit: mm)
z Parameter unit (option) (FR-PU07)

25.05
(14.2) (11.45)
83
2.5
40 40
*1
*1 Air-bleeding
hole
50
51
4-R1
*1 *1
135
67
57.8
56.8
26.5 4-φ4 hole

26.5
(Effective depth 5.0)
M3 screw *2
*5 When installing the FR-PU7 on the enclosure, etc., remove screws for fixing
the FR-PU07 to the inverter or fix the screws to the FR-PU07 with M3 nuts.
*6 Select the installation screws whose length will not exceed the effective
depth of the installation screws threads.
80.3
(Unit: mm)
z Parameter unit (option) (FR-PU04)
16.5
24 23.75
48 13
72 15 10.5 11.75
18.5
5-φ4 hole
13 1.5
21.5
20
17
1.5
14.5
1.25
81.5
125
80
5-M3 screw
Effective
SPECIFICATIONS
depth 4.5
40 40
Select the installation screws whose length will not exceed the effective depth of the installation screws threads.
(Unit: mm)
6
169
6.3.2 Dedicated motor outline dimension drawings

Dedicated motor (SF-V5RU(H)) outline dimension drawings (1500r/min series) (standard horizontal type)
SF-V5RU(H) 1K SF-V5RU(H) 2K , 3K , 5K , 7K
Connector (for encoder) Connector (for encoder)

MS3102A20-29P MS3102A20-29P
L L
ＲＲ
A B 50 KL
A B Q
KA 40 D
KA QK KL
Exhaust
Exhaust D
Suction
Suction
A A
KP
I
H
C
A
KG
KG
6.5
C
4
A
φ27
Direction of φ27
Direction of
cooling fan wind F F XB E E 40
cooling fan wind F F XB
Mark for earthing N M Mark for earthing E E
(grounding) N
Earth (ground) terminal (M5) (grounding) M
Earth (ground) terminal (M5) W ML Sliding distance
W Sliding distance
15 4
U
For cooling fan (A, B)
U
T
T
For motor (U, V, W)
9
12
S Thermal protector (G1, G2)
Frame leg viewed from above S
Section AA Frame leg viewed
Section AA from above
A B U V W G1 G2
Earthing (grounding) terminal
SF-V5RU(H) 11K , 15K , 18K , 22K SF-V5RU(H) 30K , 37K , 45K , 55K

MS3102A20-29P MS3102A20-29P
L L
ＲＲ
KL
A B 110 A B 140 D
D
KA 90 KA 110
Exhaust
φ90
Suction Exhaust
Suction
With guard A
wires With guard
I
KP
H
KG
wires
H
C
A
KG
φ56
8
A
C
Direction of
50
11
cooling fan wind

Mark for earthing XB E E
F F Direction of 70
(grounding) M
N cooling fan wind Mark for earthing F F XB E E
(grounding)
Earth (ground)
N M
terminal (M8)
Sliding distance For motor (U, V, W)
W 4 Earth (ground)
W Sliding distance
U
terminal (M12)
T
4
14.5
U
T
18.5
S
Frame leg viewed Earthing (grounding)
Section AA from above terminal S
Frame leg viewed
Section AA from above
Make sure to earth the earth terminal of the frame installation foot
For cooling fan (A, B, C) For thermal protector (G1, G2) as well as the earth terminal in the terminal box.
Dimensions table (Unit: mm)
SF-V5RU SF-V5RU1 SF-V5RU3 SF-V5RU4 Terminal Screw

Frame Mass Motor
Output Output Output Output Size
No. (kg)
(kW) (kW) (kW) (kW) A B C D E F H I KA KG KL(KP) L M ML N XB Q QK R S T U W U,V,W A,B,(C) G1,G2
1.5 — — — 90L 24 256.5 114 90 183.6 70 62.5 198 — 53 65 220(210) 425 175 — 150 56 — — 168.5 24j6 7 4 8 M6 M4 M4
2.2 1.5 — — 100L 33 284 128 100 207 80 70 203.5 230 65 78 231 477 200 212 180 63 60 45 193 28j6 7 4 8 M6 M4 M4
3.7 2.2 1.5 — 112M 41 278 135 112 228 95 70 226 253 69 93 242 478 230 242 180 70 60 45 200 28j6 7 4 8 M6 M4 M4
5.5 3.7 2.2 — 132S 52 303 152 132 266 108 70 265 288 75 117 256 542 256 268 180 89 80 63 239 38k6 8 5 10 M6 M4 M4
7.5 5.5 3.7 1.5 132M 62 322 171 132 266 108 89 265 288 94 117 256 580 256 268 218 89 80 63 258 38k6 8 5 10 M6 M4 M4
11 7.5 5.5 2.2 160M 99 412 198 160 318 127 105 316 367 105 115 330 735 310 — 254 108 — — 323 42k6 8 5 12 M8 M4 M4
15 11 7.5 3.7 160L 113 434 220 160 318 127 127 316 367 127 115 330 779 310 — 298 108 — — 345 42k6 8 5 12 M8 M4 M4
18.5 — — — 138
180M 438.5 225.5 180 363 139.5 120.5 359 410 127 139 352 790 335 — 285 121 — — 351.5 48k6 9 5.5 14 M8 M4 M4
22 15 11 — 160
— 18.5 15 5.5 180L 200 457.5 242.5 180 363 139.5 139.5 359 410 146 139 352 828 335 — 323 121 — — 370.5 55m6 10 6 16 M8 M4 M4
30 — — — 238
200L 483.5 267.5 200 406 159 152.5 401 — 145 487 (546) 909 390 — 361 133 — — 425.5 60m6 — — — M10 M4 M4
30, 45 22, 30 18.5 7.5 255
55 37 22, 30 11, 15 225S 320 500 277 225 446 178 143 446 — 145 533 (592) 932 428 — 342 149 — — 432 65m6 — — — M10 M4 M4
Note) 1. Install the motor on the floor and use it with the shaft horizontal.
2. Leave an enough clearance between the fan suction port and wall to ensure adequate cooling.
Also, check that the ventilation direction of a fan is from the opposite load side to the load side.
0
3 The size difference of top and bottom of the shaft center height is -0.5
4 The 400V class motor has -H at the end of its type name.
170
Dedicated motor (SF-V5RU(H)) outline dimension drawings (1500r/min series) (standard horizontal type with brake)
SF-V5RU(H) 1KB SF-V5RU(H) 2KB , 3KB , 5KB , 7KB
Connector (for encoder)

MS3102A20-29P Terminal box for cooling fan
MS3102A20-29P Terminal box for cooling fan
L
L A R KL
A R D
KL KA B Q
φ22
KA B 1
50 D Exhaust Main QK
φ22
Exhaust Main 40 Suction terminal box
Suction terminal box
1
A 2
KP
1 1
A
H
KP
KG
C
A φ27
G
2
C
Direction of
KG
G
2 φ27 J
cooling fan wind
F F XB E E
Direction of Mark for earthing
Mark for earthing XB N M
cooling fan wind (grounding) F F 2 E E (grounding)
ML
N M Earth (ground)
Earth (ground) terminal (M5) W
Sliding distance
terminal (M5)
U
W Sliding distance Main terminal box Terminal box for cooling fan X
For brake (B1, B2)
T
X
U
For motor (U, V, W)
Z
T
For thermal protector (G1, G2) S

S Frame leg viewed For cooling fan (A, B)
Section AA Frame leg viewed
Section AA from above from above
B1 B2 U V W G1 G2 A B C
Earthing (grounding) Earthing (grounding)

terminal terminal
SF-V5RU(H) 11KB , 15KB , 18KB , 22KB SF-V5RU(H) 30KB , 37KB , 45KB , 55KB
Terminal box for cooling fan Connector (for encoder)

Connector (for encoder) MS3102A20-29P Terminal box for cooling fan
MS3102A20-29P
L L
A R A R
KL 140
KA B 110 B D
Main D
90 φ22 KA 110
Exhaust terminal box 1 Main
Suction terminal box
φ22
Exhaust φ90
Suction
1, 2 A 2 1
KP
2
A
KP
1, 2
H
KG
H
φ56
C
KG
A
G
C
G
Direction of Mark for earthing J
cooling fan wind (grounding) F F XB E E J
Earth (ground) Direction of Mark for earthing
N M XB
terminal (M8) cooling fan wind (grounding) F F E E
N M
W Sliding distance
Earth (ground) W
U
X
Sliding distance
U
terminal (M12)
T
X
T
Terminal box for cooling fan

Z
Main terminal box

S For motor (U, V, W)
Z
Frame leg viewed S

Section AA For cooling fan (A, B, C)
from above Section AA Frame leg viewed
Main
terminal box Earthing from above
A B C
(grounding)
U V W
terminal
indicates an inserting position of a bolt with hex head
Earthing (grounding)
holes for manual opening.
terminal
B1 B2 G1 G2
Make sure to earth the earth terminal of the frame installation

For brake (B1, B2) For thermal protector (G1, G2) foot as well as the earth terminal in the terminal box.

SF-V5RUB SF-V5RUB1 SF-V5RUB3 SF-V5RUB4 Motor Shaft End Terminal Screw Size
Frame Mass
Output Output Output Output
No. (kg) A B C D E F G H I J KA KD KG KL KP L M ML N X XB Z Q QK R S T U W U,V,W A,B,(C) G1,G2 B1,B2
(kW) (kW) (kW) (kW)
1.5 — — — 90L 29 296.5 114 90 183.6 70 62.5 4 — — — 53 27 65 220 245 465 175 — 150 15 56 9 50 40 168.5 24j6 7 4 8 M6 M4 M4 M4
2.2 1.5 — — 100L 46 333.5 128 100 207 80 70 6.5 — — 40 65 27 78 231 265 526.5 200 212 180 4 63 12 60 45 193 28j6 7 4 8 M6 M4 M4 M4
3.7 2.2 1.5 — 112M 53 355 135 112 228 95 70 6.5 — — 40 69 27 93 242 290 555 230 242 180 4 70 12 60 45 200 28j6 7 4 8 M6 M4 M4 M4
5.5 3.7 2.2 — 132S 70 416 152 132 266 108 70 6.5 — — 40 75 27 117 256 329 655 256 268 180 4 89 12 80 63 239 38k6 8 5 10 M6 M4 M4 M4
7.5 5.5 3.7 1.5 132M 80 435 171 132 266 108 89 6.5 — — 40 94 27 117 256 329 693 256 268 218 4 89 12 80 63 258 38k6 8 5 10 M6 M4 M4 M4
11 7.5 5.5 2.2 160M 140 522.5 198 160 318 127 105 8 — — 50 105 56 115 330 391 845.5 310 — 254 4 108 14.5 110 90 323 42k6 8 5 12 M8 M4 M4 M4
15 11 7.5 3.7 160L 155 544.5 220 160 318 127 127 8 — — 50 127 56 115 330 391 889.5 310 — 298 4 108 14.5 110 90 345 42k6 8 5 12 M8 M4 M4 M4
18.5 — — — 185
180M 568.5 225.5 180 363 139.5 120.5 8 — — 50 127 56 139 352 428 920 335 — 285 4 121 14.5 110 90 351.5 48k6 9 5.5 14 M8 M4 M4 M4
22 15 11 — 215
SPECIFICATIONS
— 18.5 15 5.5 180L — — — — — — — — — — — — — — — — — — — — — — — — — — — — — — — — — — *

30 — — — 305
200L 644.5 267.5 200 406 159 152.5 11 — — 70 145 90 487 — 546 1070 390 — 361 4 133 18.5 140 110 425.5 60m6 11 7 18 M10 M4 M4 M4
30, 45 22, 30 18.5 7.5 330
55 37 22, 30 11, 15 225S 395 659 277 225 446 178 143 11 — — 70 145 90 533 — 592 1091 428 — 342 4 149 18.5 140 110 432 65m6 11 7 18 M10 M4 M4 M4
0
5. Since a brake power device is a stand-alone, install it inside the enclosure.
(This device should be arranged at the customer side.)
* Consult our sales office.
6
171
Dedicated motor (SF-V5RU(H)) outline dimension drawings (1500r/min series) (flange type)
SF-V5RUF(H) 1K SF-V5RUF(H) 2K , 3K , 5K , 7K

MS3102A20-29P MS3102A20-29P
LL
LL
KB LR
Q KL KB LR
LG LE LN LZ Q
Exhaust QK LG LE KL
QK LN LZ
Section Exhaust
AA Section
Suction AA
A LA
B Suction
LA
IE
LC
LB
D
B B A
LC
LB
D
A
KD B
Direction of
cooling fan wind
W KD A
Earth (ground) terminal (M5)
U
Direction of
T
Mark for earthing (grounding)

cooling fan wind W
U
S
T
Section BB For motor (U, V, W)
For thermal protector (G1, G2) S
Section BB
A B U V W G1 G2
terminal
SF-V5RUF(H) 11K , 15K , 18K , 22K SF-V5RUF(H) 30K , 37K , 45K

MS3102A20-29P MS3102A20-29P
LL LL
KB LR KB LR
Q
Q QK KL
LG LE LN LZ
LG LE LN LZ Exhaust
QK KL Section
Exhaust Section
AA
AA Suction
IE
Suction
LA
IE
B A
LA
A
LC
LB
D
B
LC
LB
D
B
B
KD A KD
Direction of A
cooling fan wind Earth (ground) terminal (M12)
Direction of Mark for earthing (grounding) W
Earth (ground) terminal (M8) W
cooling fan wind
U
Mark for earthing (grounding) With guard wires

U
With guard wires

T
For motor (U, V, W)

S
S Section BB
Section BB
terminal
Make sure to earth the earth terminal of the flange section

For cooling fan (A, B, C) For thermal protector (G1, G2) as well as the earth terminal in the terminal box.

SF-V5RUF SF-V5RUF1 SF-V5RUF3 SF-V5RUF4 Motor Shaft End Terminal Screw Size
Flange Frame Mass
Number No. (kg) D IE KB KD KL LA LB LC LE LG LL LN LZ LR Q QK S T U W U,V,W A,B,(C) G1,G2
(kW) (kW) (kW) (kW)
1.5 — — — FF165 90L 26.5 183.6 — 198.5 27 220 165 130j6 200 3.5 12 402 4 12 50 50 40 24j6 7 4 8 M6 M4 M4
2.2 1.5 — — FF215 100L 37 207 130 213 27 231 215 180j6 250 4 16 432 4 14.5 60 60 45 28j6 7 4 8 M6 M4 M4
3.7 2.2 1.5 — FF215 112M 46 228 141 239 27 242 215 180j6 250 4 16 448 4 14.5 60 60 45 28j6 7 4 8 M6 M4 M4
5.5 3.7 2.2 — FF265 132S 65 266 156 256 27 256 265 230j6 300 4 20 484 4 14.5 80 80 63 38k6 8 5 10 M6 M4 M4
7.5 5.5 3.7 1.5 FF265 132M 70 266 156 294 27 256 265 230j6 300 4 20 522 4 14.5 80 80 63 38k6 8 5 10 M6 M4 M4
11 7.5 5.5 2.2 FF300 160M 110 318 207 318 56 330 300 250j6 350 5 20 625 4 18.5 110 110 90 42k6 8 5 12 M8 M4 M4
15 11 7.5 3.7 FF300 160L 125 318 207 362 56 330 300 250j6 350 5 20 669 4 18.5 110 110 90 42k6 8 5 12 M8 M4 M4
18.5 — — — 160
FF350 180M 363 230 378.5 56 352 350 300j6 400 5 20 690 4 18.5 110 110 90 48k6 9 5.5 14 M8 M4 M4
22 15 11 — 185
— 18.5 15 5.5 FF350 180L — — — — — — — — — — — — — — — — — — — — — — — — *
30 — — — 270
FF400 200L 406 255 485 90 346 400 350j6 450 5 22 823.5 8 18.5 140 140 110 60m6 11 7 18 M10 M4 M4
37, 45 22, 30 18.5 7.5 290
For use under the shaft, the protection structure of the cooling fan is IP20.
3 The size difference of top and bottom of the shaft center height is 0
-0.5
* Consult our sales office.
172
Dedicated motor (SF-V5RU(H)) outline dimension drawings (1500r/min series) (flange type with brake)
SF-V5RUF(H) 1KB SF-V5RUF(H) 2KB , 3KB , 5KB , 7KB
Connector (for encoder) Connector (for encoder) Terminal box for cooling fan
MS3102A20-29P Terminal box for cooling fan MS3102A20-29P
LL
LL
KB LR LR
KB
LG LE KL Q KL
Exhaust Main Q Exhaust LG LE
Main 1
terminal box QK terminal box QK
Suction
φ22
φ22
Suction Section Section A LN LZ
LN LZ
AA AA
KP
KP
1 1 1
2
B A B LA
D
LC
LB
D
LC
LB
B LA
B A
2 A 2
KD
KD
Direction of 2 Direction of
cooling fan wind
W cooling fan wind W
U
U
T
T
S
Main terminal box Terminal box for cooling fan S
For brake (B1, B2)
Section BB
For motor (U, V, W) Section BB
For thermal protector (G1, G2)
B1 B2 U V W G1 G2 A B C
Earthing Earthing
(grounding) (grounding)
terminal terminal
SF-V5RUF(H) 11KB , 15KB

MS3102A20-29P
Terminal box for cooling fan
LL
KB LR
KL
Main LG LE
Q
φ22
terminal box LN LZ
Exhaust QK 1
Section
AA
KP
Suction
LA
1, 2 A 2
B
LC
LB
D
B
KD A
W
Direction of
U
cooling fan wind

T

S
Main terminal box Terminal box for cooling fan
For motor (U, V, W) Section BB
For cooling fan (A, B, C)
Earthing A B C
U V W
(grounding) Earthing indicates an inserting position of a bolt with hex head holes
terminal (grounding) for manual opening.
terminal
B1 B2 G1 G2
Make sure to earth the earth terminal of the flange section

For brake (B1, B2) For thermal protector (G1, G2) as well as the earth terminal in the terminal box.

SF-V5RUFB SF-V5RUFB1 SF-V5RUFB3 SF-V5RUFB4 Motor Shaft End Terminal Screw Size
Flange Frame Mass
Number No. (kg) D KB KD KL KP LA LB LC LE LG LL LN LZ LR Q QK S T U W U,V,W A,B,(C) B1,B2 G1,G2
(kW) (kW) (kW) (kW)
1.5 — — — FF165 90L 31.5 183.6 198.5 27 220 155 165 130j6 200 3.5 12 442 4 12 50 50 40 24j6 7 4 8 M6 M4 M4 M4
2.2 1.5 — — FF215 100L 50 207 213 27 231 165 215 180j6 250 4 16 481.5 4 14.5 60 60 45 28j6 7 4 8 M6 M4 M4 M4
3.7 2.2 1.5 — FF215 112M 58 228 239 27 242 178 215 180j6 250 4 16 525 4 14.5 60 60 45 28j6 7 4 8 M6 M4 M4 M4
5.5 3.7 2.2 — FF265 132S 83 266 256 27 256 197 265 230j6 300 4 20 597 4 14.5 80 80 63 38k6 8 5 10 M6 M4 M4 M4
7.5 5.5 3.7 1.5 FF265 132M 88 266 294 27 256 197 265 230j6 300 4 20 635 4 14.5 80 80 63 38k6 8 5 10 M6 M4 M4 M4
11 7.5 5.5 2.2 FF300 160M 151 318 318 56 330 231 300 250j6 350 5 20 735.5 4 18.5 110 110 90 42k6 8 5 12 M8 M4 M4 M4
15 11 7.5 3.7 FF300 160L 167 318 362 56 330 231 300 250j6 350 5 20 779.5 4 18.5 110 110 90 42k6 8 5 12 M8 M4 M4 M4
SPECIFICATIONS
For use under the shaft, the protection structure of the cooling fan is IP20.
0
5. Since a brake power device is a stand-alone, install it inside the enclosure.
(This device should be arranged at the customer side.)
6
173
Dedicated motor (SF-THY) outline dimension drawings (1500r/min series)
75kW to 160kW
A R
PF4 Class B screw
B Q
KA
Terminal box for cooling fan MS3102A20-29P
QK
Suction Exhaust
KG
C
G
Direction of W
cooling fan wind K2 K2 J
U
T
K1 K E E
4-φZ hole
F F XB M
This hole is not used. N
S
200kW, 250kW
L
A R
PF4 Class B screw
B Q
KA
Terminal box for cooling fan MS3102A20-29P
QK
Suction Exhaust
H
KG
C-1.0
0
Direction of
W
cooling fan wind
K2 K2 J
U
T
4-φZ hole K1 K E E
F F XB M
This hole is not used.
N S

Frame Mass Motor Shaft End Size
Outpur
No. (kg) A B C D E F G H J K K1 K2 L M N R Z XB KA KG Q QK S W T U
75 250MD 610 988.5 340.5 250 557 203 174.5 30 775 100 130 168 50 1471 486 449 482.5 24 168 157.5 635 140 110 φ75m6 20 12 7.5
90 250MD 660 988.5 340.5 250 557 203 174.5 30 775 100 130 168 50 1471 486 449 482.5 24 168 157.5 635 140 110 φ75m6 20 12 7.5
110 280MD 870 1049.5 397.5 280 607 228.5 209.5 30 845 110 130 181 40 1619 560 449 569.5 24 190 210.5 705 170 140 φ85m6 22 14 9
132 280MD 890 1049.5 397.5 280 607 228.5 209.5 30 845 110 130 181 40 1619 560 449 569.5 24 190 210.5 705 170 140 φ85m6 22 14 9
160 280MD 920 1049.5 397.5 280 607 228.5 209.5 30 845 110 130 181 40 1619 560 499 569.5 24 190 210.5 705 170 140 φ85m6 22 14 9
200 280L 1170 1210.5 416.5 280 652 228.5 228.5 30 885 110 160 160 75 1799 560 607 588.5 24 190 214.5 745 170 140 φ85m6 22 14 9
250 315H 1630 1343 565 315 717 254 355 35 965 130 175 428 80 2084 636 870 741 28 216 306 825 170 140 φ95m6 25 14 9
Note) The tolerance of the top and bottom of the center shaft height *C is 0
-0.5 for the 250 frame and 0
-1.0 for the 280 frame or more.
174
Heatsink protrusion attachment procedure
6.4 Heatsink protrusion attachment procedure

When encasing the inverter in an enclosure, the generated heat amount in an enclosure can be greatly reduced by
installing the heatsink portion of the inverter outside the enclosure. When installing the inverter in a compact
enclosure, etc., this installation method is recommended.
6.4.1 When using a heatsink protrusion attachment (FR-A7CN)

For the FR-A720-1.5K to 55K, FR-A740-0.4K to 132K, a heatsink can be protruded outside the enclosure using a
heatsink protrusion attachment (FR-A7CN). (For the 160K or more, attachment is not necessary when the heatsink
is to be protruded.)
For a panel cut dimension drawing and an installation procedure of the heatsink protrusion attachment (FR-A7CN)
to the inverter, refer to a manual of "heatsink protrusion attachment".
6.4.2 Protrusion of heatsink of the FR-A740-160K or more

(1) Panel cutting
Cut the panel of the enclosure according to the inverter capacity.
• FR-A740-160K, 185K • FR-A740-220K, 250K, 280K
6-M10 screw
6-M10 screw
484
662
200 200
13
300 300
15
954
985
Hole
984
954
Hole
18
15
• FR-A740-315K, 355K • FR-A740-400K, 450K, 500K
771 6-M10 screw 976 8-M10 screw

300 300 300
21
315 315
21
1550
1508
Hole
1300
1258
Hole
SPECIFICATIONS
21
21
6
175
(2) Shift and removal of a rear side installation frame
• FR-A740-160K to 280K
One installation frame is attached to each of the upper and lower Shift
part of the inverter. Change the position of the rear side installa- Upper
installation
tion frame on the upper and lower side of the inverter to the front frame
side as shown on the right. When changing the installation
frames, make sure that the installation orientation is correct.
Lower
installation
Shift frame
• FR-A740-315K or more
Two installation frames each are attached to the upper and lower Removal
part of the inverter. Remove the rear side installation frame on the Upper installation
frame (rear side)
upper and lower side of the inverter as shown on the right.
Lower installation
frame (rear side)
Removal
176
(3) Installation of the inverter

Push the inverter heatsink portion outside the enclosure and fix the enclosure and inverter with upper and lower
installation frame.
* For the FR-A740-160K or more, there are finger

Enclosure
guards behind the enclosure. Therefore, the
Inside the thickness of the panel should be less than 10mm
enclosure Exhausted air (*1) and also do not place anything around finger
guards to avoid contact with the finger guards.
*
Enclosure
Inverter 140
10* 1
Finger guard
Installation
6
frame
D1
Inverter Type
(mm)
Dimension of FR-A740-160K, 185K 185
Cooling
wind the outside of
the enclosure FR-A740-220K to 500K 184
D1
CAUTION
· Having a cooling fan, the cooling section which comes out of the enclosure can not be used in the environment of water
drops, oil, mist, dust, etc.
· Be careful not to drop screws, dust etc. into the inverter and cooling fan section.
SPECIFICATIONS
6
177
For customers who have replaced the older model with this inverter
APPENDICES
Appendix 1 For customers who have replaced the older model with this
inverter
Appendix 1-1 Replacement of the FR-A500 series
(1) Instructions for installation
1)Removal procedure of the front cover was changed. (with screws) Please note. (Refer to page 5.)
2)Removal procedure of the operation panel was changed. (with screws) Please note. (Refer to page 5.)
3)Plug-in options of the A500 series are not compatible
4)Operation panel (FR-DU04) can not be used.
5)Setup software (FR-SW0-SETUP/FR-SW1-SETUP) can not be used.
(2) Wiring instructions
1)The control circuit terminal block can be used for the FR-A700 series without removing wiring.
Note that the wiring cover (0.4K to 22K) is not compatible.
FR-A500 series
FR-A700 series
(Note that the relay output 2 (A2, B2, C2) specific for the FR-A700 series can not be used with the FR-A500 series
terminals.)
(3) Instructions for continuous use of the FR-PU04 (parameter unit)
1) For the FR-A700 series, many functions (parameters) have been added. When setting these parameters, the
parameter name and setting range are not displayed. User initial value list and user clear of the HELP function
can not be used.
2) For the FR-A700 series, many protective functions have been added. These functions activate, but all alarms
are displayed as "Fault 14". When the alarm history has been checked, "E.14" appears. Added alarm display
will not appear on the parameter unit.
3) User initial value setting can not be used.
4) User registration/clear (user group 2) can not be used.
5) Parameter copy/verification function can not be used.
(4) Parameter resetting
It is easy if you use setup software (FR-Configurator).
178
For customers who have replaced the older model with this inverter
(5) Main differences and compatibilities with the FR-A500(L) series
Item FR-A500(L) FR-A700

V/F control
V/F control Advanced magnetic flux vector control
Control method
Advanced magnetic flux vector control Real sensorless vector control
Vector control (used with a plug-in option FR-A7AP)
User group (16) only
User group 1 (16), user group 2 (16)
Setting methods were partially changed
(Pr. 160, Pr. 173 to Pr. 175)
(Pr. 160, Pr. 172 to Pr. 173)
User initial value setting (Pr. 199) was cleared
User initial value setting (Pr. 199) Substitutable with the copy function of the operation
Changed/cleared panel (FR-DU07)
functions Long wiring mode Setting is not necessary
(Pr. 240 setting 10, 11) (Pr. 240 settings "10" and "11" were cleared)
Parameter number change
Intelligent mode selection
(Pr. 60 Energy saving control selection)
(Pr. 60)
(Pr. 292 Automatic acceleration/deceleration)
Program operation
Function was cleared
(Pr. 200 to Pr. 231)
Removable terminal block
Terminal block Removable terminal block
Upward compatibility (A500 terminal block mountable)
FR-PU07
FR-DU07
PU FR-PU04, DU04 FR-PU04 (Some functions, such as parameter copy,
are unavailable.)
FR-DU04 unavailable
Dedicated plug-in option (incompatible)
Plug-in Options Computer link, relay output option Built into the inverter
FR-A5NR (RS-485 terminals, relay output 2 points)
· FR-A740-0.4K to 7.5K, 18.5K to 55K, 110K, 160K are compatible in mounting dimensions
For the FR-A740-11K, 15K, an optional intercompatibility attachment (FR-AAT) is necessary.
Installation size
· Heatsink protrusion attachment is not compatible.
Also, the panel cut dimension of 3.7K or less, 400V class 11K, 15K, 75K or more is not compatible.
Appendix 1-2 Replacement of the FR-A200 <EXCELENT> series

Instructions for installation
• When using the installation holes of the FR-A200(E) series, FR-A5AT (intercompatibility attachment) is necessary.
179
Appendix 2 Instructions for UL and cUL
(Conforming standard UL 508C, CSA C22.2 No.14)
(1) Installation
This inverter is UL-listed as a product for use in an enclosure.
Design an enclosure so that the inverter ambient temperature, humidity and atmosphere satisfy the specifications.
(Refer to page 161.)
Wiring protection
For installation in the United States, branch circuit protection must be provided in accordance with the National
Electrical Code and any applicable provincial codes.
For installation in Canada, branch circuit protection must be provided in accordance with the Canada Electrical Code
and any applicable provincial codes.
Use the Class RK5, Class T or L type fuses certified by UL and cUL.
FR-A720-K 0.4 0.75 1.5 2.2 3.7 5.5 7.5 11 15 18.5 22 30 37 45 55
Rated voltage(V) 240V or more
Without power
factor improving 15 20 30 40 60 80 150 175 200 225 300 350 400 500 500
Rated
reactor
current
With power
(A)
reactor
FR-A720-K 75 90
Without power
factor improving  
Rated
reactor
current
With power
(A)
factor improving 600 700
reactor
FR-A740-K 0.4 0.75 1.5 2.2 3.7 5.5 7.5 11 15 18.5 22 30 37 45 55

Without power
Rated
reactor
current
With power
(A)
reactor
FR-A740-K 75 90 110 132 160 185 220 250 280 315 355 400 450 500
Without power
factor improving              
Rated
reactor
current
With power
(A)
factor improving 300 350 400 500 600 700 800 900 1000 1100 1200 1350 1500 1800
reactor
(2) Wiring of the power supply and motor

For wiring the input (R/L1, S/L2, T/L3) and output (U, V, W) terminals of the inverter, use the UL-listed copper wires
(rated at 75°C) and round crimping terminals. Crimp the crimping terminals with the crimping tool recommended by the
terminal maker.
(3) Short circuit ratings
• 200V class
Suitable For Use in A Circuit Capable Of Delivering Not More Than 100kA rms Symmetrical Amperes, 264V Maximum.
• 400V class
55K or less
75K or more
180
(4) Motor overload protection
This inverter is certified as a motor overload protection device by UL.
When using the electronic thermal relay function as motor overload protection, set the rated motor current to Pr. 9
Electronic thermal O/L relay.
Electronic thermal relay function operation characteristic
Pr. 9 = 50% setting of Pr. 9 = 100% setting
inverter rating*1.2 of inverter rating*1.2
Operation time (min)
This function detects the overload (overheat) of the

(min) unit display in
70 30Hz or more*3
30Hz
motor, stops the operation of the inverter's output
this region
or more*3 20Hz Operation region

20Hz 10Hz Region on the right of transistor, and stops the output.
60
10Hz
6Hz
characteristic curve
Non-operation region
(The operation characteristic is shown on the left)
6Hz
0.5Hz Region on the left of When using the Mitsubishi constant-torque motor
50 0.5Hz characteristic curve 1) Set "1" or any of "13" to "18", "50", "53", "54" in Pr. 71.
Characteristic when (This provides a 100% continuous torque characteristic
electronic thermal relay
240 in the low-speed range.)
(s) unit display in this region
function for motor

protection is turned off 2) Set the rated current of the motor in Pr. 9.
Operation time (s)
(When Pr. 9 setting is 0(A))

180 *1 When a value 50% of the inverter rated output current (current
value) is set in Pr. 9
120 *2 The % value denotes the percentage to the inverter rated output
current. It is not the percentage to the motor rated current.
For transistor protection *3 When you set the electronic thermal relay function dedicated to the
60 Electronic thermal relay Mitsubishi constant-torque motor, this characteristic curve applies
function
to operation at 6Hz or higher.
52.5% 105%
50 100 150
Inverter output power (%)
(% to the rated input current)
CAUTION
⋅ Protective function by electronic thermal relay function is reset by inverter power reset and reset signal input. Avoid
unnecessary reset and power-off.
⋅ When multiple motors are operated by a single inverter, protection cannot be provided by the electronic thermal relay function.
Install an external thermal relay to each motor.
⋅ When the difference between the inverter and motor capacities is large and the setting is small, the protective characteristics of
the electronic thermal relay function will be deteriorated. In this case, use an external thermal relay.
⋅ A special motor cannot be protected by the electronic thermal relay function. Use the external thermal relay.
181
Appendix 3 Instructions for Compliance with the European Directives
(1) EMC Directive
We have self-confirmed our inverters as products compliant to the EMC Directive (second environment of conforming standard EN61800-
3) and place the CE mark on the inverters.
Note: First environment
Environment including residential buildings. Includes buildings directly connected without a transformer to the low voltage power
supply network which supplies power to residential buildings.
Second environment
Environment including all buildings except buildings directly connected without a transformer to the low voltage power supply
network which supplies power to residential buildings.
1) Notes
Set the EMC filter valid and install the inverter and perform wiring according to the following instructions.
* The inverter is equipped with a built-in EMC filter. Set the EMC filter valid. (The EMC filter is invalid when shipped from the factory. (The
FR-A720-0.4K and 0.75K are always valid.) For details, refer to page 9.)
* Connect the inverter to an earthed power supply.
* Install a motor and a control cable written in the EMC Installation Manual (BCN-A21041-204) according to the instruction.
* The cable length between the inverter and the motor is 5 m maximum.
* Confirm that the inverter complies with the EMC Directive as the industrial drives application for final installation.
(2) Low Voltage Directive

We have self-confirmed our inverters as products compliant to the Low Voltage Directive (Conforming standard EN 50178) and place the
CE mark on the inverters.
1)Outline of instructions
* Do not use an earth leakage current breaker as an electric shock protector without connecting the equipment to the earth. Connect the
equipment to the earth securely.
* Wire the earth terminal independently. (Do not connect two or more cables to one terminal.)
* Use the cable sizes on page 15 under the following conditions.
⋅ Ambient temperature: 40°C maximum
If conditions are different from above, select appropriate wire according to EN60204 Appendix C TABLE 5.
* Use a tinned (plating should not include zinc) crimping terminal to connect the earth (ground) cable. When tightening the screw, be careful
not to damage the threads.
For use as a product compliant with the Low Voltage Directive, use PVC cable whose size is indicated on page 15.
* Use the moulded case circuit breaker and magnetic contactor which conform to the EN or IEC Standard.
* When using an earth leakage current breaker, use a residual current operated protective device (RCD) of type B (breaker which can detect
both AC and DC). If not, provide double or reinforced insulation between the inverter and other equipment, or put a transformer between the
main power supply and inverter.
* Use the inverter under the conditions of overvoltage category II (usable regardless of the earth (ground) condition of the power supply),
overvoltage category III (usable with the earthed-neutral system power supply, 400V class only) and pollution degree 2 or lower specified
in IEC664.
⋅ To use the inverter of 37K or more (IP00) under the conditions of pollution degree 2, install it in the enclosure of IP 2X or higher.
⋅ To use the inverter under the conditions of pollution degree 3, install it in the enclosure of IP54 or higher.
⋅ To use the inverter of 30K or less (IP20) outside of an enclosure in the environment of pollution degree 2, fix a fan cover with fan cover
fixing screws enclosed.
Fan cover Fan cover

Fan cover fixing screw
fixing screw fixing screws
Fan cover Fan cover Fan cover
Fan Fan
Fan
FR-A720-1.5K to 3.7K FR-A720-5.5K to 11K FR-A720-15K to 22K

FR-A740-2.2K, 3.7K FR-A740-5.5K to 15K FR-A740-18.5K to 22K
* On the input and output of the inverter, use cables of the type and size set forth in EN60204 Appendix C.
* The operating capacity of the relay outputs (terminal symbols A1, B1, C1, A2, B2, C2) should be 30VDC, 0.3A. (Relay outputs are basically
isolated from the inverter internal circuit.)
* Control circuit terminals on page 8 are safely isolated from the main circuit.
* Environment
During Operation In Storage During Transportation
Ambient temperature -10°C to +50°C -20°C to +65°C -20°C to +65°C
Ambient humidity 90% RH or less 90% RH or less 90% RH or less
Maximum altitude 1000m 1000m 10000m
Details are given in the technical information "Low Voltage Directive Conformance Guide" (BCN-A21041-203). Please contact your sales
representative.
182
REVISIONS
*The manual number is given on the bottom left of the back cover.
Print Date * Revision

Manual Number
Jun., 2005 IB(NA)-0600225ENG-A First edition
Aug., 2005 IB(NA)-0600225ENG-B Additions
⋅ FR-A720-75K, 90K
⋅ FR-A740-0.4K to 160K
Sep., 2005 IB(NA)-0600225ENG-C Additions
FR-A740-185K to 500K
Compatible with the FR-A7AP
⋅ Orientation control
⋅ Encoder feedback control
⋅ Vector control
For Maximum Safety

• Mitsubishi inverters are not designed or manufactured to be used in equipment or systems in situations that
can affect or endanger human life.
• When considering this product for operation in special applications such as machinery or systems used in
passenger transportation, medical, aerospace, atomic power, electric power, or submarine repeating
applications, please contact your nearest Mitsubishi sales representative.
• Although this product was manufactured under conditions of strict quality control, you are strongly advised
to install safety devices to prevent serious accidents when it is used in facilities where breakdowns of the
product are likely to cause a serious accident.
• Please do not use this product for loads other than three-phase induction motors.

A700 Basic Manual

Uploaded by

Copyright:

Available Formats

A700 Basic Manual

Uploaded by

Document Information

Copyright

Available Formats

Share this document

Share or Embed Document

Sharing Options

Did you find this document useful?

Is this content inappropriate?

Copyright:

Available Formats

A700 Basic Manual

Uploaded by

Copyright:

Available Formats

INVERTER

2 INSTALLATION AND WIRING ...................................................................... 2

3 DRIVE THE MOTOR .................................................................................... 38

4.4 Correspondences between digital and actual characters.....................................143

5 PRECAUTIONS FOR MAINTENANCE AND INSPECTION ..................... 149

IB(NA)-0600225ENG-C(0509)MEE Printed in Japan Specifications subject to change without notice.

Storage temperature -20°C to +65°C *1

2 INSTALLATION AND WIRING 2

2.1 Peripheral devices ................................................................................................. 3

3 DRIVE THE MOTOR 38

3.1 Step of operation.................................................................................................. 38

4.1 Reset method of protective function .................................................................. 129

5.1 Inspection item................................................................................................... 149

6.1 Rating................................................................................................................. 157

Operation panel (FR-DU07)

PRODUCT CHECKING AND PARTS IDENTIFICATION

These screws are necessary for compliance with the

USB connector (Refer to page 27)

Moulded case circuit breaker (MCCB) or Inverter (FR-A700)

2.1 Peripheral devices

Breaker Selection*2,4 Input Side Magnetic Contactor*3

2.2 Method of removal and reinstallation of the front cover

Front cover Front cover

Front cover Front cover

FR-A720-30K or more, FR-A740-30K or more

Front cover 2 Front cover 2

2.3 Installation of the inverter and instructions

Fix six positions for the FR-A740- *

• Install the inverter under the following conditions.

Ambient temperature and humidity Clearances (Front) Clearances (Side)

Vertical mounting Oil mist, flammable

Selection of automatic restart CS PTC SE Open collector output common

2.4.2 EMC filter

3.7K or less 5.5K, 7.5K 11K or more

FR-A720-1.5K to 3.7K FR-A720-5.5K, 7.5K FR-A720-11K FR-A720-15K to 22K FR-A720-30K or more

EMC filter Disengage connector fixing tab With tab disengaged,

2.4.3 Specification of main circuit terminal

IM Screw size Screw size Charge lamp

As this is an inside cover fixing screw, Power Motor

FR-A720-5.5K, 7.5K FR-A720-11K

R/L1 S/L2 T/L3 N/- P/+

Jumper Screw size

Screw size (M6)

Charge lamp Charge lamp

Screw size (M12) Screw size (M12)

R/L1 S/L2 T/L3 N/- P/+ PR Charge lamp

N/- P/+ PR Jumper

FR-A740-30K to 45K FR-A740-55K

Screw size (M8) Screw size (M10) Screw size (M8)

R/L1 S/L2 T/L3 N/- P/+

FR-A740-75K, 90K FR-A740-110K, 132K

R/L1 S/L2 T/L3 N/- P/+

FR-A740-160K, 185K FR-A740-220K to 500K

Charge lamp Charge lamp

Screw size (M12)

R/L1 S/L2 T/L3 N/- P/+

Screw size (M12) DC reactor

• Handling of the wiring cover

400V class (when input power supply is 440V)

The line voltage drop can be calculated by the following formula:

Breaker Selection2,4 Input Side Magnetic Contactor3